WellCAD Basics - Advanced Logic Technology

4.4 

Book 1 - Basics

V.2011.10.17

Introduction .............................................................................................................I 

License Information...........................................................................................I 

Conventions........................................................................................................I 

About build versions and modules .................................................................. II 

How to use this manual ................................................................................. III 

What’s New in WellCAD v4.4 ......................................................................... IV 

Book 1 - WellCAD Basics ........................................................................................1 

WellCAD Workspace......................................................................................... 2 

Tool Bar and Title Bar................................................................................. 2 

1.2 Borehole Documents ................................................................................... 3 

1.2.1 Loading and Saving Borehole Documents ......................................... 4 

1.2.2 Creating a new Borehole Document................................................... 6 

1.2.3 Draft, Presentation and Print Preview Modes .................................... 7 

1.2.4 Document Handling ........................................................................... 8 

1.3 Logs.............................................................................................................10 

1.3.1 Log Types and Their Characteristics................................................. 11 

1.3.2 Basic Log Editing.............................................................................. 38 

1.3.3 Log Settings........................................................................................61 

1.4 Basic Document Editing ............................................................................71 

1.4.1 Depth Axis ..........................................................................................71 

1.4.2 Data Import ....................................................................................... 77 

1.4.3 Header and Trailer ...........................................................................102 

1.4.4 Templates ......................................................................................... 108 

1.4.5 Data Export ...................................................................................... 115 

1.4.6 Printing ............................................................................................. 120 

1.5 Working with Logs ................................................................................... 124 

1.5.1 Formula Parser..................................................................................124 

1.5.2 Lithology Columns...........................................................................128 

1.5.3 Using Contact Styles ........................................................................130 

1.5.4 Color Palette Design.........................................................................133 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

1.5.5 Setting up Classifications................................................................. 135 

1.5.6 Filtering Logs ................................................................................... 136 

1.5.7 Interpolating Log Data .................................................................... 138 

1.5.8 Resample Logs ................................................................................. 138 

1.5.9 Creating Blocked Curves ................................................................. 140 

1.5.10 Zonation of Logs ............................................................................ 144 

1.5.11 Correcting Data for Borehole Conditions ...................................... 145 

1.5.12 Computing Well Deviation Data.................................................... 146 

1.5.13 Spectral Gamma Processing........................................................... 153 

1.5.14 Hole Volume Calculation ............................................................... 171 

1.5.15 Using the Statistics Bar .................................................................. 175 

1.6 Annotations............................................................................................... 178 

1.6.1 Inserting and Editing Annotations .................................................. 178 

1.6.2 Managing Annotation Layers .......................................................... 184 

1.7 Advanced Techniques .............................................................................. 185 

1.7.1 Depth Matching ............................................................................... 185 

1.7.2 Handling Different Depth Systems ................................................. 191 

1.7.3 Using Time Based Data................................................................... 195 

1.7.4 Embedding Borehole Documents ...................................................203 

1.8 Creating Cross-Plots.................................................................................204 

1.8.1 Charts and Plots................................................................................204 

1.8.2 The Cross-Plot Workspace............................................................... 210 

1.8.3 Building Data Clusters..................................................................... 215 

1.8.4 Adding Regression ........................................................................... 219 

1.8.5 Layout and Formatting ....................................................................223 

Appendix A .......................................................................................................... 231 

Well / Formula Log .......................................................................................232 

Mud Log.........................................................................................................243 

Depth Column Log........................................................................................256 

Interval Log....................................................................................................265 

www.alt.lu

Comment Log ................................................................................................277 

Marker Log.....................................................................................................286 

CoreDesc Log.................................................................................................293 

Lithology Log.................................................................................................303 

Strata Log ....................................................................................................... 316 

Stacking Pattern Log......................................................................................329 

OLE Log ........................................................................................................337 

Full Wave Sonic Log ......................................................................................344 

VSP Log..........................................................................................................350 

Image Log / Image Log Float 2 / Image Log Float 4 .................................355 

RGB Log.........................................................................................................363 

Analysis Log ...................................................................................................368 

Percentage Log ..............................................................................................380 

Structure Log..................................................................................................390 

Breakout Log..................................................................................................405 

Bio Log........................................................................................................... 414 

Engineering Log ............................................................................................425 

Shading Log ...................................................................................................435 

3D Log............................................................................................................438 

Polar & Rose Log...........................................................................................449 

Cross Section Log ..........................................................................................476 

Appendix B ..........................................................................................................485 

Tool Bar..........................................................................................................486 

Borehole Bar...................................................................................................487 

Litho Bar.........................................................................................................489 

Pen Bar ...........................................................................................................490 

Annotation Bar and Annotation Mini Bar .....................................................490 

Document Layout Bar....................................................................................492 

Appendix C .......................................................................................................... 231 

Index ....................................................................................................................499 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS 

www.alt.lu

Introduction 

INTRODUCTION - I 

License Information 

The information contained within this document is subject to change without 

notice. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by 

any means for any purpose without the written permission of Advanced Logic 

Technology sa. 

WellCAD software is furnished under a license of nondisclosure agreement. The 

software may not be copied nor duplicated in any way or transferred to a third party 

without prior written consent from ALT. 

Conventions 

Copyright 1993 - 2011 �. Advanced Logic Technology sa. All rights reserved. 

WellCAD, CoreCAD, LithCAD, ToadCAD, HeadCAD are trademarks of 

Advanced Logic Technology sa, Bâtiment A, Route de Niederpallen, L-8506 

Rédange-sur-Attert, Grand-Duché de Luxembourg. 

Where can I find my license number? 

� Start WellCAD 

� Click Help > About WellCAD… in the menu bar 

� The About WellCAD dialog box is displayed and your serial or license 

number is shown in the Licensed To… box 

Numerous items and instructions appear throughout this guide. Those conventions 

are designed to make it quick and easy to find and understand information. 

▪ Menu names and options are printed in bold type. For example: 

Click Tools > Options 

▪ Dialog box names begin with uppercase letters. For example: 

The Tool Options dialog appears.

II - INTRODUCTION 

www.alt.lu 

▪ Key combinations that you should press appear in uppercase letters with 

bold type. If joined with a plus sign (+), press and hold the first key while 

you press the remaining one(s). For example: Press CTRL+M. 

▪ It is assumed that you are familiar with MS Windows terminology and 

operating conventions such as basic mouse techniques: Click (left click), 

right click, drag and drop. Mouse operations are printed in italic. For 

example: Click on OK. 

The above conventions will be adhered to unless specifically stated otherwise in this 

manual. 

About build versions and modules 

WellCAD is under continuous development and new upgrades and patches are 

released in irregular time intervals. Each version of WellCAD is uniquely identified 

by its version and build number. When contacting the WellCAD support team 

(support@alt.lu) you should provide the version and build number of your 

WellCAD application. It can be found in the About WellCAD dialog box that 

opens when clicking the Help > About WellCAD…option in the menu bar. 

License number 

List of modules 

Version and build number 

123456789 

Collect information 

for update request 

Serial number, version and build numbers are provided in this dialog box. Click the Module button to get 

information about activated modules. 

Several Add-On modules are available for WellCAD. A list of all modules 

available for your current WellCAD version can be seen when clicking the 

Modules button in the About WellCAD dialog. The modules, which are 

checked, are those active with your current license. Please note that when

INTRODUCTION - III 

running a Flexnet version of WellCAD you will check out one of each 

available module when clicking the Modules button. 

Click on the Update button to collect information about your license 

necessary for a software update or upgrade. Simply follow the instructions 

given in the dialog box to create the customer to vendor (*.CTV) file. 

How to use this manual 

Book 1 of this manual covers the essentials of WellCAD and teaches the 

basic structure of the program. Every user, whether working with a 

WellCAD Basic version or with a version in which one or more add-on 

modules have been activated, should be familiar with the contents of Book 

1. It is essential for effective and time saving use of the software. To avoid 

overloading the first book with a detailed description of all data container 

(log) types available in WellCAD, an extensive description of log types has 

been moved to Appendix A. This appendix may also be used as a quick 

reminder if you do not remember all the characteristics of a particular log. 

From Book 2 onwards each book covers a distinct add-on module for 

WellCAD and explains the purpose and functionality of the special 

processes contained within the module. 

You will find all books published as electronic version (PDF) on ALT’s 

homepage: www.alt.lu.

IV - INTRODUCTION 

What’s New in WellCAD v4.4 

www.alt.lu 

The following list outlines the main changes and additions made in the release of 

WellCAD v4.4: 

▪ WellCAD is available as 64 bit version. During the setup the user can 

choose from a 32 bit or 64 bit version of WellCAD being installed. While 

the 32 bit bit version is supported by all dongle models the 64 bit version is 

supported only by short USB dongles. 

▪ New objects have been added to HeadCAD. Headers support now drop 

down lists, date and time picker and check boxes. Check out the 

HeadCAD manual for more details. 

▪ The palette design editor allows now the assignment of data values to 

specific colors. See page 133. 

▪ Text Auto Completion is available in Comment Logs. Words you type into 

a comment box will be remembered. If you type in the first three 

characters of the same word next time WellCAD will show all words 

beginning with these characters to allow an auto completion of the text. 

See page 282. 

▪ WellCAD plots can be exported as graphic files in JPG, TIF, GIF, PNG 

and other formats at a user specified resolution. See page 116. 

▪ A Clear Contents option is available from the flying menu of most logs to 

erase data without removing the log from the document. See page 241. 

▪ The Depth Matcher supports multiple reference logs now. See page 185. 

▪ The Litho Bar has a new layout and allows sorting as well as keyboard 

shortcut access to the patterns. See page 489. 

▪ Auto Zonation process allowing multiple input logs. See page 144. 

▪ Improved user interface for the Alias Table. See page 79. 

▪ Improved user interface for the Statistics Bar. See page 175. 

▪ Grid line options and “sinus” scale option added for the Structure Logs 

(see page 397). 

▪ Defaults for vertical grid lines can be set under Tools > Options > Logs.

Book 1 - WellCAD Basics 

BOOK 1 - WELLCAD BASICS - 1 

This book introduces basic elements and techniques, which are essential for a 

successful and efficient work with WellCAD. We recommend reading this book 

carefully to learn what a borehole document is and which log types exist to display 

your logging data. Within this book you will learn how to import/export log data, 

setup and edit the layout of a log chart, add header/trailer sections and print the 

final chart.

2 - BOOK 1 - WELLCAD BASICS 

Frame control button 

www.alt.lu 

Menu bar 

Tool bar 

Empty borehole document 

Status bar 

WellCAD Workspace 

If you start WellCAD an empty WellCAD workspace will appear on your screen. 

The workspace is equipped with a Frame control menu, Title bar, Tool bar, Status 

bar, Minimize and Maximize buttons and Restore button for the workspace window. 

The information contained within the Title bar, Menu bar, and Status bar will vary 

according to the type of active document. The Tool bar will remain the same, 

however, certain functions may or may not be enabled according to the active 

document type. 

Close button 

Restore button 

Minimize button 

Tool Bar and Title Bar 

The Tool bar provides quick access to the more common commands using the 

mouse. Some of the icons are enabled only if the context is right, e.g. Print is not 

accessible if the active document is not in presentation mode. The Tool bar is 

composed of separate components, which can be added or removed from the Tool 

bar individually.


The Title bar displays the name of the program (WellCAD) and the name of the 

active document window. 

Displaying or hiding the Title bar 

From the View menu check or uncheck the option Title Bar. 

Enabling or disabling components of the Tool bar 

From the View > Toolbars menu, check or uncheck the desired Tool bar 

component. You could also use one of the available shortcuts. 

1.2 Borehole Documents 

The borehole document is the general worksheet to generate log charts. It stores and 

graphically displays the imported or interactively added data. File I/O operations, 

graphical editing and printing is carried out on documents. A header and trailer 

section can extend each document. 

WellCAD supports MS Windows multi document interface (MDI), which means 

that you can have more than one document open at the same time. Each document 

will open in its own window and will be listed in the Window menu. 

Document window 

Control Menu 

Borehole Document 

Title Bar 

Borehole Document Title 

Zone 

Borehole Document Data 

Area 

When a document is active, commands that you choose from the Menu bar or the 

Tool bar affect the document or the information and items contained in it. The 

borehole document is saved in its own file carrying the file name extension *.WCL. 

Borehole Document within WellCAD workspace


www.alt.lu 

Header Element 1 


Data and TitleZone 

Trailer Element 1 


This example shows the different elements a Borehole Document is made of (Header, Titles, Data, Footer) 

1.2.1 Loading and Saving Borehole Documents 

Saving a WCL file: 

Borehole documents are saved as *.WCL files using the Save (CTRL + S) and 

Save As… options from the File menu. All down hole data hosted by the borehole 

document as well as the chart layout information will be saved in the *.WCL file. 

You can also select the Close (CTRL + F4) option from the File menu and you 

will be prompted to save the borehole document before the document closes. 

Saving a WCL in a previous file format: 


Depending on the version number of WellCAD WCL files are saved in a special 

format. In general WellCAD is backward compatible, which means an older file 

format can always be opened with a newer version of WellCAD. But if you try to 

load e.g. a v4.4 format with a WellCAD version 4.3, the loading will fail due to an 

unknown file format.

1.2.1.1 Reader Module 


You can save a WCL file in the previous format by following the steps outlined 

hereafter. Note, that if you have used new log types or settings, which are unknown 

to the previous version, the file export into the previous version may fail. 

▪ From the File menu select Export > Single File. 

▪ From the file extension drop down list choose either WellCAD v4.1, v4.2 or 

WellCAD v4.3. 

▪ Click the Save button. 

Loading WCL files: 

1.2.1.2 Automation Module 

Borehole documents can be reloaded and displayed in the WellCAD workspace 

using the Open (CTRL + O) command from the File menu. The standard 

Windows file open dialog box will appear to let you browse for the desired *.WCL 

file. Alternative ways to open a borehole document file in the WellCAD workspace 

are to double click the file name in the Windows Explorer or simply drag the file from 

the Explorer into the WellCAD workspace. 

(You can for example load one of the sample documents contained in the Samples 

folder located in the installation directory of WellCAD.) 

The WellCAD Reader is a free data viewer for WellCAD *.WCL files. To create files 

that can be read by the data viewing application the Reader Module must be 

activated on your WellCAD license. 

The Automation Module allows users who have this module activated on their 

license to access methods and properties of various objects exposed by WellCAD. 

E.g. methods like FileImport, ApplyTemplate or SaveAs can be accessed in external 

program code. It also allows users to write Visual Basic scripts (*.VBS) to automate 

routine tasks in WellCAD. The Automation entry in the File menu is a convenient 

shortcut to run such VBS scripts on a borehole document. Due to the complexity of 

the Automation Syntax a separate manual has been written. Please contact ALT or 

visit the ALT homepage (www.alt.lu) to learn how to retrieve a copy.


1.2.2 Creating a new Borehole Document 

www.alt.lu 

To begin with a new blank borehole document, click the New (CTRL + N) 

option from the File menu. The New document dialog box will appear. 

Document 

templates 

Current directory 

containing document 

templates 

New document dialog box to open a blank document 

Display styles for 

template list 

Document 

Depth Range 

The dialog provides a list of document types that can be created. Besides an empty, 

blank borehole document it is possible to load a document template of a previously 

created log chart. Document templates provide already a complete chart layout that 

can be populated with data. Templates will be explained in detail in 1.4.4 

Templates. 

Select the Blank borehole document option from the list and click OK to open a 

blank borehole document in the WellCAD workspace. The next step would be to 

load data into the document and arrange its layout. 

WellCAD Borehole documents are created automatically if you import data from a 

file (e.g. *.CSV, *.LAS or *.LIS). Data import, export and log chart formatting are 

explained in 1.3.2 Basic Log Editing.

1.2.3 Draft, Presentation and Print Preview Modes 

1.2.3.1 Presentation Mode 

1.2.3.2 Draft Mode 


If an existing borehole document has been opened in the WellCAD workspace, it 

can be displayed in three different modes: Presentation, Draft and Print Preview. 

In presentation mode the WellCAD borehole document window displays the log 

chart in a WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) mode. The document is 

displayed with header, trailer, title and data section with width, height and all scales 

very close to the printed result. Modifications with respect to header and title display 

can be made using the Header and Titles options in the View menu. 

Presentation mode is the preferred mode for report presentation fine-tuning. 

Please note that on computers with Windows 7 operating system deviations from a 

true WYSIWYG presentation of the borehole document may be observed. In order 

to adjust the display scale to show the true units on screen go to Tools > Options 

> Display Scale. 

Display Scale dialog box to map screen unit to true units 

In order to map screen units to true units hold a ruler against the screen and drag 

the displayed scale (place the cursor in the displayed scale, hold down the left mouse 

button and move the mouse) so that both scales show the same distances. Ensure 

that the unit selected from the drop down list corresponds to the units or you 

reference (e.g. ruler). 

In draft mode the width of the document is scaled to fit into the workspace window. 

Horizontal scrolling is not possible. The document is split into two horizontal panes, 

separating the log title zone from the data display area. Header and trailer are not 

shown on screen.


1.2.3.3 Print Preview Mode 

www.alt.lu 

Draft mode is the preferred mode for log data editing and processing. 

You can switch from presentation to draft mode by selecting the Draft option from 

the View (CTRL + D) menu or click on . 

In Draft mode the View menu option Auto Adjust Splitter is available. If this 

option is enabled the splitter bar dividing log handles from data area is automatically 

positioned below the bottom most handle and the upper window is adjusted in 

height to displays all log handles. This option can be turned off and the user can 

shift the splitter bar to a new position if the title area covers too much space. 

In print preview mode the borehole document window displays a scaled image of 

the document, as it will print. This non-editable mode is intended to provide a final 

check of the document before printing it. 

To print preview a document, select Print Preview from the File menu or click the 

. As printing (and print previewing) is not possible for a document being in draft 

mode an automatic conversion to presentation mode takes place prior to the print 

previewing. 

1.2.4 Document Handling 

Each window can be moved, resized and scrolled as known from other Microsoft 

Windows compatible software (e.g. WORD, EXCEL). 

You can also organize multiple windows within the WellCAD workspace using the 

following options from the Window menu: 

New Window to create a new instance of the active window. 

Close All to exit all windows. 

Cascade to arrange all open windows in a cascaded manner. 

Tile Horizontally, Tile Vertically to arrange all windows to appear resized in 

horizontal or vertical order. 

Arrange Icons to arrange minimized windows. 

Nevertheless we would like to outline some actions you can perform on borehole 

documents that you might find useful.

1.2.4.1 Switching between documents 

1.2.4.2 Splitting a document 


An active borehole document will have a highlighted Title Bar. To switch to another 

document you can either: 

▪ Select the new window name from the list in the Window menu. 

▪ From the control menu choose Next or use the shortcut CTRL + F6. 

▪ To make a previous window active use the shortcut CTRL + SHIFT + F6. 

When working on large documents it is often convenient to split the window into 

smaller panes in order to view all relevant information on screen at the same time. 

Horizontal Split 

Vertical Split 

Borehole document split into different panes 

Each borehole document window in presentation mode contains a horizontal and 

vertical split box. 

Vertical Split 

Box 

Horizontal 

Split Box 

To split a window into panes click and drag the split box to the desired position. 

Alternatively you can choose Split from the Window menu and click at the split 

position in the document.


1.2.4.3 Jump to a particular depth 

1.3 Logs 

www.alt.lu 

Single log 

Document combining 

many logs to a composite 

display 

To join split windows simply drag the vertical split box to the left or right window 

limit and the horizontal split box to the top or bottom window limit. 

It is important to understand that multiple panes within a document window merely 

provide alternative views (although independently scrollable) of the parent 

document. They are not separate independent documents. 

To jump to a specific depth or time within your borehole document choose the 

Goto Depth option from the Edit menu or press the shortcut keys CTRL + G. 

Enter the desired depth or date/time you want to jump to. 

In order to store, display and organize down hole data of different formats in a user 

friendly and at all times accessible way, WellCAD deals with data containers of 

distinct formats – so called Logs. Logs are the key elements of a borehole document. 

A borehole document with a single Log (data container) on the left and populated with logs of different types on 

the right. 

Logs are created automatically when data is imported from files. The type of log is 

chosen according to the information provided by the imported file or the user will 

be asked to select a log type. Logs can also be created from scratch: 

� Open the Edit > Insert New Log menu 

� Select the log type you want to create from the list provided


Usually the Main Settings dialog box of the new log is displayed next 

To see the numerical data contained in a log the Tabular Editor providing a 

spreadsheet of the actual data set can be called up. Additionally the user can also 

observe the data values of a selected log in the Status Bar of the borehole window 

while moving the mouse over the data set. 

1.3.1 Log Types and Their Characteristics 

An overview of all log types contained in WellCAD, their main purpose, data format 

and display styles, is given hereafter. A more extensive description of log types 

including their display settings is given in Appendix A. 

The following list provides for each log type: 

- A short description of the log’s characteristics and purpose of use. 

- The format of the data container. This format corresponds also to the ASCII 

file import /export format. 

- An overview of the main data presentation styles of the log. 

1.3.1.1 Well / Formula Log 

Description: 

Single point data sampled at a constant rate. The Well Log is used to display any 

kind of equally sampled geophysical data as curve (e.g. Gamma Ray, Density, 

Resistivity, Porosity, Transit Time). Well Log data is generally imported from LAS, 

LIS, DLIS or ASCII files (*.txt, *.csv) but can also be generated interactively (e.g. 

grain size curve in core description). Formula Logs are calculated curves using one 

or more Well Logs as data source. They are dynamically linked to Well Logs. 

Data Format: 

Depth, Data 

E.g.


1.3.1.2 Mud Log 

www.alt.lu 

Display Styles: 

Description: 

Well Log data is always displayed as single curve 

Single point data sampled at a non-constant rate. The Mud Log data type handles 

any depth to value based data. Imported from LAS, LIS, DLIS or ASCII files (*.txt, 

*.csv) or generated interactively, they are used to display data such as DST data, bit 

penetration rates or core recovery data. 

Data Format: 

Depth, Data 

E.g.


1.3.1.3 Depth Column Log 


Mud Log data can be displayed as bar, line, symbol or a combination of the former styles with the value 

displayed as string. 

Description: 

The Depth Column Log deals with single point data at a non-constant sample rate. 

Its data is displayed as a depth axis. The log can be used to handle different depth 

systems (e.g. MD, TVD) but allows generation of elevation or date/time axis, too. 

Data is generally imported from files or entered by the user. The WellCAD Depth 

Matcher and Deviation Process tools are able to generate a Depth Column Log. 

Data Format: 

Depth, Data 

E.g.


1.3.1.4 Interval Log 

www.alt.lu 


Description: 

Depth Column Log data presented as: Depth axis, date/time axis 

The Interval Log handles single value per depth range data. It is possible that 

consecutive intervals overlap each other. Data can be imported from ASCII files 

(*.txt, *.csv) or generated interactively. It is, besides others, used to display blocked 

curve or pumping test data. 

Data Format: 

TopDepth, BottomDepth, Data 

E.g.

1.3.1.5 Marker Log 


Description: 


Interval Log data presented as: Bar, Segment, Bar Edge Line and Classified Bar 

The Marker Log handles single point data. It can be used to store and display 

markers such as formation tops, major/minor contacts, unconformities, etc.. Its 

main purpose is to allow an auto correlation and automatic insertion of surfaces in 

the multi well module. 

Data can be imported from ASCII files or is manually entered by the user. 

Data Format: 

Depth, Name, Comment, Contact 

E.g.


1.3.1.6 Comment Log 

www.alt.lu 


Description: 

Marker Log displaying data in Top, Surface and Marker style 

The Comment Log handles text in boxes, where a top and bottom depth defines the 

upper and lower limit of each box. Comment Logs are used to handle any kind of 

descriptive text within a borehole document (e.g. lithology descriptions). 


Data Format: 

TopDepth, BottomDepth, Text 

E.g.

1.3.1.7 CoreDesc Log 


Description: 


Comment Log data can be presented in different font styles ant orientations 

The Core Description Log deals with interval data and is used to present the 

occurrence of a certain event over a depth range. The type of event (e.g. fossil type 

or drilling bit used) appears as graphical symbol that is loaded from a predefined but 

customizable library. In addition abundance and dominance of the feature shown 

can be stored and displayed. 

Data is generally imported from ASCII files or can be entered by the user. 

Data Format: 

TopDepth, BottomDepth, Symbol Code, Abundance, 

Dominance 

E.g.


1.3.1.8 Lithology Log 

www.alt.lu 


A Core Description Log where the symbol indicates the type of feature, the line style reflects abundance and 

dominance is shown in the arrow tip. 

Description: 

Lithology Logs have been designed to display information about lithology, 

sedimentary structure etc. as box filling graphical patterns loaded from user created 

libraries (see LithCAD). Top and bottom contact styles can be assigned to each 

lithology box. The same log type can be used to display non repeated (not box 

filling) symbols in order to indicate lithology accessories, qualifiers etc.. 

Often two or more lithology logs are superimposed to allow a complex lithology in a 

single track. 

Data Format: 

TopDepth, BottomDepth, Code, Hardness, TopContact, 

BottomContact 

E.g.

1.3.1.9 Strata Log 



Lithology Log with box filling repeated graphical pattern (left) and non-repeated symbol ( right). 

Description: 

The Strata (Stratigraphy) Log has been developed to handle and display chrono- or 

litho-stratigraphy columns (e.g. System, Series and Stage) in a single log column. 

Manually entered text or text and color/pattern fill loaded from libraries can be 

displayed in boxes limited by column width and Top and Bottom Depth. Any 

number of columns can be handled. If text found in adjacent boxes is equal it will be 

merged and displayed as single box. 

Top and Bottom Contact styles can be assigned to each box. In order to highlight 

important zones (e.g. a reservoir) the user can allow contact style lines to be drawn 

across the entire borehole document. 

Data Format: 

TopDepth, BottomDepth, DataCol1, DataCol2,…,DataColN, 

TopContact, BottomContact 

E.g.


www.alt.lu 


1.3.1.10 Stacking Pattern Log 

Strata Log with three columns. Data displayed as plain text (left) and text / color fill combined (right). 

Description: 

The Stacking Pattern log can be used to display trends within certain depth intervals 

such as coarsening or fining in grain size. Data values are represented by the means 

of geometrical figures (triangle and square). Besides Top and Bottom Depth the data 

format requires a normalized value (0 to 1) describing the width of the symbol at top 

and bottom of the interval.

Data Format: 


TopDepth, BottomDepth, TopWidth, BottomWidth 

E.g. 


Two Stacking Pattern Logs showing different cycles of coarsening and fining (triangles) with areas of stagnation 

(squares). The right log highlights the box boundaries to allow correlation with lithology log intervals.


1.3.1.11 OLE Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

OLE is the acronym for Object Linking and Embedding. OLE is an application 

integration technology that can be used to share information between OLE 

compatible applications. In WellCAD, embedded and linked OLE objects (such as 

photographs, EXCEL charts, WORD documents) are handled by the OLE Log. 

The data consists of individual OLE objects each with a top and bottom depth. 

Since WellCAD version 4.2 the OLE Log can also be used to display pictures (e.g. 

JPEG) as Non-OLE objects. Compared to the RGB Log the OLE Log consumes 

fewer resources when handling large quantities of data. A picture is not converted 

into RGB intensity values but is stored in its original size. The user can set the 

default behavior of the OLE Log in the Default Settings. 

Data can be inserted manually or loaded from ASCII files. E.g. to import a series of 

core photographs simply import an ASCII file providing top and bottom depth and 

the path to the picture file as OLE Log. 

Data Format: 

TopDepth, BottomDepth, OleObject 

E.g. 


OLE Log showing an embedded EXCEL sheet and a thin section picture.

1.3.1.12 Full Wave Sonic Log 

Description: 


FWS Log (Full Waveform Sonic) data is a two dimensional array of floating point 

values. One dimension consists of depth, sampled at a constant rate, the second 

dimension usually consists of time in �s, sampled at a constant rate, too. Thus, for 

each depth increment the log holds a data trace sampled in time. The FWS log is 

most commonly used to store and display full waveform sonic data but can also 

used to display borehole radar data, slowness or T2 distribution curves. The 

horizontal dimension can be “misused” and must not necessarily correspond to time 

in �s all the time. 

Data Format: 

Depth, Data1, Data2, Data3, … ,DataN 

E.g. 


FWS Log data presented as Wiggle, b/w VDL and color VDL.


1.3.1.13 VSP Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

The VSP (Vertical Seismic Profile) Log handles a two dimensional array of floating 

point data. One dimension consists of depth, sampled at a constant rate, the second 

dimension is a series of station names (e.g. geophones). Data traces are displayed 

along the vertical (depth) axis. The log can be used to display synthetic seismograms 

or seismic profiles as well. 

Data Format: 

Depth, RX1, Rx2, Rx3, … ,RxN 

E.g. 


VSP Log with data presented as Wiggle, Variable Area, b/w VDL and color VDL


1.3.1.14 Image Log / Image Log Float 2 / Image Log Float 4 

Description : 

In general the Image Log handles an array of data where one dimension consists of 

equally sampled depth and the second dimension of radial equally sampled data 

values (one data point every x degree of an arc). The Image Log stores and displays 

acoustic scanner data (e.g. amplitude, travel time, thickness) as well as multi finger 

caliper or FMI data. Three different types of Image Logs exists each of them storing 

the data using a different data type. 

The Image Log Integer stores all values as unsigned integer (two bytes), which 

means that all values are between 0 and 65535. This is sufficient for acoustic scanner 

travel time and amplitude measurements or other data where no negative or decimal 

numbers occur. Image Log Float 2 (two bytes) and Image Log Float 4 (four bytes) 

types store data as floating point values, which allows proper handling of negative 

and decimal numbers. 

Data Format: 

Depth, Amp1, Amp2, Amp3, … , AmpN 

E.g. 


The Image Log supports three different display styles. Data displayed in Color 

Image style is presented as false color image where each data value is mapped to a 

color value according to a user customizable color palette. The Shifted Curve style 

divides the log track into equal intervals and draws all data columns as individual 

curves using the left border of each interval as zero baseline. All data columns are 

drawn as superimposed curves if the Stacked Curve style has been set.


1.3.1.15 RGB Log 

www.alt.lu 

Image Log displayed in Color Image (left), Shifted Curve (mid) and Stacked Curve (right) style. 

Description: 

The RGB Log is used to display bitmap data such as optical televiewer images, core 

photographs, video snapshots etc.. Data is stored in a two dimensional array of RGB 

(Red, Green, Blue) intensity triplets. One dimension consists of depth, sampled at a 

constant rate, and the second dimension of radial equally sampled data values (one 

data point every x degree of an arc). Thus, for each depth increment there is a data 

set associated, which represents the full (or partial) coverage of a borehole wall or 

core circumference. 

Data Format: 

Depth, RGB 1, RGB 2, RGB 3, … , RGB N 

E.g.

1.3.1.16 Analysis Log 



The RGB Log data is displayed as bitmap according to resolution and color 

information provided by the data values. 

Description: 

RGB Log display of optical televiewer data 

Analysis logs are used to present the composition of lithology or balance between 

different components displaying each element according to its quantity (in percent) 

as graphical pattern. Data is stored in a two dimensional array, where the first 

dimension consist of depth, sampled at a constant rate, and the second dimension 

holds the series of percentage values belonging to the different elements. The user 

can define the number and type of elements to be handled. 

Graphical patterns are user definable and their storage is organized by the means of 

lithology dictionaries. Lithology dictionaries can be created, edited and maintained 

using LithCAD. 

Data Format: 

Depth, Data1, Data2, Data3, … , DataN 

E.g.


www.alt.lu 


1.3.1.17 Percentage Log 

Description: 

The Analysis Log supports three different data display styles. 

Fixed Bar style: A bar of fixed height is drawn for each depth point. 

Dynamic Bar style: A bar is drawn from one to the next depth point. 

Line style: Data points belonging to the same element are connected and displayed 

as curve, where the area between the curves is filled with a graphical pattern 

reflecting the type of element. 

Analysis Log data presented as Fixed Bar, Dynamic Bar and Line. 

The only difference between Analysis and Percentage Log is, that the depth 

increments for the Percentage log do not have to be constant. This results in 

variable bar thickness when the Dynamic Bar display style has been chosen. 

Data Format: 


E.g.

1.3.1.18 Structure Log 


Description: 


Percentage Log data shown in Fixed Bar, Dynamic Bar and Line style 

The Structure log can be used to pick and store planar features like joints and 

fractures interactively and record depth, dip angle, azimuth (dip direction), aperture 

and structure classes. You can also import the data from ASCII files. Please note 

that the data format differs from earlier versions of the Structure Log. 

Data Format: 

Depth, Azimuth, Dip, Aperture, Class1, Class2, Class3… 

E.g. 


The data stored in the Structure Log can be displayed in 

Projection Style: The great circle produced by the intersection of dipping plane and 

borehole is “unrolled” and appears as sinus curve.


www.alt.lu 

W 

S 

N 

E 

N E S W N 

Unrolled great circle appears as sinus curve. 

Tadpole Style: Data is displayed as tadpole style arrow plot. The body of the 

tadpole with respect to the horizontal log scale shows the amount of dip, while the 

tadpole vector line indicates the azimuth (dip direction). Different tadpole colors 

and shapes are used to differentiate structure classes. 

Slab Core Projection Style: The intersection line between the dipping plane and a 

virtual vertical plane of distinct orientation (e.g. North to South) is displayed. 

Structure Log in Projection, Tadpole and Slab Core Projection style.

1.3.1.19 Breakout Log 

Description: 


The Breakout log can be used to pick vertical features such as borehole wall 

breakouts and tensile fractures interactively from an image. The recorded data is 

depth (determined from the center of the picked feature), azimuth (position on the 

borehole wall in deg), tilt (inclination of the breakout axis from the borehole axis), 

length, opening angle in degree and one or multiple attributes. You can also import 

the data from ASCII files. 

Data Format: 

Depth, Azimuth, Tilt, Length, Opening, Class1, Class2, 

Class3… 

E.g. 


The data stored in the Breakout Log can be displayed as 

Projection Style: A line tracing or polygon framing the breakout as in the oriented 

and unrolled image of the borehole wall. The horizontal scale is from 0 to 360 deg. 

Symbol Style: The picked breakout is displayed as tadpole. The body of the tadpole 

with respect to the horizontal log scale shows the azimuth position. If the tadpole 

has been created with a vector line (in ToadCAD) it will indicate the tilt component. 

It is optional to display the opening angle as a horizontal bar. Different tadpole 

colors and shapes can be used to differentiate between breakout classes. 

Breakout Log in Projection and Symbol style.


1.3.1.20 Bio Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

Biostratigraphic Logs (short: Bio Logs) are used to display count rates of distinct 

features (e.g. fossils) per depth interval. The log stores and displays the count rate 

(floating point number) of a user-defined number of different features for each 

depth interval. 

Data Format: 

TopDepth, BottomDepth, Nature, Val1, Val2, … ,ValN 

E.g. 


Bio Log: Count rates presented in vertical and horizontal bar style (left and mid). To show only the occurrence 

of a certain feature a (user defined) symbol can be drawn (right).

1.3.1.21 Engineering Log 

Description: 


The Engineering Log can be used to show construction and completion details of a 

well. Logs can be presented side by side to depict a diary of construction or drilling 

events. Objects such as different casing, cementation, gravel pack, water and more 

can be combined and displayed. 

Four different kinds of symbol classes are supported: 

- Drill Items, they are characterized by a top depth, bottom depth and an external 

diameter. They present the drill hole itself. 

- Solid Items, these are cylindrical items which occupy a volume in the borehole 

(such as a packer). A top depth, bottom depth, an external diameter and a radial 

position within the hole describe them. 

- Hollow Items are cylindrical and occupy a volume in the borehole with an 

internal space that can be filled with any other liquid or solid item. A typical 

example is a casing. A top and bottom depth, an external diameter, an internal 

diameter and a radial position in the hole characterize hollow items. 

- Liquid Items fill all accessible borehole volume within a given depth range from 

a given injection point (e.g. cement or water). A top depth, bottom depth, 

injection point and radial position describe liquid items. 

Data Format: 

Item, TopDepth, BottomDepth, Position, External 

Diameter, Internal Diameter, Injection Depth 

E.g.


1.3.1.22 Shading Log 

www.alt.lu 


Engineering Log with drill item (borehole), hollow item (casing) and liquid items (cement, water). 

Description: 

The Shading Log is no real log type, as it contains no own data. Shading logs use 

one or two Well Logs to fill the area between two curves, curve and log border or 

curve and user defined limit with a solid color. 


Shading Log used to fill the area between two curves (left), between track border and curve (mid) and between 

fixed limit and curve (right).

1.3.1.23 Polar & Rose Log 

Description: 


The Polar & Rose Log is dynamically linked to a Structure or Breakout Log. Its 

purpose is to display a summary of the structure or breakout data from a distinct 

depth interval in various diagrams such as polar projection plots, dip and azimuth 

histograms, rose diagrams, vector plots or Woodcock diagrams. The only data stored 

in the Polar & Rose Log is the top and bottom of the depth interval where the 

structure or breakout data has been taken from and a text comment. Multiple 

diagrams of different depth intervals can be displayed within the same log. 

Data Format: 

TopDepth, BottomDepth, Description 

E.g. 

Display Styles:


1.3.1.24 Cross Section Log 

www.alt.lu 

Polar & Rose Log diagrams: Polar Projection plot (left), Rose Diagram (mid left), Dip Histogram (mid 

right), Max Horizontal Stress direction (right, Vector plot (lower left) and Woodcock diagram (lower right)). 

Description: 

The Cross Section Log can be used to display cross sections of the borehole cylinder 

using caliper (or travel time) information at a certain depth or from a depth interval. 

The Log must be linked to an Image Log providing the caliper information. Only 

top and bottom depth of the cross section intervals are stored. 

Data Format: 

TopDepth, BottomDepth 

E.g.

1.3.1.25 3D Log 


Description: 


Cross Section Log data: Superimposed measurements (left), average of measurement (right) 

The 3D Log displays a three dimensional image of the borehole cylinder using 

caliper information to model the shape of the cylinder and amplitude information to 

map colors to the cylinder surface. The log must be linked to Image or Well Logs in 

order to retrieve the caliper and amplitude data. The 3D Log itself does not store 

any data. 


3D Log display as fully rendered cylinder (left) or as wire frame (right)


1.3.2 Basic Log Editing 

www.alt.lu 

The following paragraphs will describe some fundamental operations that can be 

carried out on logs. Knowledge about how to select, position or rename a log is 

essential for working with WellCAD. More specific information on how to create a 

lithology column, filter and resample data can be found in 1.5 Working with Logs. 

Details about the functionality of WellCAD add-on modules can be found in the 

relevant books. 

All log types have a title zone – or log handle – that displays the name of the log and 

other properties of the log. It acts as a handle for selecting, moving, sizing or scaling 

the log within the borehole window. 

Log title 

(log handle) 

Log data area 

1.3.2.1 Selecting Logs in a Borehole Document 

Before any action can be carried out on a log or its data, the log(s) must be selected. 

To select a log simply click once onto its log handle. The handle color becomes 

inverted to indicate the selected status. 

Log not selected 

Selected log 

If you want to select multiple logs hold the CTRL key pressed while clicking on the 

log handles. 

To deselect a log, hold down the CTRL and click on the handle of the selected log. 

You can also click outside a log (without pressing the CTRL key), but this will 

deselect all multiple selected logs as well.


An alternative way to select or deselect logs is provided by the Tracks Selection 

dialog box. 

Selected log names from the list 

To call up this dialog box click the icon or choose the Select option from the 

Edit > Select Tracks menu. Click on the log names in the list to select the 

corresponding logs. Hold the CTRL or SHIFT keys down to allow multiple 

selections. 

Note: 

If you select multiple logs you might have noticed that the first log selected gets a 

red frame around its handle. This becomes important if document layout tools are 

used to arrange the logs within the borehole document. The first log selected will be 

used as a reference to adjust track width, title height and position of all other 

selected logs. 

Selecting hidden log titles: 

Sometimes log titles are hidden by the user. In order to display these hidden log 

titles select View > Show all titles or press the key combination 

CTRL + SHIFT + A. 

1.3.2.2 Creating and Deleting Logs 

Logs can be created in various ways. They will be created automatically for you if 

data is imported from a file. The log type created will be chosen either automatically 

according to the type of data imported or the user can select the type of log himself, 

as it is for the import of ASCII data. 

But the user can create empty logs directly in the borehole document and populate 

them with data (e.g. lithology patterns or descriptive text) afterwards. To create a 

new empty log:


www.alt.lu 

� Insert a new borehole document or load an existing one. 

� Select Insert New Log … from the Edit menu. 

� Select the log type from the list. 

Select the type of log to 

be inserted from the 

menu. 

Depending on your selection it will be either the Main Settings dialog box that 

pops up requesting information such as log title, log position and presentation styles, 

or it will be another dialog boxes prompting for logs to be specified that will be used 

as data source (e.g. you can create a new Image Log from multiple Well Logs). 

Details for each log type can be found in Appendix A. 

To delete an existing log: 

� Select the log(s) you want to delete. 

� Press the DELETE key on your keyboard, select Edit > Delete from the 

menu or click the icon. 

Another way to delete a log is to 

� Right click onto the log handle and select Delete from the appearing flying 

menu.

1.3.2.3 Naming Logs 

Right click on log handle and 

select delete to destroy the log 


If you just want to erase the data from a log without removing it from the 

document: 

� Right click on the log title(s) from which you want to erase the data. 

� From the context menu that opens select the Clear Contents option. 

You can change the title of a log within the Main, Base and Title Settings dialog 

boxes. (All of these dialog boxes are explained in detail further down.) 

� Double click onto a log handle to call up the Main Settings dialog box for that 

particular log. 

� Enter the new log name into the Title edit box. 

You can also select the log and click the icon (or CTRL + B) for the Base 

Settings or the icon for the Main Settings dialog box (or CTRL + M). Simply 

enter the new log name in the Title edit box. 

Click the icon (or CTRL + T) to display the Title Settings dialog box on 

screen. 

Select the Title part 

Click on Text to change 

the log name


www.alt.lu 

� From the Display Settings list click on the Title part to select it. 

� Click the Text button next and enter the new log name into the appearing edit 

box. 

Note: 

1.3.2.4 Positioning Logs 

Logs can be linked to each other to act as a data server or they are used in 

calculations. Therefore each log title is used as a unique identifier for that 

particular log. You cannot have two or more logs with the same title within the same 

borehole document even if they differ in log type. WellCAD changes the log title 

automatically and adds an extension like #1 or #2 to avoid having twice the same 

log title. If you would like to display equal names please display the Comment and 

hide the Title display. 

Log titles can be renamed automatically during file import or when applying a 

template using an Alias Template. You will learn about Alias Templates in the 

corresponding chapter. 

You can force log names to be renamed using the Alias Table (see 1.4.2 Data 

Import). From the Edit menu select Rename Logs. An editor window will open 

listing all current log titles of your borehole document in the left column. Click into 

the corresponding cell in the New Name column to set a new title. Click the Use 

Aliases button to change the names according to the currently loaded (Tools > 

Options > Alias Table) Alias Table. 

Logs can be positioned anywhere on the borehole document. They may also overlap 

each other. You can enter a left and right position value in the Main, Base and 

Title Settings dialog box or you can use your mouse pointer to interactively change 

the position and width of a log. 

You can switch on a snap option to allow a more convenient positioning of logs. In 

combination with the short cuts from the Layout Toolbar you should be able to 

arrange logs very fast. 

Snap 

To enable the snap option: 

� Select Ruler bar settings… from the View menu. 

Or 

� Ensure the Ruler Bar is displayed at the top of your borehole window. 

� If not: Select the Ruler Bar option from the View menu.

Tick to enable snap to 

specified multiple of the 

unit 

Select the unit you want 

the horizontal position 

to be measured in 


� Double click the Ruler Bar or Right click on it and select Settings. 

The Ruler bar settings dialog box opens. Select the units you want to measure your 

horizontal position in and tick the Enable snap option. Enter a number into the 

Column Position Snap edit box to set the snap step. 

Sizing Logs 

If you move the mouse pointer close to the left or right edge of a log handle the 

pointer changes its shape to a cross with arrow tips on the horizontal arms . 

� Now click and drag the side of the log to its new position. 

If the cursor changes to a cross 

with arrow tips, click and drag 

the edge of the log to its new 

position 

Note: 

You can also use the Layout Toolbar to easily make multiple logs the same size.


www.alt.lu 

Moving logs 

When moving the mouse pointer into the center of the log handle of a log the 

cursor changes to a bold black arrow . 

� Now click and drag the entire log track to any position on the borehole 

document. The width of the log track will be maintained. 

If the cursor changes to an arrow 

shape, click and drag the log to its 

new position 

If you want to move multiple logs at the same time, select them and hold down the 

Shift key. Click into the center of one of the log handles and drag it to the desired 

position. When releasing the mouse button all selected logs will move to align left 

with the dragged log and they will adjust their width to match the one of the dragged 

log. 

Note: 

1.3.2.5 Layout Toolbar 

The Document Layout Bar 

provides short cuts to most 

commonly used layout operations 

You can also use the Layout Toolbar to easily move and align logs relative to each 

other. 

The Document Layout Bar provides a selection of tools, which allow the user to 

easily move and size logs relative to a reference log. Operations such as Make Same 

Width, Align Side By Side or Insert After will be mostly used when arranging log 

within the borehole document. 

You can select all document layout options from the View > Document Layout 

menu, but all tools are also assembled in a tool bar, which allows much faster access.

To display the Document Layout Bar: 


� Select View > Toolbars > Document Layout Bar or press the short-cut 

CTRL + 7. 

You may have noticed that if logs are selected the first log chosen is surrounded by a 

red frame. The red-framed log handle is used as reference (or master log) for all the 

operations explained below. E.g. if multiple logs are selected and you click on Make 

Same Width all logs will be become of the same width as the master log. 

Making same width / height 

Select all the logs for which you want the title box to become the same width / 

height as the reference log. Ensure that the log you want to use as reference has 

been selected first and is surrounded by a red frame. 

Click on the icon to make the log title boxes the same width. 

Before making logs the 

same width 

After making logs the 

same width 

Before making log titles the 

same height 

Click on the icon to make all log title boxes the same height.


www.alt.lu 

After making log titles the 

same height 

Before aligning logs left / right 

After aligning logs left 

After aligning logs right 

Align left / right / side-by-side 

To align a selection of logs with the left or right border of the reference log click the 

icon to align them left or the icon to align them right. Or click to 

superimpose the selected log(s) to the master log. 

If you want to align the selection of logs side-by-side, click on to align all logs 

right of the master log. The logs will be lined up in the order they were selected. 

Before aligning logs 

side-by-side

After aligning logs 

side-by-side 

Insert before / after 


Select your logs and click the icon to insert the selection left of (in front of) the 

reference log. Click the icon to insert the selection right of (behind) the master 

log. The document width will be increased automatically if there is insufficient space 

to place the logs. 

Auto Fit 

Before Auto Fit 

Click the icon to remove all gaps between logs and adjust the document width so 

that the right border is lined up with the right most log border. This process is 

independent from the selection of logs. 

After Auto Fit: gaps are 

removed and document width 

has been decreased 

If you do not want to decrease the document width you can select the Move Left 

option from the View > Document Layout menu. (This option has no icon in the 

tool bar.) 

Stretch 

If you want to remove all gaps between logs and stretch all logs so that they fit into 

the document you have to select the Stretch option from the View > Document 

Layout menu. All logs will be resized relative to their original with.


www.alt.lu 

Before applying Stretch 

After applying Stretch (independent of 

log selection) 

After applying Stretch Selection (stretch 

only between Master and Log 2) 

If you want to stretch logs to fit into the limits given by the most left and most right 

log border found in a selection of logs, you can use the Stretch Selection option 

from the View > Document Layout menu. 

Move up / down 

You can alter the vertical order of the logs by using the move up or down icons 

. Please note that this option is available only for a single log selected and if logs 

are stacked. 

Note: 

Before (left) and after (right) moving the selected log up 

The order of superimposed logs can be important as it defines the order of painting. 

The first log painted is the one at the top. If you want to cover parts of a Lithology


Log with an opaque color of a curve shading (Well Log), you should ensure that the 

log handle of the Lithology Log is on top of the log handle of the Well Log. 

Grouping Logs 

The Grain Size log has been moved down (right) 

in order to allow the white shading to cover the lithology. 

Multiple logs can be combined to form a group. A group title (handle) allows 

handling the group like a single log in terms of positioning and resizing. 

A group formed by multiple logs


1.3.2.6 Slicing and Merging Logs 

www.alt.lu 

To build a group: 

� Select the logs you would like to group. 

� Click the icon in the Layout Bar and select the Group option from the 

� 

drop down list. 

The group title settings dialog box appears which allows setting a title and a 

comment similar to the log title. 

Once a group has been build you can arrange the logs within the group as usual. To 

add a log to an existing group: 

� Select the group and afterwards the log you want to add. 

� Click the icon in the Layout Bar and select the Add To Group option 

from the drop down list. 

The group control in the Layout Bar can also be used to remove a selected log from 

a group or to destroy the group (ungroup). 

If you want to copy the title settings from one log to another you can use the Copy 

Title Settings option from the Edit menu. Select the source log first and the target 

log(s) afterwards. 

Logs can be sliced, which means that the user can split the data set at a certain depth 

and generate new logs for each resulting subset. On the other hand the other can 

merge logs, which means multiple data sets can be joined to form a single log. 

To merge an existing log: 

� Select the logs you want to slice. 

� Right click on the log handle and from the popup menu select the Slice at … 

option. 

Or 

� From the Edit menu choose Slice logs at… . 

Enter depth at which 

the data set will be split

1.3.2.7 Depth Shifting Logs 


The Logs Slice At dialog pops up. Enter the depth at which you want to split the 

data set. 

Specify what should be 

created 

Next the Log Slice Options dialog comes up asking whether to keep the original 

log or to delete it after the subsets have been created. The user can decide to 

generate a log containing the upper part of the split data set and/or generate a log 

for the lower subset of the data. 

Top and Bottom log 

generated after slicing 

Log 1 

In order to apply a constant shift in depth to one or more logs: 

� Select the logs you want to shift. 

� Right click on a log handle and select Shift by… from the popup menu. 

Or 

� Select Shift logs by… from the Edit menu.


www.alt.lu 

Enter depth span to 

entire data set shift up 

or down 

1.3.2.8 Merging Equal Items 

Enter the depth span by which you want to shift the data set. As depth is counted 

positive when going downwards, you will have to enter a positive value to shift your 

data set down, a negative number to shift the data upwards. 

A copy of the original log (data set) will be generated and added to the borehole 

document containing the shifted data. 

A constant depth shift has been 

applied and a shifted copy of the 

original log has been inserted 

Note: 

This process applies a constant shift only. In order to depth match a data set against 

a given reference – and apply non-linear shifts – you have to use the Depth 

Matcher tool (1.7.1 Depth Matching). 

If log types dealing with interval data – Litho, Comment, CoreDesc and Interval 

Logs – are used, data values of adjacent intervals might be equal. To merge all 

intervals with equal data together, choose the Merge Log Items command from 

the Edit menu.

1.3.2.9 Extending Logs 

1.3.2.10 Cut, Copy and Paste Logs 


Equal lithology data(left) has been merged (right) 

Well and Analysis Logs store data only for a defined depth range. In order to add 

data points the user has to extend the depth range. 

� Right click on the log handle and select Extend from the popup menu. 

� Enter the new top and/or bottom depth value to extend the log to the top 

and/or bottom. 

The new depth intervals will be populated with No Data (NULL) values and depth 

information according to the depth sample rate of the log. 

Logs can be copied (or cut) from one borehole document and pasted into another 

document. The target document can be a WellCAD borehole document or a 

document from another application such as EXCEL or Word. 

When you copy data, WellCAD duplicates the information and places a copy onto 

the Windows Clipboard. When data is cut, WellCAD removes the original data from 

the active document and places it onto the clipboard. 

To copy or cut logs: 

� Select the logs you want to copy. 

� From the menu bar choose Edit > Copy (Edit > Cut) or right click on a log 

handle and from the popup menu select Copy (Cut). You could also press the 

key combination CTRL + C (CTRL + X) or click the 

To paste logs: 

icon ( ). 

� Activate the document you want to paste the data to. 

� If it is a WellCAD document you can select Edit > Paste or use the short cut 

CTRL + V. You can also click the icon.


www.alt.lu 

For other than WellCAD documents the process to paste log data might vary. 

You can also copy data from other applications into WellCAD using the Windows 

Clipboard. E.g. Select a Depth and a Data column in EXCEL. In EXCEL choose 

Edit > Copy. In WellCAD go to Edit>Paste Special and select the Text option. 

Select Paste… 

... as Text 

Your data will be copied from EXCEL into the Windows Clipboard, which will be 

used as buffer. 

The Text File Import Wizard will pop up and guide you through the import 

options (see 1.4.2.2 TXT, CSV and ASCII Import). 

Drag’n Drop Data between WellCAD Documents: 

Single or multiple selected logs can be copied or cut and pasted between borehole 

documents by drag and drop. Conceptually drag and drop is like using the clipboard 

with cut or copy and paste, but it leaves the clipboard unchanged and is a more 

efficient way of moving data between documents. 

To cut and paste a single log from one document to another using drag and drop: 

� Ensure that the two documents are visible. 

� Click on the log Handle and continue holding down the mouse button. 

� Drag the log from one borehole window into the other. Releasing the 

mouse button completes the move. 

To copy and paste a single log from one document to another using drag and drop: 

� Ensure the two documents are visible. 

� Click on the log Handle and continue holding down the mouse button.


� Press the CTRL key and drag the log from one borehole window to the 

other. Releasing the mouse button completes the move. 

Similarly multiple logs can be dragged and dropped if multiple logs are selected. 

Note that the SHIFT and CTRL keys have a different meaning while performing a 

log selection or a drag-drop operation: 

� While performing a log selection, i.e. Click on a log Handle: 

Simple click selects the log, eventually deselecting all previously selected 

logs. 

CTRL + Click toggles the log selection, leaving the rest of the selection 

unchanged. 

SHIFT + Click leaves the selection unchanged. 

� While performing a drop operation, i.e. releasing the mouse button over a 

possible drop area: 

Simple Drop or SHIFT + Drop moves the selected logs to the drop area. 

CTRL + Drop copies the selected logs to the drop area. 

The Clipboard 

The clipboard is a Microsoft Windows built in feature that applications use to 

exchange data. It can be perceived as a shared buffer. WellCAD is capable of 

copying four different families of Borehole Document information to the clipboard. 

WellCAD Borehole Logs Native Binary Format 

Although this format completely describes the data and the way it is presented in 

WellCAD, it can only be read and written by WellCAD itself. It is the preferred 

format used to copy and paste data within WellCAD, e.g. from one borehole 

document to another, or within the same document. This format is used to copy a 

selection of single or multiple logs. 

Graphical Formats 

WellCAD can copy a bitmap or a metafile to the clipboard. It is graphical copy of 

the Borehole Document as is appears on the screen. This allows you to paste an 

image to a graphical application such as Paintbrush, Word, Microsoft Publisher, 

Corel Draw etc. This format is used to copy documents in their entirety, i.e. 

containing all logs.


www.alt.lu 

Text Formats 

WellCAD is capable of reading and writing various text based clipboard formats 

including TXT, CSV, WA* (see 1.4.2.2 TXT, CSV and ASCII Import). As for the 

text format the clipboard format is the same as the equivalent ASCII file format. 

This format is used to copy a selection of single or multiple logs. 

OLE Object Format 

1.3.2.11 Interactively Inserting Data 

1.3.2.12 Erasing all data from a log 

WellCAD supports the exchange of data using the OLE Data Object format. This 

format allows linking and embedding OLE objects into OLE enabled applications, 

to produce compound documents. WellCAD can export its documents as OLE 

objects (i.e. WellCAD is an OLE server) and import other applications OLE 

objects (i.e. WellCAD is an OLE container. This format is used to copy WellCAD 

Borehole documents in their entirety or single OLE Logs containing OLE objects. ). 

For more details about these features, refer to 1.7.4 Embedding Borehole 

Documents. 

Most log types allow interactive insertion of data points. That means you can use 

your mouse in combination with your keyboard to “draw” data points directly into 

the data view of the borehole document. You can also enter data into a spreadsheet 

using the tabular editor. In any case the log you are going to edit must be selected. 

If and how data can be inserted depends on the log type. Details for each log type 

can be found in Appendix A. As a general rule of thumb you should remember the 

following: 

- Data can be edited only if a log is selected. 

- To insert data press the SHIFT key and use your mouse. 

- To delete data use your mouse while the CTRL key is pressed. 

You can easily delete all data from a log: 

� Right click on the title of the log from which you want to erase all data. You can 

also select multiple logs and right click on one of the selected log titles to erase 

data from multiple logs. 

� From the context menu select Clear Contents. 

This will remove all data from the log(s) without deleting the log(s) itself.

1.3.2.13 Comparing Log Data – The Tracking Bar 


The Tracking Bar is a tool to view and compare data values of multiple logs 

originating from the same depth in a window floating on top of the borehole 

document. As the mouse cursor is moved along the borehole document the actual 

depth position will be determined and used to refresh the values displayed in the 

Tracking Bar. 

Tracking Bar showing values of multiple Logs at cursor depth 

The Tracking Bar can easily be displayed by pressing the key combination CTRL+9 

or selecting the Tracking Bar entry from the View > Toolbars menu. If you select 

the log titles before the box will already be filled with your selection. 

The bar is docked to the bottom of the borehole document by default. If you wish 

to make it floating on top of your borehole document simply drag or double click 

the left or right border to undock the bar. If you wish to have it docked again simply 

double click on the frame of the window. 

Adding a log: 

The easiest way to add logs to the Tracking Bar is having the logs selected prior to 

calling up the bar (i.e. select one or multiple logs and press CTRL+9). 

If you wish to add a log to an existing display simply click into the next free cell in 

the Log column in order to display a drop down list with all log titles available. 

To change to another log simple click in the corresponding cell in the Log column 

and pick a new log title. 

Removing one or multiple logs: 

To remove a single log from the list select the row and hit the Delete key. 

To clear the entire list right click into the list and select Remove all logs.


1.3.2.14 The Tabular Editor 

www.alt.lu 

As already mentioned, logs are container to store and present log data according to 

the log type in a borehole document as curve, pattern, bar, etc.. The data stored in a 

log can be viewed and edited in a spreadsheet using the Tabular Editor. 

Tabular Editor view of Well, Interval and CoreDesc Log 

The format in which the Tabular Editor shows the log data corresponds to the data 

format of the log type. If you want to import data from an EXCEL sheet or an 

ASCII file, ensure you provide the data in the same format as you can see in the 

Tabular Editor. 

The Tabular Editor view is displayed in separate windows for each log and the 

information displayed in the tables is dynamically linked to the log. In other words, 

if you edit values in the Tabular Editor view the changes will immediately be 

reflected in the graphical display of the borehole document and vice versa. The 

depth information is always displayed in same units as the current depth scale of the 

Borehole Document. 

The appearance of the tabular editor can be changed in the default settings. Open 

the Tools > Options menu and choose Tabular Editor from the tree control. 

Make your selection of font style and background color for the spread sheet header 

and columns. You can pick different background colors for editable and not editable 

cells. 

To open a Tabular Editor: 

� Select the log for which you want to call up the Tabular Editor. 

� Click the icon, press CTRL+E or choose Tools > Tabular Editor…. You 

can also right click on the log handle and select Editor… from the popup menu. 

The Tabular Editor window can be handled as the Borehole Document window in 

terms of resizing, scrolling and splitting. You can use the options from the

1.3.2.15 Find and Replace data 


Windows menu to easily arrange Borehole Document and Tabular Editor windows 

on your screen. 

Most of the cell values can be edited. Nevertheless there are some exceptions. For 

log types requiring a constant depth sampling rate you cannot edit the depth values. 

In case depth values are editable WellCAD automatically corrects the new 

information to keep an order of increasing depth. 

To edit values: 

� Click the cell you want to edit and type in the new value. If the value is based 

on a dictionary (e.g. lithology codes) its contents will be shown and you can 

pick a new value from the drop down list. 

� Press the Enter key or Click into another cell to confirm the change. 

To insert a new data row: 

� Click where you want to insert a new row. 

� From the Row menu select Insert before or Insert after to add a new data 

row. 

Or 

� Hold down the SHIFT key and click between two rows (or above the first row 

and below the last row) when the mouse pointer changes to an insert symbol. 

Default depth values will be provided. The options to insert a new data row are only 

enabled for log types, which do not require a constant depth sample rate. For these 

log types the allocated data range must be extended (see Basic Log Editing – Extend 

Logs). 

To delete a data row: 

� Click the row you want to delete. 

� From the Row menu select Delete to remove the entire data row. 

Or 

� Hold down the CTRL key and click the row you want to delete when the 

mouse pointer appears as delete symbol. 

To find and replace data values within a log, display the log’s data in the Tabular 

Editor. From the Edit menu select the Find/Replace option or press the short cut 

key CTRL + H. The following dialog box will open:


1.3.2.16 Converting Logs 

1.3.2.17 The Undo Button 

www.alt.lu 

In the first line of the dialog enter the value you would like to replace. The second 

line should contain the new value. The example shown in the dialog box above 

replaces the lithology code 1288 by the string Sst. Use the Replace or Replace All 

button to alter only the current or all data values. If the Match entire cell contents option 

is not checked the “Find” algorithm will look for the specified part of the data value 

only and will only replace this part of the value. E.g. finding Sand and replacing it by 

S will find the value SandStone. After replacing it the new value will be Sstone. 

Most logs can be converted to other log types in order to use different presentation 

styles and data format. E.g. a Mud Log can be converted into a Well Log in order to 

perform calculations with the formula parser or a Lithology Log can be converted 

into a Comment Log to get a quick lithology description column in text format. 

� Select the log you want to convert. 

� Open the Edit > Convert Log To menu. 

� Click the log type you want to convert to (not possible conversions are grayed). 

The conversion options for each log type are explained in Appendix A. 

Since WellCAD version 4.2 an optional Undo functionality is supported. As the 

Undo functionality may slow down the workflow when dealing with large data 

volumes (i.e. a memory copy needs to be made for each Undo step) the Undo can 

be switched on or off. This can be done on the Undo tab in the Tools > Options 

dialog.


Check the Enable Undo… option to activate the functionality. It is turned off by 

default. You can also adjust the number of undo levels and the amount of memory 

allocated during the recording steps. Change these settings only if your computer is 

equipped with enough memory (the above settings are use on a computer with 1 GB 

RAM). 

To Undo or Redo an action use the corresponding icons from the toolbar or 

entries in the Edit menu. The short-cut keys CTRL+ Z (Undo) and CTRL+Y 

(Redo) are supported as well. 

1.3.3 Log Settings 

Three different kinds of settings can be applied to a log. Settings, which are 

common to all log types, such as track border style, position or background color, 

are assembled in the Base Settings. Each log type supports different presentation 

styles for its data. These settings are controlled by the Main Settings. The options 

provided by the Main Settings dialog boxes differ from log type to log type. Title 

Settings are the third type of settings we can apply to a log. They are purely related 

to the layout and appearance of the title zone (handle) of each log. 

1.3.3.1 Base Settings 

The settings common to all log types are edited through the Log Base Settings 

dialog box. 

The Base Settings dialog box offers the same options to all log types.


www.alt.lu 

There are different ways to access the Base Settings dialog box: 

� 

Or 

Select the log(s) and click the icon or press CTRL + B. 

� 

Or 

Right click on the log handle and select Settings > Base Settings… from the 

popup menu. 

� Select the log(s) and choose Log Settings > Base Settings… from the View 

menu. 

The following options can be set: 

Title: 

The edit box shows the current title (unique identifier) of the log. To alter the title, 

simply enter the new name of the log. Be aware that WellCAD adds an extension in 

case another log with the same title already exists. 

Set the new log name in the Title box. 

Position: 

You can set the left and right position of the log track in selected units. The default 

unit displayed is the one set for the Ruler Bar (see 1.3.2.4 Positioning Logs). 

Set the left and right limits of the log border and select the unit you want the position to be measured in.

General settings: 

Check to hide the depth grid 

display 

Entire data display can be hidden 


Mask horizontal grid: 

Tick this option to avoid the depth grid lines (horizontal lines) to be drawn. 

Log with depth grid lines (left) and without (right) 

Mask contacts: 

Check this option if you want to hide the contact line crossing the log track. 

Contact crossing all tracks 

Selected log tracks with contact hidden 

Hide the display of contacts 

Hide the display of the log 

handle 

Data cannot be interactively 

edited when checked


www.alt.lu 

Hide title display: 

If the user wants to hide only the display of the log title the Hide title display 

option should be checked. This option is particularly useful if multiple logs are 

superimposed to generate a complex presentation of the same parameter. 

Hidden titles (log handles) can temporarily be made visible – only visible log handles 

can be selected – using the Show all titles option from the View menu. You can 

also click on to select a track. 

Hide data display: 

A borehole document stores all data contained in the logs – even if the logs are 

hidden. To keep a copy of the original data set in the document without displaying 

the data you can hide the title and data display. To hide the data display, check the 

Hide data display option. 

Lock log data: 

Most log types in WellCAD allow interactive edition of the data. This can be 

performed using the Tabular Editor or directly with in the data view using the 

mouse. To avoid inadvertently editing and corrupting your data, you can check the 

Lock log data option. 

Border: 

In order to alter the appearance of the log track border the user has the option to 

select the line color, style and thickness from the drop down lists. In some cases it 

might be required to disable the display of the track borders. Uncheck the Display 

border option and the track border will be hidden. 

Log track borderlines can be changed in color, line style and thickness.

1.3.3.2 Main Settings 

Background: 


Applying a colored background can highlight important log tracks. Select a color 

from the Color drop down list and check the Use colored background option to 

fill the entire track with a solid color. 

Log without background color (left) and with background (right). 

To alter the display styles for each log, the Main Settings dialog box, which can be 

accessed for each log must be used. 

The Main Settings offer data presentation styles. Selectable options depend on log type. 

To call up the Main Settings dialog box: 

� Double click on the log handle. 

Or 

� Select the log(s) and click the icon, press CTRL + M or select Log Settings 

> Main Settings… from the View menu.


1.3.3.3 Title Settings 

www.alt.lu 

Or 

� Right click the log handle and select Settings > Main Settings…from the 

popup menu. 

As the layout and the options available in the Main Settings dialog box vary for each 

log type we will explain each dialog box along with the log type it belongs to in 

Appendix A. Nevertheless there are two options, which are common to all log types: 

Title: 

Changing the title in the Main Settings is the same as it is in the Base Settings. 

Position: 

Controlling the left and right position of the log border is the same as in the Base 

Settings. 

The layout of the log title box can be changed using the Title Settings dialog box. 

Title Settings allow changing the appearance of the log title. The options are common to all log types. 

To open the Title Settings dialog box: 

� 

Or 

Select the log(s) and click the icon or press CTRL + T. 

� Right click on the log handle and select Settings > Title Settings… from the 

popup menu.


Or 

� Select the log(s) and choose Log Settings > Title Settings… from the View 

menu. 

The entire log handle can be subdivided into three different areas. 

Log title zone with unique 

identifier of the log 

Log properties zone displays additional 

information depending log type 

Title: Displays the name of the log, which is also used as unique identifier of the log 

within the Borehole Document. 

Comment: Can be used to display some additional text on multiple lines. 

Properties: Displays additional details (e.g. data unit, low and high scale values, line 

style preview) depending on the log type. 

The total size of the log handle can be controlled with the Box Height and 

Horizontal Position options. While the position of the Left and Right border of 

the log handle control its width, one can set the total height of the handle by 

entering a Box Height value in selected units. 

Sets the left and right position of 

the log 

Optional multi line 

text can be displayed 

in the comment zone 

Displays the log handle with a 

frame of selected style 

Sets the total height of the log 

handle Fills the log title box 

with a background 

color


www.alt.lu 

Check the box to display the 

zone in log handle 

Click on “Title”, “Comment” or 

“Properties” to select the corresponding 

zone for editing. 

The Box Frame option allows the user to draw a frame around the log handle. 

Log handle with and without Box Frame 

Access to each of the three areas is possible through the Display settings list 

control. 

In order to enable the display of an area check the corresponding box in the Part 

column. The height of each individual area within the given box frame can be set 

through the Top and Bottom parameter. Click into the corresponding cell to change 

the value. To change the unit in which the Top and Bottom are measured in, click 

the corresponding cell in the Unit column. 

Text, font style and text orientation can be changed for each of the three areas 

separately. 

� First click on Title, Comment or Properties in the Part column of the list 

control to select a certain area for editing. 

� Click the Text button to change the title or type in a comment text. Click the 

Font button to call up the standard font settings dialog to alter the type, size 

and color of the font used in the particular area. Click the Orientation button 

to set the orientation of the text within the area. 

All your settings are shown in the preview window.

1.3.3.4 Copy Settings between Logs 


Once you are happy with the layout of your log handle you can save the settings to 

apply them later to another log. Only the layout will be stored. Text for title or 

comments is not saved. Click the Save as Defaults button to store the layout. 

If you want to recall saved layout information, click the Load Defaults button. 

Independent from using the Log Title Settings the user can select two or more logs 

and copy the title settings from the master to all other selected logs. The master log 

is the one that has been selected first and is usually market with a red frame. To 

copy the log title settings: 

� Select the log with the settings to copy first. 

� Hold down the CTRL key while selecting the logs that will receive the new 

settings. 

� From the Edit menu select the Copy Title Settings command. 

Sometimes it is necessary to copy main, base and/or title settings between logs. This 

can be achieved by 

� selecting the log providing the settings first 

� hold down the CTRL key and select the logs receiving the settings 

� Right Click on a title to open the context menu and select Settings > Copy 

Settings 

� Make your selection of copy options and click OK. 

Alternatively you can select the Copy Settings option from the Edit menu. 

The Copy Settings dialog box opens. 

If all selected log types are of the same type all copy options are available. Has a mix 

of log types been selected copying of the Main Settings is not possible.


1.3.3.5 Log History 

www.alt.lu 

Click the column header to 

sort by Date, Log or Action 

The Log History is an audit trail stored with each log. The type of action and the 

processing parameters applied to a log are stored along with a date/time stamp. At 

any time the Log History for one or more logs can be displayed on screen in a 

separate window. 

Log History for a single log 

To display the Log History select one or multiple logs and choose Show Log 

History from the View menu or press the shortcut key CTRL + SHIFT + H. 

You can sort your list of history items when clicking on the corresponding column 

header. 

You can not add or delete single rows or parts of the history. It will be updated 

automatically. If you wish, you can erase the entire history using the Clear button in 

the Log History window. This might be useful if you give a WellCAD file to a 

client and you want to hide processing steps and formulas applied. On the other 

hand, if you want to document the processing steps applied to your data in a report, 

you can export the Log History into a *.TXT file using the Export button.

1.4 Basic Document Editing 

1.4.1 Depth Axis 


Each borehole document contains a depth reference axis. Though the depth axis has 

some properties with a log in common (e.g. moving, sizing, display of the settings 

dialog box) it is no log because the depth axis contains no data and it cannot be 

deleted. 

Depth axis is display 

reference 

Same data set displayed with two different depth scales 

Please not the while using the vertical scroll bar a little tool-tip will display the depth 

corresponding to the mid of the scroll bar handle. The length of the scroll bar 

handle represents the portion of the well currently displayed on screen. 

Purpose of the depth axis is to provide a reference for all displayed log data. Thus to 

alter the scale of the borehole document data display (e.g. 1:50, 1:100,…) or the 

displayed depth unit, the Depth Settings dialog must be opened. To do so: 

� Double click the depth axis handle or press the keys CTRL + A. 

Or 

� Right click the depth axis handle and select Settings > Main Settings from the 

popup menu. 

Or 

� Click the icon or select Depth Settings > Main Settings from the View 

menu.


www.alt.lu 

Unit: 

Depth Settings dialog box to control the depth 

reference axis of the borehole document 

WellCAD allows the display of log data in different units. The most common ones 

are meter and feet, but also second, millisecond and date/time can be handled. 

To toggle the depth axis from meter to feet simply select the new unit from the drop 

down list. 

The Reverse option allows displaying an elevation axis instead of a depth axis. 

Usually depth is counted positive downwards. With the Reverse option checked the 

depth is counted and displayed negative downwards. If the option is checked this 

will also effect the depth handling in all other parts of WellCAD (Tabular Editor, 

Status Bar, data export and import, …). 

The number of digits displayed for each depth string in the depth axis can be set in 

the Decimal places edit box. A maximum of 5 digits can be displayed, which 

corresponds to one-millimeter accuracy if the depth unit meter has been selected or 

1/1000 of a foot if feet have been chosen. 

Depth units set to meter, feet and date/time


Note: Internally all data is stored in meter (or second if time needs to be handled). 

WellCAD handles the data display and depth (time) management accordingly if any 

other unit has been chosen. 

More information on how to deal with date/time-based data is given in the data 

import chapter. 

Horizontal Grid: 

To alter the appearance of the horizontal grid lines you have to define a Spacing 

first. The Spacing is measured in units set for the depth axis and is simply a 

reference interval for which the frequency of major and minor grid lines as well as 

the number of major/minor depth indicators (depth strings) can be set. 

Spacing set to 2 

Major grid line 

Minor grid line 

E.g. if a depth scale of 1:200 meters has been chosen with a Spacing set to 2, then 

the displayed spacing interval will be every 2 meters. If the depth units are changed 

to feet, then the Spacing value of 2 will correspond to an interval of 2 feet. 

The user can toggle the display of major and/or minor grid lines using the Major & 

minor, Major, None options. 

More detailed settings for major and minor grid lines are accessible with the 

Advanced button. 

Scale: 

A scale of 1:100 means that the data acquired over an interval of 100 units (e.g. 100 

m depth) will be displayed on 1 unit (e.g. 1 m) of paper (or screen). 

Enter a new scale value into the corresponding edit box of the Depth Settings 

dialog or right click on the depth axis handle and pick one of provided values from 

the pop up menu.


www.alt.lu 

Position: 

The depth axis column can be moved, positioned and resized the same way a log can 

be. Enter numbers for the Left and Right position of the column border in selected 

units. 

Date / Time: 

The Date / Time Format Settings dialog box is accessible only if the selected 

Unit is set to date/time. It provides further settings to control the display format 

of date and time stamps. 

Date / Time Format Settings dialog box 

Date: 

From the Format drop down list select the desired format for your date strings. If 

you want to display a date stamp every 12 hours you should enter a value of 720 in 

to the corresponding edit box. 

Time: 

Select the desired format for your time strings from the Format drop down list. 

GMT offset: 

To display your data corrected for a certain GMT offset enter the required value in 

the corresponding edit box. If the data stored corresponds to 6 a.m. GMT and you 

want to display a data/time string in GMT+1 enter a value of 60. 

Time Zero: 

If date/time data is handled in a Depth Log the data values stored correspond to 

seconds. You can use the Time Zero to define the initial date and time of your data 

column. E.g. the progress in depth during a drilling operation is monitored. For each


measured depth the time in seconds since beginning of the drilling is stored in the 

Depth Log. The Time Zero would be set to date and time corresponding to the 

beginning of the drilling in order to read real dates and times from the displayed axis 

(see 1.7.3 Using Time Based Data). 

Advanced: 

The Advanced Depth Settings dialog box provides further settings to control the 

appearance of major / minor horizontal and vertical grid lines. 

Advanced Settings dialog box 

Items Count: 

For each Horizontal Grid Spacing set, the user can define the number of 

indicators (depth strings), major grid lines and minor grid lines to be displayed. 

Usually one indicator and one major line is displayed per spacing. 

2 major and 4 minor subdivisions (left) and 1 major and 8 subdivisions (right)


www.alt.lu 

Depth Column Ticks: 

Depth Ticks are little extensions of the depth grid lines into the depth axis. The user 

has the choice to display these ticks on the left, right or on both sides of the depth 

axis column. Select the desired option from the drop down list. 

Ticks displayed on both, left and no side of the depth axis column 

Background: 

If the depth axis is superimposed to other log types it enhances the readability of 

depth strings when displaying them on an opaque background. 

Without (left) and with opaque background enabled (right) 

Major / Minor Grid Lines: 

Major and minor depth grid line thickness and color settings can be selected from 

the corresponding drop down lists. In addition the appearance style of major and 

minor tick marks can be chosen. 

Font: 

Displays the standard Font selection dialog box. Choose a font for the depth strings 

which are shown within the depth axis. 

To jump to a particular depth in your Borehole Document use the Go To option 

from the Edit menu.

1.4.2 Data Import 


WellCAD imports data from a wide range of file formats. The following paragraphs 

describe the import methods for a selection of common file types. To detect the 

format of a file WellCAD relies strictly on the files extension (e.g. .LAS, .DLIS, 

.TXT). 

If a data set is imported into WellCAD a new borehole document will be created to 

host the incoming data. From WellCAD v4.3 onward data can be imported directly 

into an already existing borehole document. 

To import a single file 

� open the File > Import menu 

� select the Single File option 

Select File → Import to import data sets 

The Open dialog box will be displayed. From the drop down list choose the type of 

file you wish to import. Select the filename and click OK to begin the import. 

An alternative would be to drag the file you wish to import directly from your file 

explorer into the WellCAD workspace. 

Please note the difference between using the File > Open command to load a 

WellCAD Borehole Document file (.WCL) and using the File > Import option to 

import a data set that will be hosted in a Borehole Document. 

Import of data into an active document 

Since the release of WellCAD v4.3 data from files can be directly imported into an 

already open and active borehole document. Further more the incoming data can be 

directly copied to and merged with the existing data set if log title and log type 

correspond.


www.alt.lu 

To import data into a current document: 

� Open the File > Import into current document menu. This option becomes 

available if a borehole document (WCL file) is already open. 

� Select the Single File or Multiple Files option. 

� The Open dialog will be displayed. Proceed with the selection of the import 

format as described above. 

Select File > Import into current document 

To merge incoming and existing data: 

During the import of data into the current document a message box will be 

displayed asking you whether to automatically merge incoming and existing data. 

Merging data is only possible if incoming and existing data share the same log type 

and log title. To ensure that consistent log titles are used see the paragraph about the 

application of alias tables. 

Import of a WCL file into the current borehole document 

Please note that it is also possible to import an entire borehole document into 

another document the same way. In the Open dialog box select WellCAD 

Borehole Files (*.WCL) from the drop down list and choose the WCL to import. 

Please note that the automated merging of data columns works only if incoming and 

existing log type and log title are the same.

To use an alias table during import of data 


Log titles in WellCAD are unique identifiers of the data container (i.e. the log). They 

allow templates to copy settings to the correct log or formulas to find the right data 

source for computations. Also the automated upload of data to databases often 

depends on consistent use of the log title. 

When data files are imported the title of the new WellCAD log depends on the 

mnemonics (channel names) of the imported file. This often leads to a mismatch of 

imported and expected titles – expected titles would be the standardized names. As a 

consequence the user would be required to check and eventually rename the log 

titles each time a new data file was imported. 

Since WellCAD v4.3 so called Alias Tables can be created by the user. Alias 

Tables contain standard Names and for each of these standardized names a list of 

possible Aliases can be defined. Whenever, during import of a data file, the 

imported data channel name corresponds to one of the Aliases it will be renamed to 

the standard name and set as the new log title. 

The following screen shot shows a sample of an Alias Table: 

Whenever a data channel with the mnemonic GR, GRDE or GAMMA] is imported 

the resulting log title in WellCAD for this data will be set to Gamma Ray. A data 

channel CADE will result in a log title Caliper. 

A new entry mentioning the original mnemonic will be added to the log history, 

whenever renaming occurs. 

Enabling the use of an Alias Table: 

The use of Alias Tables is optional. To enable the use of Alias Tables: 

� Open the Tools > Options… dialog box. 

� In the tree control click the Alias Table entry.


www.alt.lu 

Editing the alias table and settings options for application 

The Alias Table dialog box will be displayed. By default the Alias information will be 

stored and loaded in/from the Alias Table.ini file contained in the 

...WellCAD\Program folder under the installation path of WellCAD. It is up to the 

user to manage and maintain multiple alias tables stored in different *.ini files (for a 

description of the format see below), but only one table can be used at a time. To 

switch between Alias Tables (i.e. between *.ini files) click the Browse button and 

select the new *.ini file. To combine the contents of multiple files click the Add 

from… button and select the *.ini from which you want to import the information. 

The content of the Alias Table file is displayed in the list control. Each row shows 

the expected Name, which is the standard name to be used in the WellCAD 

borehole document and the Alias names, a single or a comma separated list of 

names that will be searched when importing a data file. Whenever the imported 

channel name corresponds to an alias, this name will be reset to the expected name. 

If a conflict of names is detected (e.g. an Alias is listed twice for two different 

Names) a warning symbol will be displayed in front of the rows in question. 

Adding a new Alias: 

The last free row of the list control can be used to add a new entry. Simply click in 

the Name or Alias cell to add information. For more comfortable editing click the 

little button displayed at the end of a selected Alias cell to display an editor window. 

Removing an Alias: 

Right click on the entry you would like to remove and select Remove Row from the 

context menu.


Use Alias Table options: 

Alias Tables can be applied when importing data, when loading templates or at any 

time when using the Edit > Rename Logs option. For the first two cases the use is 

optional and can be enabled by checking the corresponding boxes in the Use Alias 

Table field. 

For the application of templates several additional options can be set: 

Keep existing log name – The alias table will be applied in the background to match 

current log title and expected name from the template. But current log titles will not 

be overwritten. 

Use log name from template – If the current log title appears in the alias list or 

corresponds to the expected name it will be set to the name used by the template. 

Use log name from alias table – If the current log title appears in the alias list it will be 

set to the expected name after the template has been applied. 

Format of the Alias Table: 

Alias Table *.ini files can be edited using a simple text editor such as Wordpad. The 

file consists of three sections [AliasOption], [Alias] and [DefaultUnit]. 

[AliasOption] contains the general options for the application of alias tables that can 

be set in the Use Alias Table section of the dialog box. They should not be edited by 

hand. 

[Alias] contains the expected name to alias correspondence. The format is: 

ExpectedName = Alias 1, Alias 2, Alias 3, …, Alias N 

[DefaultUnit] contains alias names and a corresponding unit string. As some alias 

names may be a composition of mnemonic and unit string (e.g GR[api])the user can 

define the WellCAD unit string associated with an alias in this section. E.g. setting 

GR[api]= api would force the unit string of the log to be set to api after GR[api] was 

renamed to the expected name. 

A sample of an Alias Table *.ini file is shown below: 

[AliasOption] 

ImportRenameLog=yes 

TemplateUseAlias=no 

TemplateRenameLog=no 

ImportFileUsingAliasTable=yes 

ApplyTemplateUsingAliasTable=yes 

RenameLogApplyingTemplate=ChangeFromTemplate


1.4.2.1 LAS Import 

www.alt.lu 

[Alias] 

Gamma=GR, Gam, GR[api] 

Caliper=CAL, CAL[mm] 

… 

[DefaultUnit] 

GR[api]=api 

CAL[mm]=mm 

… 

The Log ASCII Standard (LAS) file format has been developed and promoted by 

the Canadian Well Logging Society. For more details of the format refer to the 

CWLS homepage (www.cwls.org). 

WellCAD currently supports the import of LAS files up to version 2.0. 

To import a LAS file choose File > Import > Single File and select the file type 

LAS Files (*.LAS). 

A LAS file contains header information and as you will learn in paragraph 1.4.3 

Header and Trailer the WellCAD header can be filled with this information. It is 

assumed that the WellCAD header contains the necessary slots to host the header 

data. At import time WellCAD will try to match the header entries of the LAS file 

with header fields of the current Borehole Document header. The following dialog 

box is displayed to allow matching of header words.

List of data channels contained 

in the LAS file 


In the WellCAD Header Form section (lower right) select the header from you 

would like to use. 

The Name, Description and Value columns show the information coming from 

the file header. The Header Field column is populated from the selected WellCAD 

header. In order to transfer the header information (Value) from the file header to 

WellCAD the header labels used in WellCAD (i.e. the Title of the dynamic text 

fields defined when designing the header in HeadCAD) must match. You can click 

into a cell in the Header Field column in order to select from the labels available in 

the WellCAD header. 

To exclude header information from being imported simply remove the check mark 

in front of the row (or use the Deselect All button). 

Click the Skip Header button to pass over the header information import. 

The next dialog box displayed lists the contents of the LAS file. 

From the Logs To Import list the user can select the data channels he would like to 

import and can restrict the depth interval from which the data will be read. 

Once the users clicks the OK button one Well Log or Mud Log will be created for 

each data channel. The type of log created depends on whether the incoming data 

has been sampled at a constant rate or not. If the Step field of the LAS header has 

been set to zero, the incoming data will always be imported as Mud Log. If the Step 

entry is not zero, WellCAD will perform a scan of the data and compares the 

imported depth of two consecutive data values with the sample rate specified in the 

LAS header to guarantee a constant step. If a mismatch is detected a warning 

message will be displayed to inform the user that the data will be imported as Mud 

Log instead as Well Log.


1.4.2.2 TXT, CSV and ASCII Import 

www.alt.lu 

File content preview 

Any ASCII file containing data in column-delimited format can be imported as long 

as the order of columns corresponds to the one requested by a WellCAD log type. 

Files with *.TXT, *.CSV or *.ASC extension will be recognized and handled as 

ASCII files. 

As mentioned in 1.3.2.10 Cut, Copy and Paste Logs column delimited data can 

also be imported from the Windows Clipboard where it has been buffered when 

copied out of an application like EXCEL. 

Importing an ASCII file 

� Open the File > Import > Single File menu 

� From the File Open dialog choose Text Files (*.TXT, *.CSV, *.ASC) as 

file type extension 

You can also open the corresponding file by dragging it from the file explorer into 

the WellCAD workspace. 

Pasting data from the Clipboard 

� Assuming ASCII data has been copied to the Windows Clipboard select 

Edit > Paste Special 

� Choose the Paste and Text option. 

The Paste Special option is available for an active Borehole Document only. 

In any case the Text File Import Wizard will open providing some guidance 

through the different import options. 

Step 1 of the Text File Import Wizard


Preview: 

The preview shows only a part of the contents of the ASCII data set that will be 

imported. It is used to reflect changes that are made regarding column delimiters 

and skipped lines. 

Column Delimiter: 

All data in the ASCII data set must be arranged in columns. To separate the 

columns from each other delimiters are used which depend on the application that 

generated the ASCII file. 

In Step 1of the Text File Import Wizard the user has the possibility to set the type 

of delimiter that corresponds to the one used in the incoming data set. The preview 

window indicates if the right delimiter has been set. Attention must be paid to 

delimiters used to separate the words in a title string and delimiters used to separate 

the data columns. 

Skip Lines: 

In case lines preceding the data set must be skipped, the user can enter the number 

of lines into the corresponding field. 

Click the Next button to proceed to Step 2 of the Import Wizard. 

Titles: 

Step 2 of the Text File Import Wizard 

Specify the first two lines of the ASCII file should be read. If the first line of the file 

should be used as log titles mark the first check box. If the second line lists the log 

units, mark the second check box.


www.alt.lu 

Import: 

If point data (depth-value pairs) is imported into Mud, Interval or Well Logs the 

user can enable the Allow multiple logs option. This option assigns one Mud, 

Interval or Well Log to each data column found in the data set (the Interval Log 

assumes the first two columns of the ASCII data set to be top and bottom depth). 

Single Log Import 

If the Allow multiple logs option stays disabled the following final dialog box is 

presented to the user. 

Step 3 of the Text File Import Wizard for single log import 

Log Type: 

The Log Type drop down list allows selecting the log type that corresponds to the 

incoming order and format of columns. If you do not remember the format of a 

certain log type refer to Appendix A or open a log of the same type in the WellCAD 

Tabular Editor. If your data set does not correspond to the requested format you 

can use a text editor or EXCEL to add the missing columns or to rearrange the 

column order. Note: The Well Log type assumes a constant sampling rate. The data 

column is build from the bottom to the top. During data import expected sampling 

step (determined from top and bottom depth in the file and the number of data 

points) and sampling step read from the file are compared. If these do not match the 

data will be imported into a Mud Log type to avoid a depth shift at the top. 

Axis: 

As long as you are dealing with only a single depth axis – the master depth axis – in 

a borehole document, you leave the Default Depth option. The drop down control 

lists each Depth Column Log contained in the Borehole Document that could be 

used as a depth axis. The following example explains how you could use the Axis 

settings: Imagine you have a borehole document with a master depth axis


representing MD (Measured Depth) and containing an additional Depth Column 

Log showing a TVD (True Vertical Depth) axis. This means, that all data points of 

the Borehole Document are still internally stored using the master depth values. The 

data of the TVD Depth Column Log could be used to stretch the data display in a 

way, that the TVD axis becomes a linear axis and it could also be used to display 

TVD depth values in Tabular Editor and Status Bar, but this does not change the 

fact, that all data points are saved against MD internally. All depth values of an 

ASCII file imported using the Text File Import Wizard with the Axis option set to 

Default Depth (which means the documents master axis) will be read directly 

transferred to master depth (MD in our example) values. Imagine you would like to 

import an ASCII file that contains a TVD depth column and e.g. some structure 

picks. The Axis control shows two entries – Default Depth and TVD- according to 

master depth axis and Depth Column Log in your document. The selection of 

Default Depth would result in displaying the structure data at a wrong depth, as the 

import algorithm would read the ASCII files depth column (TVD) directly as master 

depth values (MD). The correct selection in the Axis drop down would be TVD. In 

this case the import algorithm reads a TVD depth value from the ASCII file and 

converts it to a master depth value according the MD-TVD correspondence stored 

in the borehole documents TVD column. This way the incoming structure data will 

be stored with a correct master depth value. If a depth axis other than the Default 

Axis is used and data that was sampled at a constant rate is imported using a log type 

requesting a constant sample rate, you might be prompted to resample your data. 

Import Unit: 

The import algorithm must know the unit of the imported depth (or time) numbers 

to transfer them correctly into the Borehole Document. If the depth column of the 

ASCII file has been recorded in feet, select feet from the Import Unit drop down. 

If the recorded depth values are in meter select the meter option. 

Reversed axis: 

If the incoming depth columns counts the depth negative downwards, the user has 

to check the Reversed axis option in order to import the data correctly. Please note 

that this option is independent from whether the WellCAD depth axis is displayed 

reversed (as elevation axis) or not. The use must specify whether the incoming data 

is reversed (in the sense of WellCAD) or not.


www.alt.lu 

Selection of the reference column 

used for the master depth axis of 

the document 

Multiple Log Import 

If the Allow multiple logs option has been enabled the following dialog box is 

presented to the user next. 

Step 3 of the Text File Import Wizard for multiple log import 

Reference Selection: 

The former Preview window has been changed into a control listing all channels 

contained in the ASCII file. Channel name, a preview of a single data value and the 

data format is displayed. The user can click a cell in the Format column to select 

whether the channel’s data corresponds to a depth, data or date/time column. 

Click a cell in the format column 

to change the data format.

Click to select the channels to 

import. 


If depth or date/time format has been chosen the user can place a check mark in 

front of the channels name to indicate that the corresponding data will be imported 

as the Borehole Documents master depth (time) axis. Only one column set to depth 

format can be used as reference column. Details about time based data import are 

given in 1.7.3 Using Time Based Data. All channels having a format other than 

data will be imported as Depth Column Log. Channels of data format can be 

imported as either Well Log or Mud Log. 

Data type: 

Select whether your data columns of the incoming ASCII file should be imported as 

Well or Mud Log. Note: The Well Log type assumes a constant sampling rate. The 

data column is build from the bottom to the top. During data import expected 

sampling step (determined from top and bottom depth in the file and the number of 

data points) and sampling step read from the file are compared. If these do not 

match the data will be imported into a Mud Log type to avoid a depth shift at the 

top. 

GMT Offset: 

You can correct incoming time data for a GMT offset. If your time data has been 

recorded in GMT + 1 and you want to store the data in WellCAD as GMT you will 

have to enter a value of 60 (minutes). 

Click Next to proceed with Step 4 – the final step if no date/time pairs need to be 

handled. 

Step 4 of the Text File Import Wizard for multiple log import


1.4.2.3 RD file import 

www.alt.lu 

Import Selection: 

Place a check mark in front of each channel you would like to import. The channel 

chosen to become the master axis of the Borehole Document must be imported and 

cannot be unchecked. The ** symbol in the format column indicates the reference 

axis that has been selected in the former step of the wizard. 

The purpose of the Axis, Import Unit and Reversed axis settings have been 

explained in detail above in Single Log Import. 

ALT Raw Data files are produced by the ALT Logger data acquisition system and 

have the file extension *.RD. 

At import time WellCAD needs to rationalize the RD data and extracts only data 

according to its needs. WellCAD therefore places some constraints on the import 

function with the following two assumptions. WellCAD assumes the same tool for 

the entirety of the file and a constant depth based sampling rate. WellCAD takes the 

depth of the first record as the start depth and the depth of the last record as the 

end depth, and then divides by the number of records minus one, to calculate the 

constant sampling rate. 

When importing RD files WellCAD will display various messages according to the 

task that it is carried out in the Status bar. The stages of importation are: 

� WellCAD scans the *.RD file for header information first. If a header 

cannot be found and if the option Warn if no header found in the ALT 

Logger default settings dialogue box (see below) is checked, a warning 

message is displayed. In this case WellCAD will use the default borehole 

document header form as specified in the Tools>Options>Header 

section. 

� WellCAD looks in the RD file for the sampler record (could be more than 

one) set in the file by the logging engineer every time he changes the 

sampling mode. The sampler record helps to properly reconstruct the 

depth data of the file and helps with interpolation if needed. Two situations 

are possible: If the sampler is found all is OK. If the sampler is not found, 

a warning message will be shown only if Warn if no sample record found 

in the ALT Logger default settings dialogue box (see below) is checked. If 

this is the case and the file import is continued, WellCAD will assume a 

constant depth sample rate and interpolates the depth data as mentioned 

previously. 

� WellCAD looks in the RD file for the tool configuration file (.TOL file). 

The tool configuration file contains all the information relating to the


configuration and operation of a particular tool type and describes the data 

produced from the tool. A copy of the TOL file is placed in the RD file 

every time you commence data acquisition with the logging system. If the 

TOL file is found WellCAD may prompt you with the option to use this 

file or to use an external file (if for instance, the original calibrations are 

wrong). This prompt will only occur if the Always use internal TOL file 

option is not checked in the ALT Logger default settings dialogue box (see 

below). If WellCAD cannot find the TOL file or the named external file 

then a default one will be assumed. The minimum information required 

from the TOL file includes the name of the tool driver. The default driver 

name is given in the ALT Logger default settings dialogue box. 

For further information concerning tool drivers refer to the ALT Logger operations 

manual. According to the selected driver, various other options will be prompted at 

import time. For example if the ABI40 driver has been selected you will have the 

options to orient the raw data at import time to either magnetic north or the 

borehole high side. Different data subsets can be loaded like 1 st and/or 2 nd echo 

images, thickness images, Full Waveform traces, deviation and temperature as well 

as various slow channels. 

ALT Logger Default Settings 

Open the ALT Logger Default Settings from the Tools > Options menu and select 

the Alt Logger tab. 

Default settings for ALT Logger *.RD file import


1.4.2.4 TFD file import 

www.alt.lu 

Default driver: 

Select the default driver from the drop down list. Recent versions of the import 

algorithm read the driver directly from the TOL file contained in the *.RD data set 

so that the Default driver settings are no longer relevant. 

Warn if no header found: 

If this option is enabled a warning message is displayed if no header information can 

be read from the *.RD file and the borehole document default header is used 

instead. 

Warn if no Sampler record found: 

With the option checked the user would be warned if sampling information were 

not available. The data is assumed to be recorded at a constant sample rate if one 

continues the file import. 

Always use internal TOL file: 

A tool configuration file (*.TOL) file is stored within each *.RD data set. 

Nevertheless a dialog box pops up each time a *.RD file is imported asking the user 

whether he wants to use an external *.TOL file or not. To disable this behavior and 

always use the tool configuration stored in incoming *.RD file, check the Always 

use internal TOL file option. 

Deviation channels filter: 

In order to filter the incoming data channels from the orientation devices build into 

the FAC/ABI and OBI probes the user can set the filter length measured in number 

of data points (see also 1.5.6 Filtering Logs). 

TFD is the extension of data files output by the ALT Logger 8.1 and MATRIX data 

acquisition system. TFD stands for Tagged Field Data and is a more advanced and 

user friendly file format compared to *.RD files. A description of details would be 

beyond the scope of this WellCAD manual. Please refer to the corresponding 

technical documentation about ALT Logger and MATRIX. 

To import a *.TFD file into WellCAD select Import > Single File from the File 

menu and pick the *.RD, *.TFD option.

Preview of the embedded 

configuration file. 


The first dialog box that pops up during the data import allows to select another 

than the embedded TOL file. Please note that for the latest QL probe TOL file are 

no longer used. They have been replaced by configuration files defining a stack of 

tools. To see details of the embedded configuration file click the Details button. If 

you wish to load your data using an external configuration file click the Change 

button and specify the TOL file or for the new QL tools create the new stack in the 

Logger Suite software and use the Toolstack.descr file. 

After clicking OK you will get a chance to allow depth or time resampling of your 

data during import. Enter the desired sampling step into the corresponding field in 

the Sampling Mode section. To alter the depth or time range of the imported data 

you are allowed to enter new From and To values into corresponding fields of the 

Range section. The min and max values are displayed for your information next to 

the edit boxes. 

Depth resample option for 

incoming data. 

Import data from a user 

defined depth interval.


1.4.2.5 Picture import 

www.alt.lu 

The imported log titles are a combination of the Producer of the data (e.g. Tool, 

Logger or a specific process like DtPickUp) and the channel name (as specified in 

TOL file or automatically assigned by tool or processor). A typical log title could be 

Tool.Amplitude1 or DtPickUp.Rx1-dt. These log titles are called the Long Names. 

Multi Channel names or display names may be imported and displayed as comment. 

The log title still carries the long name. 

By setting the UseShortNameForLog=TRUE entry in the [TFDImport] section 

of the WellCAD.ini file the user can force a Short Name to be set as log title. This 

will basically skip the Producer in the log title. E.g. Tool.Amplitude1 becomes 

Amplitude1 and DtPickUp.RX1-dt becomes Rx1-dt. 

If only a single picture needs to be 

imported open the File > Import > 

Single File menu and select the Bitmap 

Files …file extension. A dialog box will 

open to set the import options. If the 

selected file name contains numbers the 

last two numbers of the file title are 

interpreted as top and bottom depth 

independent from the string separating the two numbers. An appropriate depth unit 

must be selected in the import dialog box. 

Further a selection must be made whether to import the picture into an RGB or 

OLE Log container. The OLE log stores the picture in its original (compressed) 

format along with a top and bottom depth (e.g. core photographs) and consumes 

less memory to store the data. If the picture needs to be converted to data points (24 

bit RGB color values) the RGB Log is the container of choice (e.g. 3D core scans). 

When clicking on OK the picture will be imported into the selected log type (see the 

Appendix for details about the RGB and OLE Logs). 

Must multiple files be imported and stitched together (e.g. core photographs) the 

user can select the Selected Files or Picture file list option from the File > 

Import > Multiple Files menu.

Selected Files: 


Ensure the file extension is set to Core Image Files (*.TIF, …). Select the files 

you would like to import from the Open dialog box. Hold the CTRL key down and 

click on the file names for a multiple selection. 

The Multiple Pictures Import dialog opens next. 

The import algorithm will try 

to detect the information 

about the top and bottom 

depth in the file title of each 

picture file. The Top depth 

and Bot depth columns will 

be filled with values of the last 

two numbers contained in the 

file title. The user must set the 

unit these numbers 

correspond to. If the top and 

bottom depth must be 

corrected the user can simply 

click into the corresponding cells and enter the desired value. After clicking on OK 

the files will be imported one by one and merged together into a single RGB or 

OLE Log depending on the selection made in the dialog box. As RGB Logs may 

consume a lot of resources an alternative way of displaying pictures is using the 

OLE Log. 

Picture file list: 

The user can import a file list which speeds up the import of multiple pictures 

enormously. Create a simple text file of the following format and save it as *.txt file. 

From the File > Import > Multiple Files menu select the Picture file list option. 

Top Depth, Bottom Depth, Path and File. 

E.g. 

127.75 136.81 C:\Temp\photo1.jpg 



A dialog box similar to the one for the Selected Files import will be displayed. 

When importing the picture file list each of the files listed will be imported and 

merged into an RGB or OLE log covering the specified depth range.


1.4.2.6 AppleCore file import 

1.4.2.7 DLIS import 

www.alt.lu 

WellCAD supports the import of AppleCore ASCII outputs. Open the File > 

Import > Single File menu and select the AppleCore Ascii Files (*.ascii) extension. 

Ensure your file has the extension *.ascii. Select it and click OK. The file import 

dialog opens next and provides the following options: 

Merge consecutive data: If marked consecutive intervals of equal data will be 

imported as a single large interval. E.g. if consecutive beds of the same lithology are 

imported they will be imported as a single lithology interval. 

Header: Select the header file (*.WCH) that will be attached to your new borehole 

document. If the title of the dynamic text field matches the header mnemonics at 

the beginning of your ASCII file (e.g. DAT or LGR) the corresponding information 

will be loaded into the WellCAD header. 

Template: Specify the template file (*.WDT) that will be applied to the imported 

data. Ensure the pattern and symbol libraries included in the template contain the 

codes imported from your AppleCore file. 

The DLIS file format is a proprietary file format of the API (American Petroleum 

Institute). Refer to “Recommended Practices for Exploration and Production Data 

Digital Interchange” API Recommended Practice 66, V2 Second edition, June 1996 

for further details of their file format. To use DLIS file import facilities, you must 

own the WellCAD LIS import add-on module. 

To import a DLIS file open the File menu and select Import > Single File. From 

the File Open dialog box choose the DLIS file type (*.DLIS). 

A DLIS file may encapsulate multiple logical files. WellCAD scans the DLIS file to 

find all logical files and prompts the user to select one if multiple files are contained. 

Afterwards the Import DLIS header dialog opens allowing the selection of a 

WellCAD header form to match the DLIS header key words.


The DLIS Header preview displays the entire set of header information found in the 

DLIS file (or selected logical file). When creating the preview all header entries are 

checked where the DLIS header Name matches the WellCAD header key words 

(Header Form Field). The user can place a check mark in front of a row and click in 

the corresponding cell in the Header Form Field column to select an appropriate 

WellCAD header key word from the drop down control. 

The name of the actual WellCAD header file (*.WCH) is shown in the drop down 

control in the lower right edge of the dialog box. Use the Browse button to navigate 

to a new folder containing header (*.WCH) files and select a header from the drop 

down control to exchange the actual header. Only one header can be used per 

import. 

Use the buttons on the right of the dialog box to quickly select or deselect the 

header items. Click on Import Selection to import selected DLIS header items into 

the WellCAD header and continue the import. Clicking on Cancel will abort the file 

import. 

(To skip the import of header items and continue the import, click the Deselect All 

button followed by Import Selection.) 

The Import DLIS file dialog opens next. A list of all channels ready to import is 

shown. Set or remove the check marks for the channels you want to import or skip. 

Channels are identified by their Mnemonic (which will be imported as log title) and a 

Description. When creating the import channel list a suggestion for a WellCAD Log 

Type is given. The user may change the Log Type for a selected channel (check 

mark must be set) with a click into the corresponding cell in the Log Type column. 

The drop down control lists all possible alternatives.


1.4.2.8 LIS import 

www.alt.lu 

The Dim. And Memory columns provide information about the number of data 

columns contained in the channel (e.g. 12 FMI button rows) and the memory size 

that will be occupied and can not be edited. If necessary the user can force the 

imported dataset to be resampled. Click in the corresponding cell in the Resampling 

column and select the resample factor. 

Click on Import Selection to start the data import or hit the Cancel button to 

abort the import. 

The LIS file format is a proprietary file format of the Schlumberger Company. 

Refer to Schlumberger for further details of their file format. To use LIS and TIFF 

encapsulated LIS file import facilities, you must own the WellCAD LIS import addon 

module. 

To import a LIS file open the File menu and select Import > Single File. From the 

File Open dialog box choose the LIS file type (*.LIS). 

LIS files consist of one or multiple Tape images. Tape images incorporate File 

images and each File image is made up of Mnemonics. 

The first dialog box displayed allows the selection of the tape image. The Reel 

Header and Tape Images fields provide previews of the header information 

contained in the LIS file. In the Tape Images field click on the tape image you 

would like to import. Click OK to continue.


WellCAD displays the Select a file image dialog box. Tape and File image header 

information is shown and a File image can be selected. Click OK to continue. 

If no default WellCAD header has been set (Tools > Options) a warning message 

will be displayed at this stage. Following the selection of a File image the Select 

Logs dialog will be displayed. Listed are all channels which can be imported into 

WellCAD. Place a check mark in front of the channel you would like to import. 

Once checked you can click into the cell in the Log Type column to change the type 

of data container used in WellCAD.


1.4.2.9 WITSML import 

www.alt.lu 

Please note that the WellCAD.ini file contains a flag to switch between two different 

LIS file loading algorithms. In [LisImport] set the Loader=internal flag to use the 

most recent algorithm. Use Loader=lis.dll to use an older algorithm. 

WITSML stands for Wellsite Information Transfer Standard Markup Language and 

is a file format for well data based on XML. Further details about WITSML and a 

full description of the format can be found on www.witsml.org. 

As of now WellCAD supports the following data objects: well and � ellbore, which 

contain only data for the WellCAD header document. wellLog, log, trajectory and 

formationMarker are data objects imported as logs. Each of these objects comes as 

a separate file carrying the file extension *.XML. The syntax of these files should be 

strictly compliant with the WITSML v1.3.1 Data Schema Specifications published by 

the ENERGISTICS consortium and the WITSML Special Interest Group. 

To import WITSML files into WellCAD: 

� From the File menu select Import > Single File or Import > Multiple 

Files > Selected Files. If multiple files are selected each file might 

contain a different data object. All data objects sharing the same Well and 

Wellbore names (i.e. and ) will be 

automatically merged and imported into the same Borehole Document. 

� Data from the WITSML well and � ellbore data objects will be imported 

into the Borehole Document header if the selected default header (can be 

defined under Tools > Options) contains compatible header words. 

� If header data is going to be imported the following dialog box will open:


The dialog lists the WITSML file header data labels and values in the 

Name and Value columns. Please not that the labels are preceded by the 

name of the data object (i.e. well_... and wellbore_...) to identify their origin. 

The Header Field column contains the corresponding WellCAD header 

labels. During initialization of the dialog box it will be checked if WITSML 

labels (Name) and WellCAD header label (Header Field) match. If this is 

not the case the Header Field cell stays empty. In this case set a 

checkmark in front of the WITSML label and click into the corresponding 

Header Field cell to select an alternative WellCAD header label. 

To use another then the default header click the Browse button and make 

you selection. 

Below is a short section from a WITSML file containing the well data 

object. 

The corresponding header in WellCAD showing the label and imported 

value looks like the following.


1.4.3 Header and Trailer 

www.alt.lu 

A header and trailer section can extend a borehole document. Header and trailer are 

created and stored as separate objects within HeadCAD (*.WCH files), but once 

attached to a borehole document they build one entity with the document and are 

saved and reloaded within the *.WCL file. HeadCAD is a stand-alone application 

that is shipped with each WellCAD package and comes with its own manual. There 

you will learn how to design a header/trailer, insert legends and spread sheets. 



Data and TitleZone 



Borehole document with multi-part header and trailer 

Each new borehole document opens with a default header attached. Which header is 

loaded as default can be set in the Header tab of the Tools Options dialog box 

accessible from Tools > Options…. Browse for the desired *.WCH header file in 

the Default Borehole Document Header section. 

Composing a header/trailer section 


To remove or add header/trailer parts (*.WCH files) select the View > Header and 

Trailer… option. The Header and Trailer Editor will appear.

Switch between header and 

trailer section 

List of elements within the 

current section 

Add, remove or change the 

order of elements 


Header and trailer composition 

To be able to switch between header and trailer sections click to access the trailer 

section and for the header section. Each element in the list corresponds to a 

*.WCH file that was created with HeadCAD. You can click the check box next to the 

element’s name to hide the display. To remove an element click on the element first 

to select it and click the Delete button afterwards. To add a new element to the 

header/trailer, click on Add and browse for the new *.WCH file to be loaded. The 

new elements will be added to the bottom of the list. If you want to change the 

order of appearance, select the element you want to move (click on it) and use the 

Up or Down buttons to shift the selected element. Header and trailer elements will 

be attached to the borehole document in the same order as they appear on the list. 

WellCAD Header Editor 

WellCAD provides a build in header/trailer editor. Please note that the WellCAD 

header editor and HeadCAD are two different applications. 

The header editor can be used to load and save header forms as well as to fill 

dynamic text fields and table objects with data. 

To access the header editor click or select Tools > Header editor… (CTRL + 

H). If the active borehole document contains multiple header/trailer elements the 

user will be prompted to select a specific element to be opened in the editor. 

The header editor comes up in a separate window.


www.alt.lu 

Header Editor specific 

menu bar 

Currently selected 

header/trailer element 

WellCAD Header Editor window 

The header editor window, when active, provides a menu bar, which is different 

from the menu bar for active borehole documents. 

In order to zoom and rotate the displayed header component for a more convenient 

text filed editing, select View > Zoom or View > Rotate from the menu. To enter 

information, simply click the field you want to edit and type the new text. 

You can replace the displayed header component by another one that will be read 

from a *.WCH file. Select Open from the Form menu and browse for the new 

*.WCH file to load. WellCAD will transfer all entered information to the new header 

where dynamic text fields in replaced and new header match. Dynamic text fields are 

identified by a unique title. If these identifiers match, the data will be transferred 

(refer to the HeadCAD manual for more information). 

If you wish to save a header component as a *.WCH file you can do so from the 

header editor as well. Select the Save as… option from the Form menu and specify 

the file name to save the current header component.

Empty dynamic 

text fields 

Interactively 

entered text 

Entering information into header and trailer 


Depending on their design, header/trailer can contain dynamic text fields that allow 

you to enter text information directly. Legends and bitmaps must already be entered 

at the design stage of the header in HeadCAD. If set up properly legends will adapt 

their contents according to the log they refer to. 

Fraction of the default ALT borehole document header 

With the borehole document being in Presentation Mode click into the header/trailer 

dynamic text field. The text field becomes active and a insert prompt appears. You 

can type in your text now. 

As some of the dynamic text fields appear in different orientation or the font size is 

very small – the header/trailer is displayed in true print scale – it might be more 

convenient to enter your text information in a separate editor – the WellCAD 

Header Editor. 

Static Table Objects 

Dynamic text fields are not the only objects that can be edited. There are also Static 

Table Objects (spreadsheets) that can be filled with text within the header editor. 

Static Table Objects get their data imported from files or copied and pasted from 

another application (e.g. EXCEL) or a Borehole Document. The Static Table Object 

itself (in other words the empty data container) must be placed when the header is 

designed. A header can be created in HeadCAD.


www.alt.lu 

Static Table Object displaying stratigraphic information 

As already said, data cannot be edited directly within the table object. Data must be 

imported or pasted. 

� Open the header element containing the static table object in the 

WellCAD Header Editor. 

� Right Click on the table object to display the Flying Menu 

Data can be copied from a Borehole Document or an application like EXCEL to 

the Windows clipboard. It is for example possible to select a Strata Log within a 

Borehole Document and copy and paste its data directly into a Static Table Object. 

You could also select Northing, Easting and TVD channels, resample them while 

copying the data to the clipboard (e.g. getting values every 10m) and paste them into 

the table object. 

If you have data waiting in the Windows Clipboard to be pasted select the Paste 

option from the flying menu. To import data columns from an ASCII file (*.ASC, 

*.TXT or *.CSV) select Import. In any case the Static Table Text Import dialog 

box pops up.


Dialog box to handle the import of column delimited ASCII data into table object. 

Column delimiter: 

Select the delimiter separating the data columns from each other. 

Skip lines: 

To skip lines preceding the data you would like to import, enter a number in the 

corresponding text field. 

Titles: 

Specify if there are titles and units that must be retained using the Next line is titles 

and Following line is units controls. If no titles are imported WellCAD will use 

default titles (Col1, Col2, Col3,…). 

The number of columns within the static table will be automatically set to the 

number of imported data columns. 

Hiding the header/trailer display 

In order to hide the appearance of the entire header and trailer section you can 

uncheck the View > Header option (CTRL+SHIFT+E). This option is also useful 

to prevent the header/trailer from being printed or exported as graphic file. Please 

note that no header/footer is shown when the Borehole Document is displayed in 

Draft mode (see 1.2.3.2 Draft Mode).


1.4.4 Templates 

1.4.4.1 Creating a template 

www.alt.lu 

A WellCAD Document Template file (*.WDT) stores the entire layout of a 

Borehole Document – this includes the header and footer as well as all logs (title, 

position, formulas, lithology libraries, classifications, contact styles and display 

settings). What is not saved in a template file is data. 

If the CoreCAD & Wellsite module is used the *.WDT template file is able to store 

the entire setup of the CoreCAD workspace as well. 

In general, templates can be used in two different ways: 

� Creating a new Borehole Document based on a template and adding the 

data to existing log columns afterwards. 

� Loading the data first and applying a template to quickly arrange the log 

columns and get a printable Borehole Document. 

The first way might be the preferred way for those using CoreCAD or users who 

want to generate large composite log charts. The second way might be useful for 

those who want to arrange the data imported from a single file (e.g. importing a LAS 

file, applying a template to arrange the layout and printing the result on a routine 

basis) quickly. Both ways of template application can be combined and loading and 

applying a template to an existing Borehole Document is possible at all time. 

In any case a template file must have been created before. 

A template is created from an existing Borehole Document. Creation of the first 

template usually starts with a Blank Borehole Document (File > New). Afterwards 

the logs are inserted via file import or as empty logs from the Edit > Insert New 

Log menu. The logs are positioned and their presentation styles are set. 

Classifications, symbol libraries and contact dictionaries are loaded. Once the desired 

layout of the Borehole Document has been achieved, a template can be saved. To 

do so: 

� Click on Save Template in the View menu. 

� The file Save As dialog box opens. Enter a file name and click OK. 

The document template file is saved with an *.WDT extension. Older versions of 

WellCAD supported a different kind of template file, the layout template. Layout 

templates were saved with an *.WCT extension and can still be saved and loaded for 

compatibility reasons only. We recommend not using the layout templates (*.WCL) 

anymore and save document templates (*.WDT) instead.


1.4.4.2 Using a Template to create a new Borehole Document 

You can start your work to generate a log chart using a new Borehole Document 

that already contains the chart’s framework. The framework includes empty logs, 

header/trailer and the preferred layout. Data can be inserted into this framework 

either interactively – e.g. when describing a core – or it can be loaded from files. The 

corresponding data columns can be merged one by one. 

To create a new Borehole Document based on a template: 

� Open WellCAD 

Document 

templates 

Current directory 

containing document 

templates 

� Click the New (CTRL + N) option from the File menu. The New 

document dialog box will appear. 

New document dialog box provides access to document templates. 

The Type of new document ... window shows the default entries Blank Borehole 

document and Blank Field document followed by a list of document templates 

which can be used to create a new Borehole Document. The document templates 

are taken from the folder that is displayed in the Template directory field. To 

change the location, click the Browse button. The Type of new document ... list 

will be refreshed. 

If you select a document template and click the OK button a new Borehole 

Document will be created with a chart framework setup according to the 

information derived from the document template. As no data exists in the new 

Borehole Document no depth information is available. Usually the vertical extension 

of a document is derived from the maximum depth range that the data contained in


www.alt.lu 

the document covers. Nevertheless, even without data, the Depth range option in 

the New document dialog box allows to set the range of a visible depth interval. If 

the Borehole Document has already been created and you want to change the visible 

depth range, click the Depth range option from the View menu or simply press 

CTRL + R. 

The next step would be to populate each log of the document with data. This can be 

done interactively using the data edition methods explained for each log in 

“Appendix A” or in “1.5 Working with Logs”. 

If data is imported from files you should use the File > Import Into Current 

Document otherwise a new borehole document will be created. The automated 

merging of data columns only works if log types and log title of existing and 

incoming logs are the same. If you have to copy logs between documents and merge 

logs you can do the following: 

� Select the log(s) you want to copy. 

� Click the Copy option from the Edit menu ( , CTRL+C). 

� Activate the document containing the chart framework and click Paste 

option from the Edit menu ( ,, CTRL+V). 

You could also “Cut’n Paste” or “Drag’n Drop” the logs (see 1.3.2.10 Cut, Copy 

and Paste Logs). 

To transfer the data from the copied logs into the corresponding log columns 

derived from the template: 

� Select the target log (that is the log within the chart framework). 

� Press the CTRL key and select the source log (that is the one containing 

the data) next. 

� Right click on one of the selected log handles. 

� From the Flying Menu select the Merge option. The Merge Logs dialog 

pops up. (If this option is not available ensure the two selected logs are of 

the same type.) 

� Do not check the Output as a new log option and click OK. All data will 

be transferred into the target log and the source log will be removed from 

the document.

Enabled when data 

overlap must be handled 

Force creation of new log 

with data sets combined 

For overlapping area use: 


Merge Logs dialog box 

The merge option in general allows combining the data of two logs (e.g. the data sets 

of two logging runs covering different depth intervals). Three options are provided 

if the depth ranges of the logs overlap. The data of Log 1 could be used in the 

overlapping area, the data of Log 2 could be used or average values from Log 1 and 

Log 2 could be inserted. If no overlap can be detected this option is grayed. 

Merge options: 

If the Output as a new log is not checked, all data will be transferred from Log 2 

to Log 1 if Log 1 has been selected first and Log 2 selected afterwards. Therefore 

the order of log selection is important. Log2 will automatically be removed from the 

document. 

If the Output as a new log is checked a new log will be created hosting the new 

combined data set. Log 1 and Log 2 will stay unchanged. 

Since WellCAD v4.3 it is also possible to import data files or entire WellCAD 

documents (WCL files) into an active borehole document. Details about this feature 

have already been explained in chapter 1.4.2 Data Import. During the import you 

can decide to create a set of new logs or to merge data automatically where log type 

and log title are the same. 

1.4.4.3 Applying a Template to an existing Borehole Document 

This method of applying a template rearranges the layout of an existing document 

and adds additional logs if the user wants to. Unlike for the creation of a new 

Borehole Document from a template, header and footer forms are not loaded from 

the template and stay unchanged.


www.alt.lu 

Do as described below to apply a template to an existing document: 

� With your document open select the Apply Template option from the 

View menu. 

� Use the file Open dialog box to find and load the desired document 

template file (*.WDT). 

� The Template dialog box pops up. Make the selection according to your 

needs and click OK. 

Template dialog box 

Replace header and trailer from template: 

If you want to copy the header / trailer from your template to the current borehole 

document replacing the existing header and trailer, check this option. If your 

incoming header / trailer contains dynamic text objects and the titles match those of 

the existing header the data will be copied to the new header / trailer. 

Add new logs from template: 

The number of logs contained in the template file might differ from the number of 

logs that can be arranged in the in the Borehole Document. E.g. a LAS file 

containing a Caliper, Gamma Ray and Transit Time channels was imported. The 

template contains a Lithology column and Formula Logs in addition to Caliper,


Gamma Ray and Transit Time. If the Add new logs from template is checked the 

new layout will be applied to Caliper, Gamma Ray and Transit Time channels, a new 

Lithology Log will be created according to the template information and the new 

Formula Logs will be created as well. If the formula logs use Caliper, Gamma Ray or 

Transit Time as source logs data values will be computed automatically. 

If the Add new logs from template option stays unchecked, the new logs are not 

created and gaps occur in the Borehole Document where the new logs would have 

been placed. 

Add new annotation layers from template: 

Whether an annotation layer is created from a template or not depends on the Add 

new annotation layers from template settings. If the option is checked annotation 

layers are created according to the information provided by the template (see also 

1.6 Annotations). 

Apply display settings to annotations: 

Each annotation layer stores a set of default presentation settings for the annotation 

and engineering symbols. To apply these defaults to an existing annotation layer 

when loading a template the Apply display settings to annotations option must 

be checked. 

Keep existing charts in the document: 

If you have cross-plot charts stored within your current document, you can decide 

whether they will be overwritten with the information coming from the template 

(option not checked) or not (option checked). 

Add new charts from template: 

If you want to add cross-plots stored within the template to your current borehole 

document check this option. 

The display settings of a particular log stored in the template can only be applied to 

a log in the Borehole Document if the log type and the log titles are the same. Each 

log found in the document will be compared to the logs of the same type contained 

in the template. If the titles match the new display style will be applied. If not, the 

following dialog box pops up.


www.alt.lu 

The user will be informed that one or more logs (listed in the left column), which 

exists in the current Borehole Document, could not be found in the template. The 

user can select an alternative log from the template by clicking into the 

corresponding cell in the Log (Template) column. 

Template Alias Table: 

For a general explanation about the use of Alias Templates see the chapter 1.4.2 

Data Import. Below are the options provided in Template dialog box with respect 

to the application of Alias Tables. 

Keep existing log name – The alias table will be applied in the background to match 

current log title and expected name from the template. But current log titles will not 

be overwritten. 

Change log name to the name from the template – If the current log title appears in the alias 

list or corresponds to the expected name it will be set to the name used by the 

template. 

Change log name to the name from the alias table – If the current log title appears in the 

alias list it will be set to the expected name after the template has been applied. 

1.4.4.4 Editing a Document Template 

Already existing Borehole Document Templates can be edited in two ways. You can 

follow the steps to create a new template – loading data, applying the existing 

template, modifying the layout and saving a new template – or you can load the 

WDT file into the WellCAD workspace using the File > Open command. The 

WDT file opened will behave exactly like a Borehole Document. New logs can be 

created, the layout changed and even data can be imported. The only limitation is 

that you cannot save a template (View > Save Template) with the same name.

1.4.5 Data Export 


WellCAD provides a graphical display of the digital data stored within a Borehole 

Document. When exporting data the user has to distinguish between exporting the 

graphical presentation as a picture and exporting the digital data belonging to each 

log in ASCII or binary format. The user has to decide further whether to export 

different data channels merged into a single file (e.g. LAS or LIS) or to create a 

single file for each data channel. 

Export of graphics 

Export of log data 

WellCAD: 

Data & Graphics 

Graphic and data files can be exported 

The following paragraphs will concentrate on exporting a picture of the log chart 

and on how to create LAS and composite/individual ASCII (WA*, TXT, CSV, 

ASC) files.


1.4.5.1 Exporting a picture of the Graphical Presentation 

www.alt.lu 

Creating a file containing a picture of the log chart can be accomplished in two ways. 

To create a picture file you can export in one of the following formats: 

� Windows Bitmap (*.BMP), 

� JPEG File ( *.JPG), 

� Graphics Interchange Format File (*.GIF), 

� Tag Image File (*.TIF), 

� Portable Network Graphics File (*.PNG), 

� Windows Enhanced Meta File (*.EMF) or 

� CGM File (*.CGM). 

To do so: 

� Ensure that no log is selected. 

� Go to the File >Export >Single File menu. 

� Select the desired file format and extension. 

In any case the user will be prompted to enter the depth interval over which the 

picture will be generated. It is also possible to select the resolution for the image. 

The user can choose from screen, 72, 144, 300, 600 and 1200 dpi. With increased 

resolution more memory will be consumed to generate the image. 

The CGM file export algorithm is based on the Larson EMF to CGM converter. To 

view and print CGM files a free tool can be downloaded from the Larson homepage 

(www.cgmlarson.com). By default CGM files are exported using the PIP – 

Petroleum Industry Profile. 

One can also use the Windows clipboard as a buffer for a picture of the log chart 

before pasting it into the target application. To copy the graphic presentation to the 

clipboard: 

� Ensure no log is selected. 

� Go to the Edit menu and select Copy (or press CTRL+C ). 

� Activate the target application – the application you want to paste the 

image to – and select Paste (or press CTRL+V). 

� Depending on the application you are pasting to you will be prompted for 

the depth interval and resolution to export.

1.4.5.2 Generating a LAS File 


WellCAD can save data in Log ASCII Standard (LAS) version 2.0 and 3.0. Ensure 

no log is selected. Depending on which version of the LAS format will be generated 

only Well Logs can be exported (LAS v2.0) or a variety of logs like Well, Mud, 

Litho, Comment, Structure and Interval Logs can be exported (LAS v3.0). 


� In the file export dialog box select LAS Files (*.LAS) as file type. 

� The LAS Export dialog box will open. 

LAS file export options 

The export options dialog box allows selecting from the list of Logs those who will 

be exported into the LAS file. Depending on the selected LAS version more or less 

log types are supported. To provide a certain order of data channels in the file 

deselect all logs in the Logs To Export list and select them in the order they should 

be exported. 

To export data of a limited depth range only, specify the upper and lower limit in the 

Depth Interval fields. For a LAS 3 export also the column delimiter can be set. 

When exporting into LAS 2, the Well Logs selected for export might differ in their 

sampling rate. As all data channels within the LAS file are required to use the same 

sampling rate (“STEP” entry in the “~WELL INFORMATION” block of the LAS 

header) the possibility to set a common sampling interval for the Well Log data is 

given in the Sampling Rate field. 

When exporting LAS 3 each log will be exported into its own Data Section Set. E.g. 

Well, Mud, Analysis, Image or Structure Logs will be exported into Log Data 

Sections. Lithology, CoreDesc, Comment, Marker, Strata or Interval Logs will use 

the Top Data Sections as its format complies very well with all the interval data 

types in WellCAD.


www.alt.lu 

In the Options field the user can select whether the information contained in the 

WellCAD header should be transferred to the LAS file “~PARAMETER 

INFORMATION” section or not. Independent if the Export Header Info option 

is set or not, the export algorithm will try to fill the “~WELL INFORMATION” 

block of the LAS header automatically. In order to match WellCAD header words to 

the labels used in the “~WELL INFORMATION” block click the button next 

to the Export Header Info string. An editor window will open allowing to choose from 

the WellCAD header words (click into the corresponding cell in the Header Field 

column). The mnemonics shown in the Name column are the default entries for the 

LAS header described by the Canadian Well Logging Society. 

If more than five data channels are selected the data for each sample point will be 

written on multiple lines – also known as Wrap mode. This behavior can be enabled 

or disabled with the Enable Wrap option. 

For a full description of the LAS format please visit the homepage of the Canadian 

Well Logging Society (CWLS) www.cwls.org. 

1.4.5.3 Exporting Data in ASCII Format 

Exporting data in ASCII format implies writing the data column delimited into an 

ASCII file. The different extensions – TXT, CSV, ASC and WA*- refer to different 

column delimiters used (e.g. TXT files are comma or Tab separated, CSV, ASC and 

WA* use a comma) or a slight difference may exist in the data layout. An ASC files 

contains an additional blank line after title and unit line. The WellCAD ASCII 

(WA*) is a native WellCAD format. The third letter in the file extension refers to a 

particular log type and will automatically be recognized when imported into 

WellCAD – which means the log type will automatically be chosen. 

To export one particular data channel (the data of a single log): 

� Select the log that should be exported. 


� In the File Export dialog box two file types are offered. Select either the 

TXT or WA* file type. Besides the file extension there will be no 

difference in the file format. The advantage of the WA* format is that the 

log type will automatically be chosen when importing the data. Importing a 

TXT file requires the Text File Import Wizard to be run. 

To export multiple logs into separate WA* files:


� Select the logs that should be exported even if they are not of the same log 

type. 

� Go to the File >Export >Multiple Files menu. 

� The File Export dialog opens. Do not set any file type or name. Simply 

click OK. 

One WA* will be created for each selected log. The file name will be the same as the 

log title. 

The format of the files created with one of the above methods is the same as shown 

in the Tabular Editor of WellCAD when the corresponding data channel is opened 

there (see 1.3.2.14 The Tabular Editor). The same format is required when 

importing an ASCII file into WellCAD. 

To export multiple logs in a single file: 

� Have no or more than one log selected. 


� Choose either *.TXT, *.ASC or *.CSV as file type and provide a file 

name. 

� Click on OK and the Text File Export dialog box opens. 

Text file export options 

The Log Selection list shows all logs that can be combined and exported in a single 

ASCII file. A selection of logs can be made from the list.


1.4.6 Printing 

1.4.6.1 Print Setup 

www.alt.lu 

The Depth section provides the option to limit the depth interval from which the 

data will be exported. Additionally, if a Depth Column Log that can be used as 

Depth Scale (see 1.7.2 Handling Different Depth Systems) is contained in the 

Borehole Document, one can select this Depth Column Log from the System drop 

down list to export the data using a different depth system. If the master depth axis 

corresponds to Measured Depth (MD) and a Depth Column Log with True Vertical 

Depth (TVD) information exists the user would have the choice to export the 

selected data channels with reference to MD or TVD. 

Two Export Modes are available. The user can export all data channels using the 

same constant sampling rate or the values can be read and exported from distinct 

depth locations, which are provided by a reference log. E.g. core permeability values 

have been determined from plug samples. The values are stored in a Mud Log with 

the depth values corresponding to the plug positions. Gamma Ray and Density 

values are available from a wireline logging run. To create a file with Gamma Ray 

and Density values at the plug positions the Permeability log can be used as 

reference log providing the corresponding depth values. All logs handling point data 

(Well- , Mud-, Percentage-, Analysis- and Depth Logs) can be used. 

To summarize the different ASCII data export options we look at a Lithology Log. 

Selecting the log and using the File > Export> Single File option will allow the 

user to generate a TXT or WAL file of the following format: 

Top Depth, Bottom Depth, Pattern Code, Hardness, Top 

contact, Bottom contact 

If the Lithology Log has not been selected and the File > Export> Single File 

option is used the user can export a TXT file using a constant depth sampling rate. 

The lithology would be exported in the following format: 

Depth, Pattern Code 

If a reference log is used to provide the depth positions the exported data will be of 

the format Depth, Pattern Code as well. 

Before printing you should ensure that an appropriate Windows Printer Driver is 

installed on your computer and that the correct driver has been set up for your 

printer. 

Printer Setup options depend upon your operating system. In any case you should 

be able to select your printer from a list and set printer specific properties. If you

1.4.6.2 Page Setup 


want to create PDF files the corresponding driver to create the file (e.g. Adobe 

Acrobat) should be shown in the printer list. 

You can access the print setup options from the File menu. 

Windows XP Style Print Setup dialog box 

We advise to select a printer before setting up the Borehole Document for printing 

as different printers may have diverse printable areas. 

To open the Borehole Page Settings dialog box choose the Page Settings option 

from the File menu. 

Setting up the Borehole Document for printing. 

In the Document Size section you can control the width of the Borehole 

Document (which is the width of the log chart). Margins must be added separately 

(see below). When changing the Width all logs in the Borehole Document will be


www.alt.lu 

Set the depth intervals to be 

printed. 

proportionally adjusted to accommodate the new document width. In principle two 

different approaches to create a log chart can be distinguished: You can arrange the 

logs in the document using relative measures for the log column position, which is 

setting the left and right border of each log in percent. The final document width is 

set as a last step. Or, the you can set the final document width first and uses absolute 

measures (millimeter or inches) to position the logs inside the frame. Attention, the 

document width might change automatically if logs are automatically arranged sideby-side 

using the Layout Toolbar (see 1.3.2.5 Layout Toolbar). 

The Height of the document is automatically determined and is the sum of Header, 

Log Chart and Trailer. Margins, as set below, are not included. 

The Options section allows control on whether the document header/trailer section 

will be printed and if the log title section will be output at top or bottom of the 

printout. A change of these settings will be reflected on screen if the Borehole 

Document is displayed in Presentation mode. The user could also use the View > 

Header and View > Titles options to achieve the same result. To print the log 

titles on each page during Sheet printing select the corresponding options. 

In order to print selected depth intervals the user can choose the User Defined 

option in the Depth Range field. Click into the from and to cells and type in the 

desired depth values limiting the printed intervals. The printout will show a bar 

across the printout indicating the gap between depth intervals. Note, the height of 

the bar does not correspond to the true depth scale used to display the log data – it 

is a non-scaled gap. Anyway, the height of the bar is set in tenth of millimeters and 

can be changed in the WellCAD.ini file. Simply add or change the GapHeight 

parameter in the [Print]section. The text ”Unscaled Gap” will be shown by 

default. To avoid showing the label set the GapText parameter in the WellCAD.ini 

to “FALSE”. 

Print Preview with titles printed on top and bottom. Two depth intervals are output separated by a “non scaled 

gap”.

1.4.6.3 Print Preview and Print 


Click on the Margins button to add a blank border to your document. Note that 

your printer might add another default printer margin. Changing the margin width 

does not influence the width of your Borehole Document (Frame Width). 

Margin Settings dialog box. 

If you want to print on continuous paper (e.g. fanfold or roll paper) you must check 

the Fanfold option in the Paper section independent what settings you have set for 

the printer driver. In order to print page wise, select the Sheet option. Only when 

printing page by page the position of the page numbering can be set. 

Before sending your document to the printer you can use the Print Preview option 

from the File menu (or press the icon) to get an impression on how the final 

printout would look like. If you get the warning that your document is outside the 

printable area check that Frame Width plus Margins lay within the printable area. 

This area might be smaller than the actual paper size because your printer might 

require and add a default margin. 

To commence printing choose the Print option from the File menu. A dialog box 

will allow to set-up a printer. Again, we recommend to set-up the printer prior to 

setting up the Borehole Document. Click the icon on the tool bar to start 

printing immediately using the selected printer.


1.5 Working with Logs 

The previous chapters discussed how to import data and arrange the log columns to 

get a printable log chart. We also learned that each log displayed on screen hosts 

numerical data. This chapter will explain how this data can be used in formulas and 

processes to derive new data columns. The creation of lithology and stratigraphic 

columns will be explained as well. 

1.5.1 Formula Parser 

www.alt.lu 

Text box to compose the 

formula. 

Logs available to be used in 

formula. 

The Formula Parser enables you to build and manage your own algorithms to 

correct, compensate or interpret Well Log data. Data from multiple Well Logs can 

be used in combination with constants and functions to compute new data, which is 

stored in a so-called Formula Log. The Formula Log is a special kind of Well Log, 

dynamically recalculated each time the formula or its source data changes. Formulas 

are saved as part of the Document Template and come up as Formula Log if the 

template is loaded. 

To start the Formula Parser click the icon or insert a new Formula Log from 

the Edit > Insert New Log menu. 

Functions available to be used 

in formula. 

Info box providing short 

explanations. 

Formula Parser Dialog Box: Allows creation of own formulas 

Constants, Operators, Logs and Functions are the key elements a formula is made 

of.


Constants 

A constant is any fixed number, e.g. 1, 3.1415 or –18.5238. 

Operators 

Legal operators, in the order of precedence, are: 

^ exponent e.g. 2 ^ 3 = 8 

/ divide e.g. 2 / 3 = 0.666667 

* times e.g. 2 * 3 = 6 

- minus e.g. 2 – 3 = -1 

+ plus e.g. 2 + 3 = 5 

The operator precedence order may be modified using parenthesis. 

Logs 

Well Log or Formula Log data can be referred to into a formula by enclosing their 

log title exactly as it appears in the log handle in brackets. E.g. {GR} – {Grmin} 

subtracts data from the log Grmin from the log GR. 

The Formula Parser provides a special built-in data column referred to by 

{DEPTH}, which returns the current depth. 

When a formula is applied to a log the log’s depth sampling rate is used to retrieve 

the data values and output the result in a Formula Log. If more than one log with 

different sampling rates are involved, the minimum sample interval will be taken. 

Functions 

A list of all functions available is given in Appendix D. 

While composing a formula a short explanation about syntax and use of the formula 

is given in the Formula Parser dialog box. 

The use of the Formula Parser is best explained looking at the simplified example of 

computing the density-based porosity in a shaly limestone context given by 

� 

RHOB 

� 

� 

RHO 

� 

� 

� RHO 

ma 

ma 

� RHOB � � 

� � �V 

� RHO � � 

f � � 

sh 

� 

� 

RHO 

� 

� 

� RHO 

ma 

ma 

� RHO 

� RHO 

sh 

f 

�� 

�� 

�� 

��


www.alt.lu 

where: 

ΦRHOB = porosity from density log (pu) 

RHOma = matrix density (gr/ccm) 

RHOB = log density (gr/ccm) 

RHOf = density of pore fluid (gr/ccm) 

RHOsh = shale density (gr/ccm) 

Vsh = shale volume which is given through: 

V sh 

where: 

� � � 

� 

� � � � 0. 

33 2 

� 

� 

GRlog 

�GRmin 

� 

2� 

� 

� 

�1 

GRmax 

�GRmin 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 

GRlog = gamma ray log (observed values) 

GRmax = maximum gamma ray reading (shale response) 

GRmin = minimum gamma ray reading (clean formation) 

The task is best completed in two steps. The shale volume is calculated first and 

porosity is computed in a second step referring to the Vsh results. 

Assuming that the Well Logs named GR and RHOB are contained in our Borehole 

Document the following formula must me typed in to calculate the shale volume: 

0.33 * 2^(2*( ({GR}-Min({GR}) / (Max({GR})-Min({GR})) ) ) -1) 

The functions Min() and Max() as well as the reference to the GR log {GR} can 

easily be inserted into the formula with a double click on the corresponding item in 

the Logs respectively Functions list. Enter Vsh as name for the resulting Formula 

Log into the Log Title box.

Formula for Vsh 


Formula Parser Dialog Box with Vsh formula created 

Click OK to create a new Formula Log named Vsh containing the computed values. 

Next we compose the formula for the porosity. We assume that RHOf = 1, 

RHOma=2.71 and RHOsh = 2.65. The following formula must be entered: 

( (2.71 – {RHOB}) / (2.71 – 1) ) – {Vsh} * ( (2.71 – 2.65) / (2.71 – 1) ) 

Note that the formula includes the formerly computed Formula Log Vsh. Name the 

log PHI and click on OK to create a new Formula Log. 

Source logs track 1 and 2 and the computed curves in track 4 and 5


www.alt.lu 

To get access to the formula of a Formula Log again: 

� Right Click on the log handle. 

� From the pop up menu select Settings > Formula. 

� The Formula Parser dialog box opens again. 

If you want to save your formula simply click the Store button. To recall a saved 

formula use the Browse button. If you have your formulas stored in another than 

the Formula.ini file the popping up dialog allows you to load your formulas from 

another source (*.ini file). 

Formula preview 

List of formulas contained in 

*.ini file 

Currently chosen source of 

formulas 

Dialog box to select and load a formula. 

1.5.2 Lithology Columns 

When reading chapter 1.3.1 Log Types and Their Characteristics you were 

introduced to log types handling symbols and patterns in their data display: 

Lithology -, Analysis-, Percentage-, Stratigraphic- and CoreDesc Logs. The symbols 

and patterns used in these log types can express lithology, accessories, sedimentary 

structures, qualifiers or fossils – just to name a few of them.

Code recorded as data, it refers to 

a symbol or pattern. 


Examples of log types dealing with symbols and patterns: Litho Log (repeated patterns), Litho Log (nonrepeated 

patterns), CoreDesc Log and Analysis Log 

All of these logs have in common that they do not store the actual pattern or symbol 

as data but an alphanumeric code. 

Sample of Lithology Log data. A code refers to a lithology pattern. 

This code is used to find a certain symbol or pattern in a separate library and display 

it on screen. The log types mentioned above have always one, and only one, pattern 

library attached, which is stored together with the log’s data. If necessary, a new 

library can be loaded using the log’s Main Settings. Doing so, the user must be aware 

that the already stored symbol codes might become meaning less afterwards as they 

do not refer to a valid pattern anymore. 

The pattern libraries, also referred to as litho dictionaries, can be created in 

LithCAD, a special pattern editor application that is usually installed together with 

WellCAD. Library files carry the extension *.LTH. LithCAD provides all tools 

necessary to design and build customized lithology patterns and to store and 

organize them in libraries. Each pattern within a library is uniquely identified


1.5.3 Using Contact Styles 

www.alt.lu 

through an alphanumeric code set by the user. In addition, a description can be 

given to each pattern. For more details about LithCAD please refer to the LithCAD 

User’s Guide. The Dictionaries folder in the WellCAD installation directory usually 

contains numerous predefined library files (*.LTH) that can be loaded into Lithology 

Logs. 

One has to distinguish between repeated patterns and non-repeated symbols. 

Repeated pattern (left) and non- repeated symbol (right) 

Repeated patterns use a generic cell, which is repeated as long as a region or box is 

completely covered. A non-repeated symbol is displayed once at a distinct position. 

Both types can be designed in LithCAD, stored in .LTH library files and displayed in 

the litho log types. Most of the time repeated patterns are used to show lithology or 

sedimentary structures, but can also be used to express rock color or chrono 

stratigraphic data. Non-repeated symbols are mostly used as qualifiers, accessories, 

fossils, etc.. The Lithology, Analysis, Percentage and Stratigraphic Log types are 

normally used with repeated patterns. A CoreDesc Log is used with non-repeated 

symbols. 

To learn how to insert new lithology logs and insert patterns and symbols please 

refer to the corresponding paragraphs in Appendix A. 

The top and bottom boundaries of lithology beds and boxes of the stratigraphic log 

are graphically presented as straight lines. To present the box limits in a more 

significant manner to reflect i.e. a certain contact type between lithology beds, 

major/minor tops or unconformities a Contact Dictionary can be designed or 

loaded from a file (*.CDT).


Example of different contacts between lithology beds 

Contact styles are organized in libraries (dictionaries) and referred to by a code 

similar to lithology patterns. The user can set up its own library or load an already 

existing library file (*.CTD). 

Enter the library name 

� Click the Define button in the Contact Dictionary field of the Main 

Settings dialog box for Lithology or Stratigraphic Logs. 

� The Contact Dictionary dialog box will open. 

Click to add new contact 

Contact Dictionary dialog box 

Click to load existing library 

(*.CTD) file. 

� Enter a name for your new dictionary into the Dictionary Name text box. 

� Click on the Add button to create a new contact and add it to the 

Contacts list. 

� Select the new contact (click on it) and press the Settings button to open 

the Contact Settings dialog box.


www.alt.lu 

Set contact appearance details 

Contact Settings dialog box 

Name: 

Set an alphanumeric code that identifies your contact style uniquely. This code will 

be saved as part of the log data. 

Description: 

You can set a descriptive text for your contact that will appear in the Contacts list 

of previous dialog box. 

Color: 

Select a color for your contact style from the drop down list. 

Style: 

Select one of the 24 different line styles that you would like to use. Please note that 

the very first option in the drop down list displays no line. It can be used to create a 

“no contact” style. 

Width: 

Set the thickness of the contact line. 

Cross Document: 

Specify if the contact line should be drawn across the entire Borehole Document or 

not. 

Back in the Contact Dictionary dialog box the user can press the Save As button 

to store the contact style information in a file. Contact dictionary files carry the 

extension *.CTD. Use the Load button to retrieve already saved information.


Contact Dictionary dialog boxes showing different libraries for bedding and stratigraphic contacts 

As contact styles may or may not cross the entire borehole document, the Base Settings of 

each log allows hiding the display of contacts in the log track. 

1.5.4 Color Palette Design 

Some log types (Image, FWS, VSP, Well, 

Mud and Interval Logs) display their data 

using a pre defined color palette. You can 

design these palettes on your own. 

If data is displayed in color variable density 

(Color vdl) mode, the color palette used can 

be loaded or designed by you. Click the 

Palette button to open the Palette Editor 

in the Main Settings of the log or click the 

in the tool bar. 

When designing a new color palette you can 

decide whether to assign the colors to the 

Data Limits (i.e. the low and high scale 

values defined for the log) or to the bin number of the palette (1 to 64). To create a 

new palette: 

� Within the color Palette Editor click on Clear. This will remove all the 

current entries from the palette bar. Next select a color from the list that 

you wish to use.


www.alt.lu 

� Move the mouse pointer into the palette bar, hold down the SHIFT key 

and click on it. You can tie the color to a specific value (absolute value of 

the log or bin number) by entering the “position” into the edit box next to 

the Use Data Limit string. Please note that when changing the low/high 

scale values of your log the palette limits are updated automatically. 

� When placing your cursor on a color slot in the palette the cursor changes 

to a double sided arrow. Left click to select the color slot. You can change 

the assigned position in the edit box or you can drag (hold down the left 

mouse button) the color to a new position. 

� To delete an entry simply hold down the CTRL key and left click onto the 

color slot you want to remove. 

� Repeat the steps to create a full color spectrum. 

The palette bar can hold up to 64 different colors (slot 1 to 64). Not all slots have to 

be filled. Color values will be interpolated between slots filled by the user. 

Click the Store button to save your palette design in the Palette.ini file (or any other 

*.ini file that contains your palettes). 

To reload a palette click the 

Browse button and select a 

palette from the drop down list. 

You can also specify the source 

file containing all the palette 

designs and select the desired 

palette from the Palette list. The 

*.ini file specified under Palettes 

File is used for storing your own Load and existing palette design from the specified *.ini file 

design as well. 

You can design your color palette directly in the *.ini file. If you open e.g. the 

Palette.ini file you will find entries of the following format: 

Palette1=0,0,0,128,32,128,0,0,63,255,255,0 

Palette2=0,0,0,0,63,218,218,218 

Each palette is defined through the slot number (zero based index) and three values 

giving the Red, Green and Blue intensity. E.g. a palette reaching from red to blue 

would be defined as follows: 

Palette#=0,255,0,0,63,0,0,255

1.5.5 Setting up Classifications 


Classification allows the subdivision of a logs data range into separate intervals 

(classes). Each class is defined by a name (class name) and a high and low cut off 

value. Vertical grid lines are drawn according to the classification settings. The log 

handle shows the class names. Classification has no effect on the data. 

Classification shown in log handle 

and vertical grid 

It might be necessary to extend the vertical size of the log handle to fully display the 

class names. The displayed class names are part of the log handle Properties area. 

Font size and style for the Properties can be modified in the Log title settings dialog 

box. 

Classification is available for Well (and Formula) logs, Mud logs and Interval logs 

only. 

To add classification to a log: 

� Click the Define button to open the Classifier Dictionary dialog box. 

� To load an existing classification template click the Load… button. 

If no classification template has been loaded, you will start with an empty list.


www.alt.lu 

� Type the title of your template into the Dictionary Name box at the top of the 

dialog box. 

� Next click the Add button or right click into the name column of the Classifiers 

list control and select Insert row after from the popup menu. 

� Click on the new name, low or high value just inserted to edit the values. 

� Proceed inserting new rows using the right click menu or Add button. 

To store your classification template for later use in other logs click on Save as…. 

The file extension for classification template files is *.cct. 

Once finished close the dialog box and ensure the Display classification option 

has been enabled in the Main Settings dialog box to get the classification displayed 

on screen. 

1.5.6 Filtering Logs 

WellCAD allows filtering of Well, Image and FWS Logs in order to remove spikes 

and reduce noise. The filter options for Image and FWS Logs are part of the Image 

Processing and FWS Processing modules. This paragraph will explain the filter 

options available for Well Logs. 

To access the filter for a Well Log: 

� Select the Well Log you want to filter. 

� From the Process > Common menu select the Filter Logs option. (The 

option is available only if a single Well Log has been selected.) 

� The Filter dialog box will pop up. 

Options to filter a single Well Log


The following options are available: 

Filter Width: 

Each filter type uses the data of a user-defined data window to calculate the new 

filtered value. The data point to be filtered is centered in the window. The Filter 

Width is set in number of data points. After processing the center value the filter 

window will be moved one sample and the new center value will be processed. 

Filter Type: 

Three different filter types are available. Choose the Moving Average to compute 

an average value from all the values in the defined filter window and set it as the new 

data, filtered point. The Weighted Average option sets a weighted average value, 

calculated from the filter window, as new data point. If the Median filter will be 

applied the data values within the filter window will be sorted and the median (the 

data point at 50%) will be taken as new data value. 

The following example shows the three filter types applied with 87 being the current 

data point and a filter width of 5. 

Moving Average: 

Weighted Average: 

Median: 

85 � 

90 � 87 �125� 

88 

� 95 

5 

1�85 

� 2� 

90 � 3� 

87 � 2�125 

�1� 

88 

� 96 

9 

Median( 

85, 

87, 

88, 

90, 

125) 

� 88 

Depth Range: 

The data from a selected or the entire depth range of the log can be filtered. 

A new Well Log will be output as result of the filter process, holding the set of 

filtered data values.


1.5.7 Interpolating Log Data 

www.alt.lu 

Some datasets may contain areas with NULL data. WellCAD provides the 

Interpolate Logs process to run a linear interpolation between non-null data points 

and compute missing data. The maximum gap over which the interpolated data is 

calculated can be set by the user. 

Example data showing the interpolation results for different maximum interpolation gaps 

In order to run the process select one or 

more Well or Mud Logs and choose 

Interpolate Logs… from the Process > 

Common menu. The Log Interpolation 

dialog box opens. Only one parameter, the 

maximum allowable gap for the data 

interpolation, can be set. Gaps larger than 

the specified interval will not be processed. 

Maximum gap parameter in Log 

Interpolation dialog box 

1.5.8 Resample Logs 

The sample rate of Well Logs and Image Logs can be altered using the Resample 

Process. Select one or more Well or Image Logs and choose Resample Logs from 

the Process > Common menu. The output of the process is a new log containing 

the filtered data. 

Depending on the log types that have been selected one of the following dialog 

boxes opens.


Dialog box with resample options for Image Logs 

For Image Logs the following options are available: 

Radial Sample: 

Choose a factor to up- or down-sample the Image Log data in radial direction. E.g. 

to double the number of data points select a factor of ½ from the drop down list. 

Interpolated data values will be inserted. To reduce the number of radial data points 

select a factor that is larger than 1. 

Increasing the number of radial data values can be applied before displaying e.g. 4arm 

caliper measurements as 3D Log. 

Depth Sample: 

A reduction of the number of depth samples in the Image Log can be achieved 

when selecting a sample factor larger than 1 from Depth Sample drop down list. 

An up-sample option is not available. 

Dialog box with resample options for Well Logs 

For Well Logs the following options are available:


www.alt.lu 

Resample with a constant sample rate: 

In order to up- or down-sample the data in the selected Well Log(s) enter a new 

sample rate into the corresponding edit box. If necessary interpolated data values 

will be inserted. 

Use sample rate of a reference log: 

Sometimes it might be required to extract data from a Well Log at distinct depth 

locations (e.g. positions where plugs from a core were taken and detailed core 

analysis results are available) and store the results in a new Mud Log. The process 

will create a new Mud Log with depth positions being derived from a reference log. 

The reference can be selected from the corresponding drop down list. Mud or 

Percentage Logs can be chosen. As the requested depth location could fall between 

two samples of a Well Log the user has the option whether to take the nearest value 

or get an interpolated value. 

Well Log to resample 

Reference Log 

Resulting Mud Log 

Reference Log (left) provides the depth positions at which data from the original log (middle) will be extracted 

and saved into new Mud Log (right) 

1.5.9 Creating Blocked Curves 

This process allows calculation of statistical values, such as average, standard 

deviation, minimum and maximum, of Log data for given depth intervals. The 

results are output either as text (Comment Log) or graphics (Interval or Percentage 

Log) depending on the input log type. The intervals of calculation are read from a 

reference log or can be entered by the user. Any log dealing with depth intervals – 

storing a top and a bottom depth as data – can be used as reference log.


Lithology Log (left) and composition for each formation as result of an average computation using the Block 

Process. Results are output as Percentage Log and Comment Log 

To block a log select the Block Process option from the Process > Common 

menu. A dialog box opens and provides options for blocking mode and input 

channels. 

Blocking Process Options


www.alt.lu 

Blocked Log: 

Select the log to be processed from the drop down list. Depending on the log type 

different Blocking Modes become available. 

Block Reference: 

Determine the channel that provides the depth intervals. Any log handling interval 

data – Lithology Logs, Comment Logs, Interval Logs etc. – are listed. You can also 

type in a numerical value indicating a constant depth interval in units of the current 

depth axis. If a Marker Log has been chosen the interval will be set from marker to 

marker. 

Options: 

Two output options exist for the processing results. If a graphical presentation for 

the data has been selected a new Interval or Percentage Log will be created, 

depending on the processed log type. If a text output has been chosen a Comment 

Log will be generated. 

Average Gas content for each lithology bed output as graphic and text 

Blocking Mode: 

Tick the type of statistic value that you would like to compute from your data. 

Depending on the type of the source log the supported modes may vary. For Well, 

Mud and Interval Logs all options become available. For all other log types only the 

Maximum, Minimum and Average option can be selected.


If Well, Mud or Interval Logs have been chosen a new Interval Log will be created 

for the graphical output. For all remaining logs a Percentage Log will be created for 

the graphical output. If a text output has been chosen, a Comment Log will be 

created. The displayed text is usually a combination of the name of the statistical 

parameter and the computed value. 

Please note that the Average for a Lithology log is the output of the composition over 

the computation interval. Thicknesses of equal elements will be summarized and 

expressed in percentage and total thickness. If Maximum or Minimum has been 

selected the type and thickness of the component with the smallest / largest 

cumulative value will be output. 

Where available the Normalized Sum option divides the sum of all data values over 

the reference interval by the interval length. With the Area option selected each data 

value will be multiplied by the sample step and all segments in the reference interval 

added to compute the area under the curve. 

Processing Parameter: 

If the Resolution parameter is not zero a transition zone at the top and bottom of 

each process interval will be created. The width of this zone is ½ of the Resolution 

set. Data points lying in the transition zone are assumed to be affected by the 

neighboring intervals and are excluded from the computation. 

Transition zone 

Interval of calculation 

Values lying in the transition zone (1/2 Resolution) are skipped 

In case no data can be found in the interval of calculation the process either 

interpolates between the nearest values at top and bottom of the interval, the min or 

max of the nearest value is taken or no value is output. The user can select the 

desired behavior from the corresponding drop down list.


1.5.10 Zonation of Logs 

The zonation process is based on Ward´s method 

of hierarchical cluster analysis. The input data 

consists of one or multiple logs that the user 

selects. After standardization of the log data to 

ensure that each data set has equal influence on 

the zonation an iterative process will commence. 

Starting by treating each observation as a single 

zone the Euclidean distances between the 

observations available in each iteration step will be 

calculated. The pair with the closest distance 

difference will be selected as a composite zone and 

treated as a single observation during the following 

iteration step. The iteration continues until the 

user specified number of zones has been reached. 

www.alt.lu 

The example to the right has been created from 

four input logs (Gamma Ray, Density, P Slowness 

and Neutron Porosity) for 5, 10, 20 and 40 zones. 

To start the process select Process > Common 

> Zonation. A dialog box will open allowing to 

specify the input logs (Well Logs) and the number 

of zones to fit. 

Zonation options dialogue

1.5.11 Correcting Data for Borehole Conditions 


Several factors such as borehole size or the presence of casing influence the 

recording of count rates and the amount of registered events. In addition the deadtime 

of the detector system must be taken into account and the counts corrected 

before interpreting / calibrating the data. 

The Common > Process > Borehole Condition Correction process has been 

designed for total gamma and spectral gamma measurements but can also be applied 

to other types of measurements (e.g. to correct density or neutron data). 

Log: Select the log (Well, Mud, Interval or FWS Log) containing the data to be 

corrected. 

Dead Time: The dead-time of a detector is the short period following the detection 

of a count or pulse, during which no other counts can be detected. It is a recovery 

period of the crystal or tube. Knowing the dead-time t of the measurement system 

the corrected count rate N can be computed from the measured count rate n: 

N = n / (1 – nt) 

(see Serra, O. & L., 2004, “Well Logging – Data Acquisition and Applications”, Serra Log) 

Check the Dead Time option and enter the dead time in microseconds if you 

would like to correct your data. 

Correction Factors: Counting rates are attenuated to different degrees by hole-fluid 

and any mud cake, tubing, casing, cement, decentralization of the tool etc. that may 

be present. Correction charts providing factors or equations to compute correction 

values are available from tool manufacturers. In order to apply a series of different 

factors over defined depth intervals you can extend the Correction Factors list 

control:


www.alt.lu 

Right click on a factor column header to open a context menu providing the 

following options: 

Add New Factor – will add a new column to the list. 

Remove Factor – deletes the column from the list. 

Rename Factor – allows setting the column title. 

To enter a correction factor simply set the top and bottom of the depth interval over 

which you would like to apply the correction first (e.g. top and bottom of the cased 

section). You can type in a number or use the key words top and bottom to determine 

the top and bottom of the log automatically. Click in the cell of the factor column. 

The Formula dialog box will open (see 1.5.1 Formula Parser for details on how to 

use the control in the dialog box). In the Formula line enter the factor read from a 

chart or compose a formula using a reference to e.g. a caliper log to compute a 

dynamic correction factor. The equation to be entered could be determined using 

the WellCAD cross-plot module. Plot correction factors against hole size and use 

the regression tool to find a relationship. 

All correction factors – constant or computed – will be multiplied with the raw value 

read from the selected log at the end to determine and output a corrected value. 

As dead-time and correction factors are often tool specific you can store all 

parameters in a configuration file (*.ini) by clicking on the Save button. To reload a 

configuration click the Load button and select the desired *.ini file. 

When opening the Borehole Corrections Dialog box the last parameters used are 

reloaded. 

1.5.12 Computing Well Deviation Data 

The Common > Process > Borehole Deviation menu contains three different 

tools to compute: 

- Borehole Azimuth, RBR (High-Side), and Tilt from magnetometer and 

accelerometer (inclinometer) readings. 

- Easting, Northing and TVD using borehole azimuth and tilt as input 

channels. 

- Closure Distance, Closure Angle and Dog Leg Severity (DLS) from 

borehole azimuth, tilt, Northing and Easting.

Note: 

1.5.12.1 Azimuth and Tilt 


Azimuth is the borehole azimuth, the angle from magnetic north to the horizontal 

projection of the tool (borehole) axis (if we assume that tool axis and borehole axis 

can be seen as parallel). 

RBR is the angle from the high side of the tool (borehole) to the position on the 

tool where the first data point of each scanned circle is recorded. 

Tilt is the inclination of the well measured from the vertical axis (TVD) in degree 

(Tilt = 0� vertical well, Tilt = 90� horizontal well). 

This process uses the magnetometer and accelerometer (inclinometer) data recorded 

by the orientation device to compute an Azimuth, RBR (High-Side) and Tilt 

channel. The input data must be calibrated and with the following units: 

- Magnetometer in [�T] 

- Accelerometer in [g] 

- Inclinometer in [deg] 

Select the Azimuth And Tilt option from the Process > Common > Borehole 

Deviation menu. The following dialog box pops up. 

Set the input channels for azimuth and tilt computation


www.alt.lu 

Magnetometers: 

You can select the input channels for the computation from the corresponding drop 

down lists. WellCAD assumes that the magnetometer data is calibrated in micro 

Tesla units. Ensure the selected components correspond to the required orientation 

of the reference axis system. A sketch of the required axis orientation is given in the 

Axis System field. It is a right-handed system with the z-axis pointing out of the 

borehole (up). 

If the sign of the incoming data must be reversed click the little button to the right 

of the drop down list to toggle the sign. 

Inclinometer / Accelerometer: 

Choose whether the input channels contain Accelerometer or Inclinometer data. 

Next select the input channels and ensure the components correspond to the 

reference axis orientation. WellCAD assumes that the inclinometer data is calibrated 

in degrees. 

Marker position: 

The Marker Position is the angle between the first point of recording and the y-axis. 

If we think about an acoustic televiewer the marker position would be the angle 

between the position on a circle where first measurement was made and the y-axis. 

The Marker Position value is only used for the calculation of the RBR values. 

Tool X 

First Trace 

MP – Marker Position 

Tool Y 

Illustration of tool axis system given by the orientation device and marker position 

For ALT’s FAC, ABI and OBI tools the marker position can be retrieved from the 

tool’s *.TOL file.

1.5.12.2 Easting, Northing and TVD 


Using borehole azimuth and tilt data as input (Well or Mud Logs) one can compute 

coordinates for the north and east direction of the borehole path as well as the true 

vertical depth (TVD). The outputs of this process are Well or Mud Logs containing 

the computed data values. 

The computed data can be visualized in typical well deviation diagrams using the 

Deviation Module for WellCAD. 

Typical display of output channels in Deviation Module for WellCAD 

Select the Northing, Easting And TVD process from the Process > Common > 

Borehole Deviation. The following dialog box will open: 

Easting, Northing, TVD calculation options


www.alt.lu 

Deviation Channels: 

Select the input channels for borehole azimuth and borehole tilt from the 

corresponding drop down lists. Borehole azimuth must be measured clockwise from 

Magnetic or True North in degrees. Tilt is the inclination of the well measured from 

the vertical axis (TVD) in degree (Tilt = 0� vertical well, Tilt = 90� horizontal well). 

Units: 

Choose the units in which the coordinates for Northing, Easting and TVD are 

measured. Possible options are meters and feet. 

TVD: 

The initial value for the TVD channel can be set to the top depth of the input 

channel (Tilt). Tick the Top Depth Of Source Log option. If you want the initial 

value to be zero or any other value, tick the Depth option and enter the desired 

value. 

The process will output a Well Log with the data being MD (measured depth) and 

TVD (calculated). The TVD data can also be output as Depth Column Log. Tick 

the corresponding option in the dialog box. 

Method: 

Choose one of the three algorithms to compute the coordinates: 

Classic Tangential: Coordinates are calculated 

from azimuth and tilt at the current position 

(A). The next point of calculation (B’) is 

reached stepping one sample rate (dL) in the 

direction of the tangent calculated in point A. 

One has to consider that the well path between 

A and B may be curved and an error is made.

Balanced Tangential: Coordinates of point B’ 

are calculated by moving one half of a sample 

rate (dL) along the tangent calculated from 

Azimuth and Tilt at the former position (A) 

and next moving one half of a sample rate into 

the direction calculated from Azimuth and Tilt 

measured at B. 

Radius Of Curvature: The coordinates of B’ 

are calculated by incrementally approaching the 

Azimuth and Tilt angles beginning with the 

values measured at A and ending with the 

values measured at B – it is an integration along 

the well path. 


Detailed information about the algorithm can be found in Walstrom, J.E. et al.: “A 

Comparison of Various Directional Survey Models and an Approach To Model 

Error Analysis”. Journal of Petroleum, Technology 24, August 1972 

Azimuth Correction: 

The value set in the edit box for a magnetic declination correction will be subtracted 

from the incoming azimuth values. Assumed the azimuth channel provides an 

azimuth with respect to magnetic north the computed Northing and Easting 

coordinates use True North as reference. Magnetic declination must be inserted as 

clockwise measured angle from Magnetic North to True North. E.g. let us assume a 

magnetic declination of 10 deg West (sometimes given as –10 degrees). The value 

that must be inserted into the edit box is 10. 

Estimation of uncertainty: 

If you check this option and set the values for the accuracy of the azimuth and tilt 

recordings, two additional Well Logs will be output. The uncertainty at each point 

can be depicted as ellipse, with the most probable value being the mid point of the 

ellipse. The amount of uncertainty is reflected by the size of the ellipse – the 

extension of the long and short axis defining the ellipse. The two Well Logs will 

contain the computed length of the two axis of the error ellipse for each 

measurement point. As the algorithm is based on a probabilistic approach you will 

get less uncertainty the more orientation measurements have been made.


1.5.12.3 Closure Distance, Closure Angle and DLS 

www.alt.lu 

For each depth sample of the Northing and Easting coordinates calculated with the 

former process a Closure Distance (or drift) from the TVD axis and a Closure Angle 

(or Drift Direction) in [deg] can be calculated and output in a Well or Mud Log. 

Units of the Closure Distance values are the same as for Northing and Easting. 

Additionally a channel containing the curvature – also known as Dog Leg Severity – 

is computed. The units are [deg/100ft] or [deg/30m] 

Northing axis 

Easting axis 

Well Path 

Explanation of Closure Angle and Closure Distance for a well path shown in a Bulls Eye view. 

To open the options dialog box and start this process select the Closure Distance, 

Angle And DLS process from the Process > Common > Borehole Deviation 

menu. The following options dialog box opens: 

Options dialog for Closure and DLS calculation


Input Channels: 

Select the appropriate input channels from the drop down lists. Well and Mud Logs 

are listed. 

1.5.13 Spectral Gamma Processing 

Data from spectral gamma tools can either be imported into WellCAD using the 

*.TFD file import, a special file format output by the MATRIX logging system, or 

loaded from an ASCII file. The spectrum data should be imported into a FWS Log 

type in order to allow a spectrum display and support the conversion of counts to 

energy. 

A number of processes have been implemented to work with spectrum data. These 

processes are explained in the following paragraphs and can be accessed from the 

Process > Spectral Gamma menu. 

1.5.13.1 Stack Spectra 

Gamma ray emission is a random process and count rates generally vary about a 

mean value. Counts must be accumulated over a period of time and averaged in 

order to obtain a reasonable estimate of the mean. 

The Stack Spectra process creates a new FWS Log containing at each depth or time 

sample an average spectrum computed from the actual trace, the N/2 traces 

preceding and the N/2 traces succeeding the actual trace. N corresponds to the 

number of stacks and must be entered by the user. The following figure illustrates 

the principle of the Stack Spectra process. 

N / 2 Trace 

. 

. 

. 

Actual Trace N + 1 traces � Average Trace 

. 

. 

. 

N / 2 Trace 

E.g. the process can be applied to a static measurement, where the spectral gamma 

probe was held over a certain time at a constant depth in the center of an enriched 

zone within a calibration pit. The stacking rate should be chosen high enough to


www.alt.lu 

Log containing the 

recorded spectra 

User specified stack rate 

and preview of the 

stacked time / depth 

interval. 

Preview of stacked and 

current trace at scroll bar 

position 

include all traces recorded at this position over the time and to produce an output 

with reduced statistical noise and clear characteristic peaks. 

1.5.13.2 Borehole Condition Corrections 

Stack Spectra dialog box 

Please refer to 1.5.10 for an explanation of the functionality as both processes are 

the same.

1.5.13.3 Drift Correction 

Spectrum a temperature T1 

Spectrum a temperature T2 

Temperature channel 

used to identify and 

compute amount of 

peak shift. 

List of logged in 

stations. 

User picked 

characteristic peaks to 

determine and correct for 

peak shifts. 


Temperature gradients within the crystal or tube may results in peak shifts. The drift 

correction process is a simple algorithm that can be used to correct for this. The idea 

of the process is described in the following figure. 

T1 

T2 

P1 

P1 

The position of up to two characteristic peaks (P1 and P2) at two or more different 

temperaturesare selected by the user. For each trace the amount of shift is calculated 

according to the temperature change. The count data is shifted within the trace 

accordingly. If only a single characteristic peak the entire trace will be shifted, if two 

peaks have been chosen per trace constant shifts are applied for the data before P1 

and after P2. Between the peaks the shift is calculated from original peak position 

and shifts for P1 and after P2. 

P2 

P2 

Drift Correction dialog box 

Calculated shift


1.5.13.4 Total Counts & Statistic 

www.alt.lu 

User selects parameter to 

be determined. 

Statistic values can be 

determined from entire 

trace or user defined 

window. 

1.5.13.5 Process Total Gamma Data 

This process allows extraction of the total count (sum of all values), minimum, 

maximum, mean or median value from the entire trace or a user defined window. 

The output will be a Well Log for each option chosen. 

Spectrum Statistics dialog box showing current trace and extraction window 

Use the scroll bar to scan the spectrum data set specified in Spectrum Log. 

Checking the Channel option will toggle the horizontal axis to display non 

calibrated or calibrated values. 

If you have checked the Total Counts option a cumulated count rate determined 

from the specified range (trace or window) will be output. 

After correcting the raw count rates of a total gamma measurement for borehole 

conditions different from those of the calibration pit (see 1.5.10 ) you can apply the 

calibration and convert e.g. counts into grade of ore. 

Therefore a calibration coefficient (e.g. K-Factor) or a calibration equation (e.g. 

derived from a count rate versus ore grade cross-plot of the calibration pit data) 

must be known.


Log: Select the log containing the corrected count rate. 

K-Factor: Click into the edit box to open the Formula dialog box. Enter a number 

or compose a formula (see 1.5.1 Formula Parser). The factor specified in the 

formula line will be multiplied with the data values of the selected log. In case the 

equation contains a reference to the selected log the final multiplication will be 

skipped. E.g. the equations 2*0.00001028 and 2*0.00001028*{GAMM-Corrected} for 

the sample shown in the dialog box above will give the same result. 

As the calibration coefficients or equations are tool specific you can store the 

information in a configuration file (e.g. same *.ini file used for the borehole 

condition factors). Click the Save button to store the calibration information in the 

*.ini of you choice or use the Load button to reload the information. By default the 

last used parameters are loaded when opening the dialog box. 

1.5.13.6 Process Spectral Gamma Data 

Before the spectral gamma data can be interpreted a calibration model must be set 

up (see 1.5.13.7 Window Based Model). The model contains information about the 

energy windows to be evaluated (stripping factors), conversion factors to be applied 

(e.g. to convert count rates into concentration or weight percent of an element) and 

remarks describing the probe and conditions under which the probe was calibrated. 

Calibration models are saved as a binary file carrying the extension *.SGM (Spectral 

Gamma Model). 

SGM files should be generated and delivered by the tool supplier as the data 

contained is the tool specific master calibration. Once the user opens a model file 

(*.SGM) in the Process Spectral Gamma dialog box, details about model name, 

type of process and remarks are displayed. 

To process a data using an existing model file:


www.alt.lu 

� Select Process Spectral Gamma Data from Process > Common > 

Spectral Gamma. 

� The process tries to reload the last used model file. If it cannot be found 

the user will be informed. 

� The Spectral Gamma Model Processing dialog box will open. 

Log, containing the data 

to process. 

Information about the 

type of model and 

remarks on the 

calibration data. 

SGM model file loaded into Spectral Gamma model Processing dialog 

From the drop down list in the Input section, select the log that contains the data 

you would like to process and use the Load Model button to find another model 

file. 

Currently two types of models, both saved in SGM files, can be processed. Models 

of type Output counts per energy window contain the low and high limits of 

energy windows only and will extract the total counts per energy window and output 

the result in separate Well Logs. You will also get the standard deviation for each 

window. 

If a model of type Spectrum stripping using energy window is contained in the 

SGM file a calibration of the count rates per energy window will be applied 

according to the calibration coefficients stored in the model file. One Well Log will 

be created per calibration model used for the master calibration. The values are 

output in calibrated units (e.g. pCi/g, Bq/g or ppm). If the model was setup to contain 

conversion factors from calibration units into other units (e.g. conversion from 

pCi/g to ppm or %) new Well Logs containing the converted values will be generated 

as well. E.g. a model file created at a KUT calibration pit with three different 

enriched zones of KUT concentrations/decay rates provided in pCi/g will output 

three Well Logs containing K, U and Th concentrations in pCi/g determined from

1.5.13.7 Window Based Model 


the model information and measured data set. For further information about the 

window based model refer to 1.5.13.7 Window Based Model. 

Theory of calibration and computation of elemental content 

The natural spectral gamma tool calibration involves the measuring of the counting 

rates in different enriched zones of a calibration pit. For each zone the 

concentration of radioactive isotope must be known. The counting rates are read out 

of designated energy windows of the recorded spectrum. From the known 

concentrations and measured counting rates a set of calibration coefficients can be 

computed. These are applied later to the counting rates measured in the field to 

determine a concentration of isotopes. 

Calibration: 

The counting rate in window i and when the tool is placed in zone j is called W ij . 

For a KUT (Potassium, Uranium and Thorium) calibration model these counting 

rates are related to the contents of K j , U j , Th j by the linear equations: 

W � a K � bU 

� c Th 

ij 

i 

j 

Where K j , U j , Th j are known (actually it is the concentrations of daughter products 

or isotopes that are known, e.g. K-40, Ra-226 and Th-232) and W ij is measured. 

Assuming 3 enriched zones and 3 energy windows we will get 9 coefficients a i , b i 

,c i which can be computed from the 3 equations system: 

Wi1 ai 

K1 

� biU1 

� ci 

i 

� Th (Zone 1) 

Wi 2 aiK 

2 � biU 

2 � ci 


Wi3 ai 

K3 

� biU 

3 � ci 


The determination of these 9 coefficients (if 5 energy windows would be used there 

would be 15 coefficients) can be considered as the master calibration of the tool. 

The coefficients are combined in a calibration matrix: 

� a 

� 

K 

� �a 

� 

� a 

1 

2 

3 

b 

b 

b 

1 

2 

3 

j 

1 

2 

3 

c1 

� 

� 

c2 

� 

c � 

3 � 

i 

j


www.alt.lu 

Computation of the contents of elements: 

We will look at the elements K, U, and Th again. A set of equations can be written 

as follows: 

W � a K � bU 

� c Th � r 

i 

Where: 

K, U and Th are the elemental concentrations in the formation, 

r i is a factor representing the statistical error, 

W i is the count rate from window i and 

i 

ai , bi and ci are the calibration coefficients (for windows i) obtained from the 

master calibration described before. 

It is then possible to solve by the least square method, obtaining an equation: 

n 

n 

2 

�ri�� i�1 

i�1 

i 

i 

i 

( W � a K � bU 

� c Th) 

i 

i 

i 

i 

2 

� R 

where coefficients are optimized in such a way as to minimize R 2 . 

Creating a model to output window count rates 

In this type of model a number of energy windows will be defined. When the model 

is applied to a data set the count rates extracted from the specified windows will be 

output in separate Well Logs. 

To create the model: 

� Open a blank Borehole Document. As you do not refer to any calibration 

data it is not necessary to open a document with data. 

� Select Process > Common > Spectral Gamma > Window Based 

Model to open the Model Properties dialog box. 

2

Remarks Tab 

Model Design Tab 

Window list 


Energy Window Based Model Properties dialog box 

� WellCAD will try to load the last model you worked on. Click on the New 

Model button located in the lower right corner to start with a blank model. 

� Set a Model Name to identify your model. 

� Click the Add button in the Energy Window field to get a new entry to the 

list. The Select Energy Window dialog opens. 

Select a window from the drop down list or define a new one 

New 

Model 

� You can check the Select Default option and use the drop down list to 

select a pre-defined window stored in the WellCAD.ini file. If you want to


www.alt.lu 

define your own window check the Define Window option and enter 

Name, Low and High Limit. To add your definition to the repository click 

Save Default. This will create a new entry (e.g. 

EnergyWindow1=K,1320,1575) in the WellCAD.ini file 

[SpectralGamma] section. 

� Click OK to close the window selection dialog box. 

Recommended Energy Window Ranges (IAEA): 

Potassium K-40 (@1460 keV) 1370 – 1570 keV 

Uranium B-214 (@1765 keV) 1660 – 1860 keV 

Thorium Tl-208 (@2614 keV) 2410 – 2810 keV 

Total Count 400 – 2810 keV 

The numbers you enter for the low and high limits must not correspond to energy 

values necessarily. They could be the channel numbers if the data for which this 

model is used for is not energy calibrated. 

Repeat the steps described above to add all the windows you need. To add remarks 

or comments to the model select the Remarks tab and type in your text. To create a 

new line press CTRL + Enter. 

Remarks Tab 

Enter remarks and comments for the current model


The information entered in the Remarks tab will be shown when a model is loaded 

into the Spectral Gamma Model Processing dialog box (see 1.5.13.6 Process 

Spectral Gamma Data). 

When finished click the Save Model button located in the lower right edge of the 

Model Properties dialog box. This will save a *.SGM file that can be loaded and 

applied using the Process Spectral Gamma Data from Process > Common > 

Spectral Gamma. 

Creating a model based on calibration spectra 

In this type of model you will define a number of energy windows and use the 

spectra measured in the enriched zones of a calibration pit and their known 

concentration of elements to compute a set of calibration coefficients. These 

coefficients will be stored inside the model file. The theory of calibration has already 

been covered at the beginning of this chapter. 

Each enriched zone is referred to as a Calibration Reference in WellCAD. For a 

successful computation of calibration coefficients it is necessary that the number of 

energy windows is at least equal to the number of Calibration References used. The 

number of elements per Calibration Reference must equal the total number of 

Calibration References used in the model. E.g. for a KUT model referring to a 

calibration pit with three enriched zones (Calibration References) each of the 

Calibration References must contain three elements. The number of energy windows 

must be at least three. This model building process has been designed to ensure that 

the equation system determined from the users input is always valid. 

To create a new model based on calibration spectra: 

� Load the Borehole Document (*.WCL) file containing the spectra from the 

calibration pit measurement. If you do not have this data set you might 

continue with the topic below Creating a model based on count rates. 

� From Process > Common > Spectral Gamma choose the Window 

Based Model option. The Model Properties dialog will open trying to 

reload the last model you worked on. 

� Click on the New Model button to start from scratch. 

� Enter a Model Name and use the Add button in the Energy Window 

section to setup a list of windows from which the count rates will be 

extracted. The previous paragraph (Creating a model to output window 

count rates) described the steps of entering windows.


www.alt.lu 

Windows selected for the model 

� In the Model Properties dialog box click the Add Element button located 

in the upper right edge of the dialog box next. This will open the Insert 

New Element dialog. 

Select new element dialog box 

Select an entry from the drop down list or enter a new name into the edit box of the 

control. The information listed is read from the WellCAD.ini file [SpectralGamma] 

section. You can add your customized entries to the WellCAD.ini when clicking the 

Save Default button. If you wish to convert your spectral gamma process output 

into other units than the calibration units, you may enter the conversion factor into 

the corresponding edit box. 

Commonly used weight percent conversion factors: 

1 pCi (K-40)/g = 0.1195 wt-%K 

1 pCi (Ra-226)/g = 2.997 wt-ppm eU

Log containing the 

measurements (spectra) 

from the enriched zone. 

Preview of spectra and 

energy windows. 


1 pCi (Ra-226)/g = 3.534 wt-ppm eU3O8 

1 pCi (Th-232)/g = 9.159 wt-ppm (eTh) 

Click on Next to open the Edit Calibration Reference dialog box. Use the drop 

down control in the Reference Spectrum section to select the log (FWS Log type) 

containing your measurements from the first enriched zone tested. 

Source data selection and spectrum preview of the Edit Caliper Reference dialog box 

Number of 

stacks applied 

on the fly 

The scroll bar next to the preview allows scanning the source data in time or depth 

and updating the preview with the current spectrum. If the Number of stacks is 

greater one, the stacked trace will be displayed in the preview as well. The windows 

as defined previously in the main window will show up in the preview as well. Each 

window displays the count rate determined from the stacked spectrum. 

The spread sheet below the spectrum view allows insertion of the known 

concentration of the selected element and its unit.


www.alt.lu 

Insert the concentration and unit for the selected element 

Click on Finish to get back to the Model Properties dialog box updating the 

spectrum preview there. 

You can add another element to the model by clicking on Add Element button. 

This will create a new Calibration Reference. You will be asked to select or define 

the new element, selecting a spectrum and inserting the known concentrations for 

the second enriched zone and complete the model by inserting the missing 

concentration for the first enriched zone. The following figures summarize the 

workflow for three elements: 

1 st element (e.g. K): 

Reference 1(new) 

� A single element in the first Calibration Reference.

2 nd element (e.g. U): 


Reference 2 (new) Reference 1 

� A new Calibration Reference to be filled with the known concentration of 

the two elements handled in the model. The already existing reference 

must be completed with the concentration of the 2 nd element. 

3 rd element (e.g. Th): 

Reference 3 (new) Reference 1 Reference 2 

� A third new Calibration Reference and looping through existing references 

to complete the concentration information. 

This way we ensure the number of elements handled by the model corresponds to 

the number of tested calibration standards (enriched zones). 

You can toggle the preview in the Model Properties dialog box to display the 

calibration spectrum chosen for each Calibration Reference (enriched zone or tested 

standard) by selecting the corresponding entry from the Calibration Reference drop 

down list.


www.alt.lu 

Spectrum view in the Model Properties dialog box 

If you wish to edit the selected calibration spectrum and concentration information 

click on the Edit Spectrum button. 

Click on the Save Model button to store your settings in an *.SGM file. The 

calibration coefficients will be computed when saving the model. 

Display of Sensitivity Coefficients: 

The sensitivity coefficients of the calibration matrix, which will be stored as part of 

the model, are displayed in the lower left edge of the Model Properties dialog box. 

The coefficients displayed in the screen shot above would be applied for a 

determination of the concentration values the following way:

Where 

�WK 

� � C 

� � � 

�WU 

� � K � � C 

� � � 

�WTh 

� �C 

� 

� 

� 

� 

� 


with 

WK, U, Th correspond to the corrected counts of the K, U and Th windows, 

K as the calibration matrix and 

CK, U, Th being the concentrations to compute. 

Please Note: The sensitivity coefficients can be edited manually (click into the cell 

and change the value) but as the coefficients are usually determined from a reference 

spectrum you will loose the link to the calibration reference. 

Creating a model based on count rates 

It might happen that you do not have access to the calibration spectrum data 

anymore but you have the window count rates and window limits archived 

somewhere. In this case you can create a complete calibration model as well. 

Follow the steps as described above: 

� Start with an empty document and choose the Process > Common > 

Spectral Gamma → Window Based Model option. 

� Define the energy windows. 

K 

U 

Th 

� a 

� 

K � �a 

� 

� a 

� Add elements and fill in the concentrations for the Calibration References 

but do not select any reference spectrum. 

� In the Model Properties dialog box the Edit Count Rate button become 

available. 

1 

2 

3 

b 

b 

b 

1 

2 

3 

c1 

� 

� 

c2 

� 

c � 

3 �


www.alt.lu 

No Reference Spectrum 

Edit Count Rate option 

becomes available 

Model Properties with Edit Count Rate button active 

� Click the Edit Count Rate button and enter the known count rates for all 

the energy windows and currently selected Calibration References. Repeat 

the process for all remaining Calibration References. 

Edit Count Rate dialog box to enter count rates manually 

� Click the Save Model button to save your settings and create a *.SGM file. 

Editing an existing model 

To edit a model file open an empty Borehole Document or load the document 

containing the measurements from the calibration pit. 

Select the Process > Common > Spectral Gamma → Window Based Model 

option and click the Load Model button in the Model Properties dialog box. 

Please note that the model stores the stacked reference spectrum from which your 

window count rates were extracted. Even if you have a blank borehole document 

you might get a reference spectrum displayed.

1.5.14 Hole Volume Calculation 


Select the Calibration Reference you would like to edit from the corresponding drop 

down control and click on Edit Spectrum. 

You will be able to select a new log containing the reference spectra, select the 

spectrum by browsing the data set using the scroll bar and edit the concentration 

values and units. 

Edit Spectrum dialog box 

This process is used to calculate the volume of an entire hole or just for an annulus 

(e.g. between casing and borehole wall). It can be found in the Process > Common 

menu. Select the Volume Calculation option to open the first step of the Volume 

Calculation Wizard. 

Hole volume calculation wizard – Step1


www.alt.lu 

Method: 

It is possible to calculate the volume of an entire hole (Hole volume). If this option 

has been chosen, only the borehole diameter (Volume Diameter – External) needs 

to be defined. 

If the option Annular volume has been chosen, the volume calculated using the 

internal diameter (Volume Diameter – Internal) will be subtracted from the 

volume calculated using the external diameter. 

The terms external and internal diameter are used in the following sense: If the 

annular volume between casing and borehole wall is calculated the external diameter 

refers to the diameter between the borehole walls and the internal diameter refers to 

the casing outer diameter. 

Depth: 

Set the depth range for which the selected volume will be computed. The total 

minimum and maximum depth limits of the hole are shown next to the edit boxes. 

Direction: 

Select if the volume is calculated from bottom to top or from top to bottom of the 

hole. 

Volume Diameter: 

Data from Well and Image logs can be used as input channel. Select the logs from 

the corresponding drop down list and set appropriate units. It is also possible to 

enter a constant value directly into the controls edit box. If an Image Logs is used as 

input channel the values stored in the log are assumed to be radius values. Well Log 

data and constant values are assumed to be diameters. The Internal diameter refers 

to the internal diameter of the annulus, while the External diameter corresponds to 

the external diameter of the annulus. 

Click the Next button to proceed with the next step of the Volume Calculation 

Wizard. It allows you define the way of data output.

Unit: 


Hole volume calculation wizard – Step2 

Select the unit in which you want to express the computed volume. Click on the unit 

control to select from the list of volume units. 

Tick Marks: 

If checked the Tick Mark output generates a Mud log in fixed bar style. The bars 

created are of three different lengths. A bar is shown as soon as the cumulated 

volume reaches one of the quantities set in the small tick every, medium tick 

every and large tick every edit boxes. E.g. if a small bar is shown for each cu.ft 

reached (a medium bar for 10 cu.ft and a large bar for 100 cu.ft) one can determine 

the volume for any depth interval by simply counting the bars. 

Data values and scale of the generated Mud Log have no meaning. Volume can be 

counted from the number of bars. 

Volume output in bar style 

Large, medium and 

small bars allow 

counting of volume


www.alt.lu 

Numerical: 

The Numerical output generates a comment log showing a string representing the 

cumulated volume at the current depth position. To change the output interval in 

current depth units insert a new value into the edit box available in the Numerical 

section. 

Numerical output of cumulated volume 

Curve: 

The Curve output generates a Well log showing a curve of the cumulated volume. A 

curve display shows rapid changes in volume more clearly. 

Cumulated volume represented by curve 

Numbers give 

cumulated volume 

Curve shows 

cumulated volume

Interval: 

Select a log dealing with depth intervals (e.g. 

Lithology Log, Strata Log) or type in a numerical 

value indicating a constant depth interval in units 

of the current depth axis to output a new Interval 

Log containing the volume per depth interval. 

Save As Default: 

To remember the settings made in the last two 

wizard steps for future process calls, click the 

Save As Default button. 


1.5.15 Using the Statistics Bar 

Certain applications require deriving and comparing statistical parameters of 

multiple logs. Creating new logs for each parameter using the Block Process would 

be too much work. The Statistics Bar provides a convenient shortcut to retrieve the 

statistical information for multiple intervals drawn in a borehole document and to 

combine them in a single spread-sheet like display. 

To display the Statistic Bar open the View menu, point to Toolbars and select 

Statistics Bar. As an alternative you may use the short-cut key combination 

CTRL+8. The bar, consisting of a large list control display, is docked to the bottom 

of the borehole document by default. If you wish to making it floating on top of 

your borehole document simply drag the left or right border to undock the bar. If 

you wish to have it docked again simply double click on the frame of the window. 

Statistics Bar docked at the bottom of the document 

Volume per lithology bed interval


www.alt.lu 

When the Statistics Bar is displayed it has besides a top and bottom depth column 

no other parameters to display. 

Add / Edit Parameters: 

Click on the Edit Parameters icon. A new dialog box will be displayed. 

Statistics Information dialog box to edit and select input logs and parameters to be computed 

To add a new log and parameter click into the next free cell in the Log column to 

display a drop down list and select a log. By default the interval Average is preselected. 

You can choose a different statistical parameter by clicking into the cell in 

the Parameter column (the range of available parameters depends on the input log 

type). 

To display advanced options check the corresponding box at the bottom of the 

dialog box. You can specify the resolution (in units of the current depth axis) of the 

tool that measured the parameter to take shoulder effects into account when 

calculating the statistical parameters (i.e. the calculation interval will be reduced by 

half the resolution at top and bottom.) 

The Value column allows specification of a value that will be set if the computation 

interval does not contain any data. The options are Interpolated (inserts a value 

interpolated between the nearest neighbors), Nearest Min or Max and No Data. 

To remove an entry from the list simply select the row and press the Delete key.

Inserting intervals: 

After selecting the statistical parameters you 

can insert intervals anywhere on the borehole 

document. These intervals do not require a 

log to be inserted first. Drawing the intervals 

is very similar to inserting litho beds or 

comment log boxes. Ensure no log is 

selected. Hold down the SHIFT key and 

drag the mouse to insert an interval (current 

depth displayed in the Status Bar), drag the 

upper or lower limit of the interval with your 

mouse to adjust the limits. 


You can also click the Add row icon to 

add a new row and enter the top and bottom limits of the interval manually. 

Clicking the Add rows from… icon allows selection of a reference log. A log of 

type Lithology, Comment, Strata, Interval or Core Desc can be chosen. For each 

interval found in the reference log a new interval will be created in the Statistic bar. 

Intervals are displayed as shaded areas on screen as long as the Statistics Bar is 

displayed. (The selected parameters remain in the bar for the lifetime of the window. 

But they will not be stored within the WCL file.) 

For each interval one row in the list control of the Statistics Bar will be inserted. If 

you want the displayed parameters being equally spread across the width of the bar, 

right click on the column header and choose Show all parameters. 

Depending on the input log type one or multiple columns may be created. If, for 

example, the average of a Lithology Log is computed one column for each lithology 

component will be created. The calculated value is the percentage of the cumulative 

thickness of this component within the interval. 

Export of statistical data: 

Click the Export Statistics icon. An ASCII file with *.TXT extension will be 

created containing all the information shown in the Statistic Bar separated by 

commas. 

Deleting intervals: 

Hold down the CTRL key and click into an interval to remove it. You can also select 

rows in the list control and click the Remove selected rows icon.


1.6 Annotations 

www.alt.lu 

The annotation tool provides the necessary functionality to add floating comments 

and pictures to the Borehole Document. Annotations are displayed on top of the 

data. An annotation could be a single arrow or line, a text box, picture or a callout. 

Annotations are not tied to a log and contain no data. Nevertheless, to offer a 

certain level of annotation organization, one can insert different layers of 

annotations, which can be hidden and displayed separately. E.g. one layer could 

contain personal comments, which could be hidden when printing, a second layer 

could contain important remarks that must be contained in the printout. 

Picture 

annotation 

Example of a document with multiple text and one picture annotation. The annotations are used to describe 

the Velocity Analysis process for a client and highlight the occurrence of a major fracture. 

1.6.1 Inserting and Editing Annotations 

To be able to add Annotations to your document, the Annotation Bar must be 

visible in your WellCAD workspace. The Annotation Bar grants access to the 

different annotation objects. 

Annotation Bar 

Text box 

annotation

To display the Annotation Bar: 

� Press CTRL + 5 


Or 

� Select the Annotation Bar option from the View > Toolbars menu. 

Please note that the bar might have a different layout if the CoreCAD & Wellsite 

add-on module for WellCAD is not activated. 

To insert a new annotation: 

� Press the button in the tool bar. It sets the Borehole Document to 

Annotation Mode, which means that only annotation objects in the current 

layer can be edited. Log data edition is disabled. Press the button again to 

disable the Annotation Mode. The name and status of current annotation 

layer is shown in the drop down control in the Annotation Bar 

. If no other annotation layer has been inserted before, 

the first click on the button will add a default layer named 

“Comments”. The status symbols indicate that layer is displayed ( 

for a hidden layer) and the annotations are editable ( 

disabled). 

for edition 

� 

(If you select the Annotate option form the Edit menu the Annotation 

Bar will be displayed and the document set to Annotation Mode.) 

Press the button corresponding to the annotation object you want to insert: 

single arrow, text box, picture, text callout, picture callout. 

� Move the mouse pointer to the position where you want to insert the 

annotation. Click and drag a line or box depending on the annotation. 

Please note that for arrows and callouts the position you clicked with your 

mouse is the location the arrow points to (or begin of the arrow). 

� The option settings dialog box for a particular annotation opens. Adjust 

the presentation settings and click OK. You will notice that the settings 

you made will be remembered. The next time you insert the same 

annotation type the options dialog boxes is initialized with the last settings 

you made.


1.6.1.1 Arrow Annotation 

www.alt.lu 

To edit an existing annotation: 

� Press the button 

� Double Click on the annotation symbol for which you want to alter the 

presentation settings. You can also Right Click on the symbol and select the 

Settings option from the flying menu that pops up. 

� Click on an annotation to select it. 

A selected annotation can be resized, moved to a different location, deleted 

(e.g. press DELETE key) or copied and pasted (e.g. use CRTL+C and 

CTRL+V). 

When editing an arrow annotation a dialog box with three different tabs opens. The 

Line and Arrow tabs allow changing the display properties of the symbol. The 

Layer tab simply reports the status of the annotation layer the symbol belongs to. 

Line options 

Handle to 

resize the 

annotation 

Allows changing the 

color, style and thickness 

of the line

Begin is where you clicked 

to draw the arrow. 

1.6.1.2 Text and Picture Box 


Options for the begin and end style of the arrow 

When editing a text or picture annotation a multi layered dialog box opens. For a 

text box the Text tab provides a simple edit box in which multi line text can be 

entered. To change alignment and font style open the Font tab. 

Type in or Copy’n Paste 

the text to be displayed 

Text editor tab 

Change style and size for 

begin and end style of 

arrow


www.alt.lu 

Set the alignment of the 

text. 

Click to open the standard 

Windows font selection dialog 

box. 

If text needs to be displayed 

rotated, enter the corresponding 

angle 

Font tab – change alignment and press the Font button to display the standard Windows font selection dialog 

box 

When a picture box is inserted the Bitmap tab appears. Click the Browse button to 

load a picture in Bitmap (*.BMP), JPEG (*.JPG), *.GIF or Tif (*.TIF, *.TIFF) 

format. 

Bitmap tab – load the picture to display in the box 

Background, Border and Size tabs are explained in 

1.6.1.4 Background, Borders and Size.

1.6.1.3 Callout Annotation 


The text or picture call out is a combination of an arrow and text (picture) box. Thus 

when inserting a new callout a dialog box with Text (Bitmap), Line and Arrow 

tabs opens. The settings were already explained above. 

1.6.1.4 Background, Borders and Size 

Text callout (left) and Picture callout (right) 

When changing the settings for text, picture and callout annotations the options 

dialog boxes may contain Background, Border and Size tabs: 

Background: 

An opaque or transparent 

background fill of a user-defined 

color and fill style can be set. Click 

the color drop down for more 

colors. 

Border: 

Tick the Display Border option to 

draw a frame around your text or 

picture box. Color, line style and 

thickness the frame can be altered 

as well. 

Size: 

Choose the Fixed size option if the 

vertical and horizontal extension of 

the box should stay the same when 

depth scale is changed or document 

width is altered.


www.alt.lu 

If the option is set to Dynamic the box will be stretched according to the change in 

Borehole Document width and height. 

1.6.2 Managing Annotation Layers 

As already mentioned in the introduction of this chapter, annotations can be 

organized in different layers in order to hide their display when it is appropriate. You 

can also lock a layer and prevent the contained symbols from being edited. 

Adding an additional Annotation Layer 

� Select Insert New Annotation Layer from the Edit menu and enter the 

name of the new layer in the dialog box that opens. 

Or 

� Select the Annotation Layer Settings option and use the New button in 

the dialog box that pops up. 

Use the drop down list from the Annotation Bar to select a particular layer. You 

have to switch to Annotation Mode first before you can access the drop down 

control. 

Select the layer that you 

want to edit. 

The drop down control displays also the status of the selected layer. The light bulb 

icon indicates whether the layer is displayed ( ) or hidden ( ). The selected 

annotation layer can be edited if the lock icon is highlighted ( 

settings of an annotation layer: 

). To change the 

� Open the View menu and select the Annotation Layer Settings option. 

A dialog box pops up listing all layers and allowing adding new ones as well as 

changing the name, displaying and lock status. Click in the corresponding cell to edit 

the value.

List of existing 

layers 

Click to alter 

status 

1.7 Advanced Techniques 

1.7.1 Depth Matching 

1.7.1.1 Starting the Depth Matcher 


Annotation Layer Settings dialog box 

Controls to add, 

delete and rename 

layers 

The Depth Matcher tool provides the necessary functionality to perform non-linear 

depth shifts for a selected number of logs against a reference log. E.g. the reference 

data set could be a wireline log against which data of other logging runs are matched 

or a core description will be matched against a Gamma Ray measurement chosen to 

be the reference. During the depth matching process the selected data will be 

shifted, compressed and stretched according to user defined anchor points. 

To start the depth matching tool go to the Tools menu and choose Depth 

Matcher. Alternatively you can click the icon in the toolbar. At first a dialog box 

will be displayed to select one or multiple reference logs and the data columns you 

would like to process (i.e. shift).


www.alt.lu 

Select the depth reference 

Make the selection of logs that 

will be depth match processed 

Depth Matcher reference log selection. 

The Depth Matcher comes up in its own window displaying the reference log(s) on 

the left in a separated area. The remaining part of the window displays the Borehole 

Document with all logs in selected status that have been chosen to be processed. 

Now anchor points must be set to indicate where the depth matching takes place. 

Depth Matcher Window: Reference log (left) and logs to shift are select

1.7.1.2 Creating Anchor Points 

Link lines connect the points 

where depth will be matched. 

Only the section up to the 

horizontal link line will be 

shifted 


Anchor points are represented through link lines. To draw a single link line, point at 

a feature on the reference log. Click and simultaneously drag the mouse to the 

corresponding feature on the log to be depth matched. Release the mouse button. A 

link or correlation line will be created. 

Single link line drawn between features to depth match. After commencing the depth matching process the line 

would appear horizontal. 

The above example shows a single link line between a gamma ray peak and a clay 

rich layer. After depth matching the gamma ray peak will still be at the same depth 

position but all logs selected for processing will be shifted up to match the new 

depth given through the link line (the link line will be horizontal). Note that the 

entire log section will be shifted up. If you want to exclude a section from being 

depth matched limit it by horizontal link lines as shown below. Horizontal link lines 

can be created by holding down the ALT key when dragging the line. 

Everything above the horizontal link line will not be shifted. 

Deleting link lines 

To delete a link line simply press the CTRL key and click the line you want to 

remove. To remove all of them select the Remove all links option from the Edit 

menu.


www.alt.lu 

Inserting link lines using a ghost 

Another method to set link lines is using the ghost. Point at the top of the feature 

on the reference log. Press the Shift key. Drag the mouse to form a rectangle 

encompassing the feature of interest. Release the mouse button but do not release 

the Shift key. Move the mouse pointer into the rectangle and drag the reference 

features ghost over to the log to be depth matched. Position the ghost over the log 

and release the mouse button. Two link lines representing the top and the bottom of 

the reference feature will now be in place. 

Press the Shift key and drag a frame. 

Release the mouse button, but do not release the Shift key. Click inside the frame and drag it. 

Release mouse and Shift key. Two link lines will be created. 

Creating link lines from a Depth Log 

Having the reference depth in one column and the corresponding depth of another 

system in the data column of a Depth log, this information can be used to create 

link lines. A typical example would be having Log Depth and Core Depth already in 

a Depth log column. 

When opening a new Depth Matcher, in the New Depth Matcher dialog box, select 

the title of the Depth Log as reference log. When the Depth Matcher Window is 

active, choose Links from Depth Log from the Edit menu. WellCAD will create 

as many links as rows are in the Depth log data.

Common link lines and their effect on the data 

Constant Shift: 

Data Stretch: 

Data Squeeze: 

1.7.1.3 Commencing the Depth Matching Process 


Once all anchor points are in place open the Edit menu and select the Match all 

links option. The Borehole Document will be updated. Not only the data display 

will show the applied shifts but also the data will have altered depth positions now. 

Data will be re-sampled during the process if necessary. 

Creating a new Depth column to track the shifts 

It is possible to create a new Depth log to show a depth axis displaying the original 

(non shifted) depth of the processed data tracks. E.g. a driller’s depth column could 

be created to be available after the entire core description has been processed to 

match a calibrated depth (e.g. logger’s depth). 

The following steps must be performed: 

� Start the Depth Matcher and make your selection of reference and logs to 

process. 

� Set your anchor points as described above. 

Data interval will be shifted by 

a constant amount 

Data interval will be stretched 

between the link lines. 

Remaining sections will be 

shifted up and down respectively 

Data interval will be squeezed 

between the link lines. 

Remaining sections will be 

shifted down and up respectively


www.alt.lu 

� Select Insert Match Links and insert New Depth Log from the Edit 

menu. 

� Close the Depth Matcher window. 

A new Depth log has been created containing all the shift marks created through 

setting the anchor points. 

The data can be compared against two depth axes now. 

Two depth columns: The new reference (e.g. loggers depth) and the original reference for the shifted logs (e.g. 

drillers depth) are shown in the log chart. 

You will notice that only the document’s master depth axis is displayed linear – the 

equidistant horizontal depth grid lines belong to the master depth axis. The created 

Depth log might show stretched or squeezed sections. 

Example of document’s master 

depth axis and Depth log 

showing the stretched and 

squeezed sections caused by the 

depth matching process. 

Linear master depth axis (left) and depth column generated from Depth log


If you want the Depth log to be displayed as linear axis right click on its log title and 

select Use as depth scale from the pop-up menu. Please note that this option is 

not available if your Depth Log contains depth reversals. 

There might be cases when the behavior of the Depth Matching tool must be 

reversed. E.g. a depth encoder was not set correctly during logging. The data is 

imported into WellCAD covering a depth range from 0 to 50m. The original range is 

0 to 150m. You would add a depth log to the document and setting the data 0, 0 and 

50, 150. Afterwards you would start the Depth Matcher tool, selecting the Depth log 

as reference and create your link lines from the Depth log. After matching all the 

links the data will be stretched according to the interval given in the Depth log. To 

get the right behavior the WellCAD.ini file should contain the following entry: 

[DepthMatcher] 

ReversedDepthLog=FALSE 

The same flag should be set if you want to invert a previously performed depth 

matching process. Choose the new depth log that was created during the depth 

matching process as reference and re-create the link lines before starting the depth 

matcher in reversed direction. 

1.7.2 Handling Different Depth Systems 

The WellCAD Borehole Document is capable to display and manage multiple depth 

axes. Besides the master depth axis, which is always present in a document, the user 

can insert additional Depth logs and have them displayed has linear depth axis. A 

possible scenario would be having measured depth (MD) and true vertical depth 

(TVD) displayed in the same document. A TVD channel can be computed using the 

borehole deviation process described in 1.5.12.2 Easting, Northing and TVD. It is 

also possible that a Depth log is created as result of the depth matching process or 

depth information is simply imported from a file. 

To use a Depth log as linear depth scale: 

� Right click on the log handle (log title) of the Depth log. 

� A pop-up menu opens. 

� The Use as depth scale option is available in the menu if the log does not 

contain depth reversals, which means the data values in the Depth log are 

in increasing order from top to bottom. 

� Select the Use as depth scale option.


www.alt.lu 

After choosing another depth axis as reference the entire data display will be 

updated to take the new linear depth into account. You can right click on the master 

depth axis title and select the corresponding option to use it as current scale again. 

The depth column being the current reference of the Borehole Document shows the 

depth scale in its log title zone (e.g. 1:100, 1:5000, …). 

Master axis is document reference (left). Depth log “TVD” is document reference (right). Note the horizontal 

depth grids always line up with the current depth axis. 

It is not only the data display that changes. The numbers in the depth column 

displayed in the tabular editor belong to the current depth axis. If we display the 

Tabular Editor for the Tilt curve shown in the above sample, the depth numbers 

represent MD or TVD depending on which axis is used as current depth scale.


Tilt with MD values (left) and same data set with TVD values displayed after depth reference was changed. 

Impacts on copying and pasting data 

When copying logs between Borehole Documents (e.g. using the short cuts 

CTRL+C and CTRL+V) it is always the master depth that will be used as reference 

independent of the current depth scale set. E.g. even if a Depth log with TVD is 

used as the current depth scale the data copied to another Borehole Document will 

keep the original master depth (e.g. MD). This way we ensure that the master depth 

is equal in both Borehole Documents. If log data is pasted into an application 

outside WellCAD (e.g. EXCEL) the depth will always correspond to the currently 

selected depth column (e.g. MD or TVD). 

When pasting data into a Borehole Document that contains at least one Depth log 

in addition to the master depth axis, the user will be asked to specify which of the 

depth columns of the new document corresponds to the original master depth axis – 

independent of the current depth scale selection. E.g. a core porosity log is copied 

out of a Borehole Document that used Core Depth as master axis. The log is pasted 

into a Borehole Document that contains wireline logs using Logger’s Depth as 

master axis and has an additional Depth log column with Core Depth. A dialog is 

displayed listing the master depth axis (by default named Depth) and the Core 

Depth log in a drop down control. You have to choose the Core Depth column 

because the master axis of the Borehole Document the core porosity log is copied 

from represents Core Depth.


www.alt.lu 

C 

O 

R 

E 

D 

E 

P 

T 

H 

Copy’n Paste 

When copying and pasting data between documents with different master depth axes the user has to choose the 

right depth reference. 

The depth values of the core porosity log from the example above will be converted 

to Logger’s depth using the depth correspondence data stored in the Core Depth 

log. 

Impacts on data import and export 

When selecting a single log and exporting it as a *.TXT or *.WA* file, the depth 

values written into the file will correspond to the currently selected depth scale of 

the Borehole Document. The same happens if multiple *.WA* files are exported. If 

none or multiple logs have been selected and are exported as *.TXT file the dialog 

that opens allows setting the depth reference explicitly. A other file formats use the 

Borehole Document’s master depth by default. 

When importing ASCII data using the Text File Import Wizard (see 1.4.2.2 TXT, 

CSV and ASCII Import) the last step allows setting the depth reference of the 

incoming data. E.g. if core analysis data recorded in Driller’s Depth is imported and 

the Borehole Document contains a Logger’s Depth master axis and a Driller’s 

Depth log you can select from a drop down list the correct depth reference. Please 

note that it might be necessary to resample the incoming data in order to maintain a 


L 

O 

G 

G 

E 

R’ 

S 

D 

E 

P 

T 

H 

C 

O 

R 

E 

D 

E 

P 

T 

H

Select the depth reference that 

corresponds to the incoming 

data. 

Data must be re-sampled if the 

selected depth reference in the 

Borehole Document is not 

linear. 

1.7.3 Using Time Based Data 


Text File Import Wizard allows to select the correct depth reference if the information is available as Depth log 

within the Borehole Document. 

Besides managing different depth references in a single Borehole Document using 

Depth logs it is possible to have a time axis as well. The date/time values can be 

handled in the document’s master axis as well as in a separate Depth log. Switching 

between depth and time reference is possible as long as the axis contains no 

reversals – just right click on the log title and select the Use as depth scale option. 

You could think about a Borehole Document reporting a drilling process. This log 

chart would have a date/time axis next to a MD and TVD depth axis.


1.7.3.1 Importing Time Based Data 

www.alt.lu 

A sample of a log chart reporting a drilling process. The master axis is time with additional Depth logs 

showing MD, TVD and Bit-Depth. 

A Date/Time axis can be handled like a Depth axis. Data can also be exported with 

a date/time column using Copy’n Paste or one of the ASCII file export options. 

The only way to get time-referenced data into a Borehole Document is by importing 

an ASCII file and using the Text File Import Wizard. 

To start the import, simply drag a text file (*.TXT, *.CSV, *.ASC) into the WellCAD 

workspace. Alternatively you can open the File menu and select Import > Single 

File. 

� Step 1 one of the Text File Import Wizard will open.



Column delimiters 

Select the column delimiter that corresponds to the delimiter used in the text file. 

The preview allows to control, if the correct delimiter has been chosen and the 

columns are delimited properly. 

Skip lines 

If leading lines of the file should not be imported type in the number of lines that 

should be skipped when the file is imported. 

� Click on the Next button to open Step 2 of the Text File Import Wizard. 

Step 2 of the Text File Import Wizard


www.alt.lu 

Click to select the appropriate 

date/time format. 

Titles 

If the first line to import contains the log titles, mark the Next line is titles box to 

automatically set the title of the imported logs in WellCAD. If the second line to 

import contains the unit’s mark the Following line is units box to add the units to 

the log title when the file is imported. The preview updates the column header 

corresponding to the selection that has been made. 

Import 

To import multiple logs at the same time mark the Allow multiple logs box 

(possible for Well and Mud logs only). This option must be set if the text file 

contains e.g. date and time information that is merged to a single depth axis (depth 

column log) after import. 

� Click on the Next button to proceed to Step 3. 


Reference Selection (preview) 

The preview has become a control now. The first column contains a control (box) 

to select which of the logs (log title shown in column 2 and a data sample shown in 

column 3) will be used as document reference axis. Only logs with a format (column 

4) other than Data can be chosen as reference. Click into the Format column on the 

format string to open a drop down control that allows the selection of different 

formats.


The menu contains multiple formats to specify a depth axis, data log or data/time 

axis. If you select Depth, you will import the numerical values corresponding to that 

column as a WellCAD Depth log (or as master depth axis if it has been chosen as 

reference). A selection of Data will trigger an import as WellCAD Well log or Mud 

log. UNIX Time indicates that the numerical data of the column corresponds to 

seconds since 01 Jan 1970 at 00:00:00h and will be imported as WellCAD Depth log 

(or reference axis) but it will be displayed as date/time string on the borehole 

document. All other formats describe time and date where 

hh hours 

mm minutes 

ss seconds 

ss.s seconds with milliseconds after decimal point 

DD numerical value day 

MM numerical value of month (1-12) 

MMM three letter abbreviated name of month (jan, feb, mar, apr…) 

MMMM full name of month (January, February, March, April…) 

YY year without century as decimal number (00 – 99) 

YYYY year with century as decimal number (1970 – 2038). 

If a date or time format is not listed you can type in your own format using the 

characters explained above in the edit box of the drop down menu. The delimiter 

used should not vary within a format string. The new format you typed in will be 

stored in the WellCAD.ini file in section [CustomDateTime] and field 

DateTimeF#=. 

Please note that only one data column can be chosen as reference axis except for 

date and time, which will be merged into a single axis. 

Data type 

Columns of the format Data will be imported as Mud logs or Well logs depending 

on the settings made in this control. 

GMT offset 

The value specified as GMT offset will be subtracted from date/time channels 

imported (UNIX time channels are not corrected) to ensure that imported data is 

internally stored as GMT. When displaying the data a GMT offset can be added to 

retrieve the correct date/time display.


www.alt.lu 

� Click on Next to open Step 4 


Import Selection 

Select the logs you want to import. Logs not marked will be excluded from import. 

The channel (s) chosen as reference (indicated by ** title **) cannot be unselected. 

Depth Scale 

In case you want your data imported against another than the master reference axis, 

select the corresponding Depth log from the drop down list. Select the unit 

corresponding to the channels imported with format Depth from the Import Unit 

control. 

� Click on Finish to start the import. 

Note: If more than one date/time pair could be build, a fifth step must be opened to 

define the date/time pairs. 

1.7.3.2 Date / Time Specific Presentation Settings 

The Date/Time specific settings are options of the document’s master axis and the 

Depth log. They can be found in the Main Settings dialog box of the respective axis 

or log.


Date/Time options in the Depth settings dialog box 

Unit 

If you want date/time strings to be displayed, date/time should be selected in the 

Unit control. If another unit has been selected only depth or time values are 

displayed. 

Horizontal Grid 

A step of “1” corresponds to one second if date/time or second has been chosen as 

unit. Ensure you set the scale accordingly. 

Scale 

The scale options available depend on the settings made for the unit. The scale 

shown in the dialog box sample above is set to 1 hour per meter of plot. 

Date/Time button 

Further settings are available if your click on the Date/Time button:


www.alt.lu 

Detailed Date/Time presentation settings. 

The sample date and time information shown in this dialog box corresponds to the 

actual date and time of your system clock. 

Date 

Select the format you want the date strings to be displayed in from the Format 

control. To set the frequency for the date string to be displayed, enter a value into 

the corresponding text field. 

Time 

Select the time format you want to display from the Format control. 

GMT offset 

The specified value will be added to the time that is displayed on screen. 

Time Zero 

Time is counted in seconds and stored as floating point value inside WellCAD. To 

avoid touching the limits of the floating-point data type, the seconds are added to a 

time zero position. The time zero is by default set to the first value found in the 

document but can be altered using the corresponding text fields. Changing the 

values will shift the data. For your orientation, the original time zero set at import 

time is displayed at the bottom of the dialog box. 

Please note that the lowest value that can be set for the time zero is the 1 Jan 1970, 

00:00:00h.


Orientation 

To adjust the orientation of date/time strings within the track click on the 

Orientation button. 

1.7.4 Embedding Borehole Documents 

Applications that support object linking and embedding (OLE) fall into two 

categories: 

1. Applications whose documents can be embedded or linked as an object into other 

documents are called servers, e.g. MS Paint. 

2. Applications that can embed objects in their documents are called containers e.g. 

MS Word and MS Excel. 

Applications can be one or the other, or both such as WellCAD. 

When you embed an object an independent copy of the object file is stored within 

the container document. In this case changes can be made to the embedded object 

without changing the data in the original server data file. 

When you link an object the original data of the object remains with the server 

application. It is linked to the container application by its file reference. As you make 

changes to a linked object you are therefore making changes to the original servers 

data file and vice versa. 

E.g. a core photograph could be embedded within WellCAD or it can only be linked 

to WellCAD. The later case will have the effect that the core photograph will not be 

saved within the Borehole Document’s *.WCL file 

The OLE container capabilities of WellCAD are discussed in “Appendix A – OLE 

Log”. 

Depending upon the container application capabilities, a WellCAD Borehole 

Document can be linked and embedded in a number of different ways.


1.8 Creating Cross-Plots 

www.alt.lu 

The cross-plot functionality has been completely revised compared to WellCAD 

versions older than WellCAD 4.1. Nevertheless, old cross-plot documents stored in 

*.WCC files can still be opened, but can not benefit from the enhanced capabilities 

of the new cross-plot module, which is integrated in the Borehole Document and 

saved as *.WCL file. 

Please note that the new cross-plot capabilities are part of all WellCAD versions 

released after 4.1 Basic versions. For users of older versions the upgrade to 

WellCAD 4.1 or to WellCAD 4.1 including the cross-plot module is optional. 

A number of tutorials is available guiding through different aspects of the cross-plot. 

The following paragraphs explains the cross-plot features in a more general manner. 

Since WellCAD v 4.4 Cross Plots are part of a general chart tool. Besides cross plots 

you can also create Polar & Rose diagrams in a similar workspace. For the latter 

functionality to be accessible the Structure & Image Processing add-on module 

needs to be activated on your license. Details about creating Polar & Rose diagrams 

can be found in Book 3 – Image Module. 

1.8.1 Charts and Plots 

To create a cross-plot, first open the WellCAD Borehole Document (*.WCL) file 

that contains your data. You can create many different cross-plot charts for the data 

contained in one Borehole Document. You can not create a cross-plot with data 

coming out of multiple Borehole Documents. If you want to create a multi-well 

cross-plot you have to assemble the data in a single document first. 

The following figure shows a Gamma Ray vs. Density cross-plot chart. This chart is 

made out of three different plots, where each plot corresponds to the data of one 

well. You could see a plot as the data series providing the data for a chart. For each 

plot the symbol, color and depth range for the cross-plot can be selected 

individually. The different plots share a single X- and Y-axis in the chart.


Cross-plot chart (left) is made out of three plots (data series) 

Your cross-plot charts are saved as part of the Borehole Document (*.WCL file) that 

contains the data sources. If a Borehole Document containing one or more cross- 

plot charts has been loaded and you click on the icon to start the cross-plot tool, 

a dialog box will open listing all contained charts by title. 

Select one of the stored cross-plot charts to create it. 

Use the Remove button to delete cross-plot information from your Borehole 

Document. 

In case your borehole document does not contain any charts (or you click on the 

New button in the above dialogue box) the following dialogue box will open.


1.8.1.1 Creating a new cross-plot 

www.alt.lu 

No charts are contained in the document. The dialog provides option to create new blank charts or create a 

chart from a template. 

Cross-plot charts are also stored within Borehole Document template files (*.WDT) 

and can be applied as an option when the template is reloaded. If you wish to start a 

chart from scratch, button. 

Nevertheless it is possible to save a separate Chart Template File (*.CHT) 

containing the skeleton of the cross-plot only. If such templates can found under the 

path specified in the Templates directory edit box shown in the above dialogue 

box they will become accessible from the list as well. More information about the 

use of chart templates will be given later in this chapter. 

To create a new cross-plot chart: 

� Open the borehole document containing your data. 

� Select Tools > Crossplot or click on the icon in the toolbar. 

� The Chart Settings (Step 1) dialog box will open. Select the Blank 

Crossplot option (or one of the templates) and continue with Next.

1.8.1.2 Chart Settings 

Chart Title 

Existing plots (data series) 

Plot Title 

Selection of plot data 

1.8.1.3 Color and Symbol Classification 


� The Chart Settings (Step 2) dialog box will open. 

Chart Settings dialog box (2): Set up plots (data series) 

� Set the chart Title that will identify your chart (edit box on the left). It will 

be used as default title when printing the chart or saving it as a template. 

� The Plots list shows all data series which are already part of your chart. 

You can Add a new one or Remove existing ones using the corresponding 

buttons. At least one plot must be defined to show a cross-plot chart. The 

check mark next to the plot name indicates whether the plot is shown in 

the chart or if its display is hidden. 

� Each plot can be identified through the title set in the Cross Plot tab. In 

the Logs section select the logs you want to cross plot. For the X and Y 

component you can select any Well, Formula, Mud, Depth Column, 

Interval, Image Log or the Master Depth Axis. 

� For the Color and Symbol component selection of a Well, Formula, Mud, 

Depth Column, Interval, Litho, Analysis, Percentage, Comment, Strata, 

Image Log and Master Depth Axis is possible. If no selection has been 

made you can only set a constant color or symbol for the points crossplotted. 

The Color and Symbol components allow definition of a classification scheme. 

Click the Define button to open the Classification Settings for the color or


www.alt.lu 

Classification list. 

Click to add a new row to 

the classification list. 

Uncheck if you do not want 

to display points outside the 

classification range. 

symbol component. The classification list becomes active if a log has been selected 

for the corresponding component. 

Color classification for a Well Log (left) and Litho Log (right) 

� Click the Add button to insert a new row into the classification list. 

Depending on the log type you can either enter a low and high value 

(e.g. for Well or Mud Logs) or click in the Name column and pick a 

category from the drop down list. 

� To assign a color or symbol, click in the corresponding cell in the 

Color (or Symbol) column and make your selection from the drop 

down list. 

� If you are dealing with a 

log handling lithology 

patterns (e.g. lithology log) 

you can use the Auto Fill 

option, which inserts a 

row for each category 

found in the log using the 

associated color of the 

pattern as default color 

component. For logs 

dealing with numerical 

values the following dialog 

box pops up.

1.8.1.4 Depth Range Selection 


In order to display the data points in a different color derived from a 

color palette, set the Low and High values of the data range and 

specify the number of color classes you would like to see. E.g. for a 

value range of 0 to 200 and 50 classes the frequency between color 

changes is 4. 

� In the Default Settings section you can define whether points falling 

outside the classification are shown using a defined color or if they are 

not plotted at all (option unchecked). 

� To store a classification scheme click the Save As button – a *.CCD 

(Chart Classification Dictionary) file will be created – and use the 

Load button to retrieve a classification scheme. Classification 

information is also saved in chart templates. 

For each plot the depth interval from which the cross plotted data points originate, 

can be set in the Depth Range tab of the Chart Settings. 

Depth Range selection for each plot 

Besides using the Maximum depth range determined from the source logs you have 

the choice to enter a customized From and To value or pick a depth section from a 

log (From Log) such as a Strata Log or Comment Log. You are allowed to select 

only a single interval provided by a log. 

It is also possible to change the depth range interactively in the Log Overview 

window (see below).


1.8.2 The Cross-Plot Workspace 

www.alt.lu 

The cross-plot workspace is mainly composed of three elements: 

Cross-Plot Chart 

Cluster Statistics 

1.8.2.1 Cross-Plot Chart 

� Cross-Plot Chart 

� Log Overview (Logs Bar) 

� Cluster Statistic (Cluster Bar) 

Cross-Plot Workspace 

Log Overview 

The Cross-Plot Chart shows the cross-plot data points as specified in the Chart 

Settings. If you want to retrieve the settings, double click somewhere in the chart 

area or select View > Plot Settings. 

To edit the X- and Y-axis labels and scale double click on the corresponding axis or 

select View > X / Y Axis Settings.

1.8.2.2 Log Overview 

Axis Settings 


Axis Settings dialog box 

The Axis Settings dialog box allows setting the axis Title and adjustment of the 

min and max scale values. A Reversed Axis displays the labels ascending from the 

right to the left (respectively from the top to the bottom).To change the layout of 

the Grid click the Settings button. 

The fonts for axis labels and axis title can be changed using the options accessible 

through the Title Font and Label Font buttons. 

Please note: Axis titles are not automatically updated if the components (logs) 

specified in the Chart Settings change. 

A chart can be further equipped with a single chart title (Edit > Add Title), legends 

providing information about plotted components (Edit > Add Plot Legend) and 

data clusters (Edit > Add Cluster Legend) and Annotations (pick the tools from 

the Annotation Bar). Details about the chart layout are given in. 

The logs overview is a tool bar attached to the cross-plot chart and can be toggled 

on/off using View > Toolbars > Logs Bar or simply using the shortcut CTRL 

+ 9. 

The Logs Bar shows all the logs selected as X,Y, Color and Symbol component. If 

data clusters have been created a Percentage Log showing the location of clustered 

points (if a pattern has been assigned to the cluster) is displayed as well. The depth 

range for the cross plotted data points is indicated by a red shaded area. 

For each plot an individual preview is created. You can use the controls at the 

bottom of the preview to browse the tabs.


www.alt.lu 

Preview Tools such as Highlight 

and Zoom 

Cross plotted logs and depth 

range 

One log preview is created for 

each plot. 

Logs Bar provides overview of plotted logs 

Data shown in the logs preview can not be edited. Nevertheless some powerful 

utensils are assembled in a tool bar at the top of the preview. 

Highlight Tool 

Log Preview tools 

Percentage Log created from 

clustered data points in the crossplot 

chart. 

This tool allows interactively selecting a depth interval and highlighting the selected 

points in the cross-plot chart. The highlighted points can easily be identified as they 

appear slightly increased and compared to the points outside the selected interval 

they keep their color.


Highlight interval (left) and corresponding points in the cross-plot chart (right) 

To insert a Highlight interval: 

� Click the icon to switch on the highlight mode. 

� Move the cursor into the logs preview. 

� Hold down the SHIFT key and drag the mouse to open a box. 

� To highlight another interval simply hold down the SHIFT key again and 

drag a box. (Only one interval can be highlighted at a time.) 

� To leave the Highlight mode simple click on the icon again. 

The highlight tool can be particularly useful to identify clouds of data points which 

can be clustered in a next step. Note, the highlight tool can only be applied to the 

logs preview. If you wish to select points from the cross-plot and highlight them in 

the logs preview, use the cluster method explained in 1.8.3 Building Data Clusters. 

Cluster to Borehole 

As already mentioned earlier, a new Percentage Log is created in the logs preview if 

at least one cluster has been created in the cross-plot chart. 

To add this Percentage log to the borehole document and make it part of the log 

chart, click the icon. 

Please note that the log copied to the borehole document is not updated if clusters 

are deleted or added afterwards (see also 1.8.3 Building Data Clusters).


www.alt.lu 

Zoom Options 

The zoom options can be applied to the logs preview as well as to the cross-plot 

chart. It depends on where you click with your mouse or drag the zoom window. 

To create a Zoom Window and enlarge the section within the window, click the 

icon to enable the option. Move your cursor into the logs preview or cross-plot 

chart and drag the mouse to open a rectangle. You have to click the icon again if you 

wish to zoom in further. 

Drag the mouse to open the zoom window 

To toggle between the current and former zoom status, select the icon and click 

into logs preview or cross-plot chart next. 

Select the icon and click into the preview or chart to zoom out to the maximum 

depth range respectively the maximum X and Y scale determined from the log max 

and min values. 

If you click the Zoom Depth Range icon the preview will show the entire 

selected depth range (red shaded area). 

Depth Range Selection 

Right click on the red shaded area in the Logs Preview and select Depth Range from 

the context menu. Adjust your depth range using the option displayed in the 

dialogue box (same options as in 1.8.4.1 Depth Range Selection).

1.8.2.3 Cluster Statistics 

1.8.3 Building Data Clusters 


You also extend or decrease the depth range interactively by placing your cursor on 

top of the upper or lower limit of the red shaded area. Once your cursor shape 

changes to a double sided vertical arrow hold the left mouse button down drag your 

mouse. 

The Cluster Bar provides for each cluster (see 1.8.3 Building Data Clusters) the 

following statistical information for the data points falling into the cluster frame: 

� Total count of points in the cluster. 

� Fraction of the number of points in the cluster in relation to the total 

number of points in the cross-plot. 

� The Min, Max and Ave (arithmetic mean) values of the X and Y 

component data values in the cluster. 

� Geometric Mean of clustered points for X and Y component. 

� Harmonic Mean of clustered points for X and Y component. 

� Standard Deviation of clustered points for X and Y component. 

If a pattern from a lithology dictionary has been assigned to a cluster the graphical 

pattern and its name are shown in the first two columns of the Cluster Bar. 

You can right click on a row in the Cluster Bar to open a flying menu that allows 

removal of the cluster (Delete) and export of the displayed information using Copy 

and paste (e.g. into Microsoft EXCEL) or Export into an ASCII file. The statistics 

as shown in the Cluster Bar can be exported but it is also possible to export the 

clustered data points. 

A cluster is an interactively created subset of data points from the cross-plot chart. 

Clusters can be used to create litho classes and show them in the Borehole 

Document as Lithology Log. They can also be used as “interactive filter” allowing 

the user to exclude points when adding a regression line to a data set. 

Before building clusters you should open the Cluster Settings dialog box. 

Cluster Settings 

� Open the cluster settings from the menu View > Cluster Settings or click 

the icon in the toolbar.


www.alt.lu 

Cluster Settings dialog box 

� You can set a Title that identifies your clusters when saved into a 

Crossplot Chart Cluster (*.CCC) file. Use the Save as and Load button to 

store and reload clusters. 

� In the Pattern Dictionary section click the Change button to load a 

Lithology Dictionary (*.LTH) file containing the patterns you would like to 

assign to each cluster. You can create clusters without having a dictionary 

loaded but you do not get a default naming of your clusters as these are 

automatically determined from the assigned pattern. 

� The frame of your cluster is always visible if you have the cluster mode 

enabled. If your chart is not in cluster mode it depends on the Display 

Clusters flag if the display is hidden or not. 

� Even if you assign a pattern to each cluster you do not display the pattern 

within the cluster if the Fill Clusters option is unchecked. 

� If you fill your clusters you have the choice to fill it with the graphical 

pattern or the Associated Color of each pattern (set in LithCAD). 

Cluster with pattern fill (left) and without (right)

Creating a Cluster 

� Move your cursor to the cross-plot chart. 


� While holding down the SHIFT key click with the left mouse button to set 

points of a polygon encircling the points you wish to cluster. 

� After setting the last point release the SHIFT key and move the mouse to 

automatically close the cluster frame. 

Insert a cluster by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking to set the edge points of a polygon 

For each cluster a new row will be added to the Cluster Bar (see 1.8.2.3 Cluster 

Statistics). 

To assign a color or pattern fill to the cluster (a 

litho dictionary must already be loaded; open the 

Cluster Settings to load a dictionary) double click 

into the new cluster frame or right click and choose 

Cluster Settings. Assign a name and choose 

from a solid color fill or assign a pattern. 

To delete a cluster, simply hold down the CTRL key and click into the 

corresponding cluster or right click on the corresponding row in the Cluster Bar and 

choose the Delete option.


www.alt.lu 

Creating a Percentage Log from data clusters 

With the first cluster created a new Percentage Log appears in the Logs Preview 

(Logs Bar) displaying the litho class chosen for the cluster at depth positions 

determined from the clustered data points. 

Simple clustering (left) and display of litho classes in a Percentage Log (left) 

The Percentage Log contains one component for each cluster. If two cluster frames 

overlap the components will be mixed 50:50. A more sophisticated approach for this 

problem might be released in a future WellCAD version. The current behavior has 

been implemented to simply identify areas with overlapping clusters. 

If you wish to create a copy of the Percentage Log shown in the logs preview and 

add it to the underlying Borehole Document click the icon located in the tool 

bar on top of the logs preview. If you change or add clusters in the cross-plot 

afterwards these changes will not be updated in the Percentage Log copied to the 

borehole document as no dynamic link exists.

1.8.4 Adding Regression 

1.8.4.1 Regression Types 


You can add regression lines to the cross-plot chart, individual plots, classified 

points or a data cluster. To do so: 

� Select Edit > Add Regression from the menu. The Regression Settings 

dialog box opens. 

Regression Settings dialog box 

In the Type tab you can set a title identifying the regression object or WellCAD will 

add a default title for you. 

If you click on the drop down control for the regression Type you will get a list of 

supported regression options. Together with the different fitting Criteria you will 

have the following regression options: 

� Linear fit (Y on X, X on Y and RMA (Reduced Major Axis)). 

Calculates the least squares fit for a line represented by the formula: 

y � mx � b 

where m is the slope and b is the intercept. 

� Second, Third and Fourth order Polynomial fit (Y on X and X on Y). 

Calculates the least squares fit through points by using the following equation: 

where b and c1 … c4 are constants. 

2 3 

y � b � c1x 

� c2 

x � c3x 

� 

c 

4 

x 

4


www.alt.lu 

� Logarithmic fit (Y on X, X on Y and RMA (Reduced Major Axis)). 

Calculates the least squares fit through points by using the following equation, 

Y 

Y on X 

RMA 

y c log x � b 

� 10 

where c and b are constants and log10 is the base 10 logarithm function. 

� Exponential fit (Y on X, X on Y and RMA (Reduced Major Axis)). 


bx 

y � ce 

where c and b are constants and e is the base of the natural logarithm. 

� Power fit (Y on X, X on Y and RMA (Reduced Major Axis)). 


where c and b are constants. 

b 

y � cx 

The following figure illustrates the difference between Y on X, X on Y and RMA 

regression for a linear fit. 

X on Y 

X 

Comparison of different regression criteria.

1.8.4.2 Regression Data Source 

1.8.4.3 Regression Display Options 


The Data Source tab of the Regression 

Settings dialog box provides a tree 

control listing all plots, classifications 

and clusters available in the cross-plot 

chart. 

By checking the plots (listed by their 

given plot title) and clusters (name 

derived from assigned lithology pattern) 

you can specify which data points will be 

considered by the regression algorithm. 

In the example shown in the figure 

above all points from Plot 1 and Plot 2 Regression Settings Data Source selection 

falling into Cluster 1 will be taken into 

account. If color and/or symbol classifications have been applied to the data a 

further level will be available in the tree control allowing the restriction of cross 

plotted points down to a single class. 

The different tools in the Options tab 

allow settings with respect to the 

presentation of the regression line and 

its details. Note that the Legend 

options are only available in the Print 

Layout view explained in the Layout 

and Formatting paragraph. 

The Pen color, style and width settings 

determine the appearance of the 

regression line. Its length, usually limited 

through the lowest and highest data 

point taken into account, can be 

extended using the Extend controls. 

Settings related to the presentation of the 

regression line. 

The Legend section (only in the Print 

Layout view) contains a number of options that can be hidden or displayed in the 

legend belonging to a certain regression line. E.g. the display of the equation 

determined from the least squares fit can be displayed or hidden. An example is 

shown below.


www.alt.lu 

Line Style 

Display Type 

Equation 

R 2 value as a measure 

of the quality of 

correlation 

Regression Legend 

Once the regression line is displayed in the cross-plot chart you can double click on 

the line to retrieve the Regression Settings again. Double clicking on the 

regression legend will open the Regression Legend Settings dialog box which 

allows settings related to the appearance of the legend object (frame, background 

and font style). 

Double click line for 

Regression Settings 

Double click for 

Legend Settings 

Cross-plot chart with regression 

Regression Title 

Data Source


Right click on the regression line to open a flying menu. Besides accessing the 

Regression Settings and the option to Delete a regression object you can trigger the 

generation of a new Formula Log based on the equation determined from the 

regression. 

1.8.4.4 Creating a new Formula Log from a regression equation 

The following example shows a cross-plot of a porosity log versus true porosity 

measured on core plugs. A linear regression has been applied. 

A right click on the regression line brought up a flying menu with the option Add 

Formula to Borehole. Selecting this option the Formula dialog box opens with the 

equation determined from the cross-plot already entered. 

Cross-plot with Formula settings dialog box opened on top 

A click on OK created a new Formula Log with porosity log counts calibrated to 

true porosity. 

1.8.5 Layout and Formatting 

Besides using the cross-plot workspace to analyze the data on screen it is important 

to allow the layout of the chart to be arranged nicely and the chart to be equipped 

with titles, legends and annotations.


www.alt.lu 

Click on the Print Layout icon in the Chart Bar. Your cross plot will be 

displayed in a print preview like window. You can add titles, annotation and legend 

and move and resize each of the objects (i.e. cross-plot, title, legends and 

annotations). If you click on an object it will be selected, indicated by a frame with 

handles to resize the object. 

Handles to 

resize 

Drag the vertical or 

horizontal axis to 

resize the plot area 

Cross-plot chart selected in Print Layout. Dragging the handles on the frame allow resizing. 

If you drag the handles of the frame you can resize the entire object. The cross-plot 

chart allows in addition to drag the X- and Y-axis adjusting the plot size. If necessary 

the font sizes will automatically adjusted to avoid truncation of strings. 

Under the File menu use the Print Setup and Page Setup options to define page 

size and margins. 

1.8.5.1 Adding and formatting legends and titles 

The View menu contains options to add a main title, plot legend and cluster legend. 

For each regression line a regression legend can be displayed. Along with the 

annotation tool the cross-plot chart can be filled with supplementary information in 

addition to the cross-plotted data points.

Annotation 

Clusters Legend 

Plot Legend 

Chart Title 

Chart Title 



Cross-plot chart with title, legends and annotations. 

Use Edit > Add Title to get the title object displayed on the cross-plot chart. At 

first the Title Settings dialog will open with the chart title preset as specified in the 

Chart Settings dialog box (see 1.8.1.2 Chart Settings). Other options of the Title 

Settings allow modifications of the title box layout and font style.


www.alt.lu 

Title Settings dialog box 

Once the title is displayed the Title Settings dialog box can be retrieved when 

double clicking on the title, or right click on it and select Settings from the flying 

menu. 

To delete the title use the Delete option from the flying menu (right click on the 

title) or select the title and hit the Delete key on your keyboard. 

Only one chart title can be inserted. The Annotation tool can be used to add subtitles. 

A selected title box can be positioned anywhere in the view by dragging it to its new 

position and its size can be altered using the handles displayed on the frame 

surrounding the selected object. The font size will automatically adjust if the box is 

to small to display the string at its original font size. 

Handles to resize the title 

box

Plot Legend 


The Plot Legend displays information about the different data series plotted and 

color / symbol classifications applied. The following figure shows an example of a 

porosity versus permeability cross-plot legend with different plots and 

classifications. 

To add a Plot Legend select Edit > Add Plot Legend. 

Plot title 

Data Series 

Classification 

Example of a Plot Legend 

Plot Legend layout settings can be altered when double clicking on the legend. 

Alternatively you can right click on the legend and select the Settings option from 

the flying menu. 

A selected legend box can be positioned anywhere in the view by dragging it to its 

new position and its size can be altered using the handles displayed on the frame 

surrounding the selected object. The font size will automatically be adjusted if the 

box is to small to display the legend strings at its original font size as selected in the 

Legend Settings. 

Clusters Legend 

If you wish to include the information displayed in the Cluster Bar at the bottom of 

the cross-plot workspace, select Edit > Add Clusters Legend. At first the Cluster 

Legend Settings dialog box will open. Besides making settings related to the layout 

of the legend box you can select which statistical information from the Cluster Bar is 

displayed in the legend.


www.alt.lu 

Selection of 

information displayed 

in the legend 

Cluster Legend Settings dialog box 

Once the legend is displayed the settings dialog box can be retrieved when double 

clicking on the legend, or right click on it and select Settings from the flying menu. 

A selected legend box can be positioned anywhere in the view by dragging it to its 

new position and its size can be altered using the handles displayed on the frame 

surrounding the selected object. The font size will automatically be adjusted if the 

box is to small to display the legend strings at its original font size as selected in the 

Legend Settings. 


The option to insert a regression legend is part 

of the Regression Settings. To get display 

the regression settings dialog box double click 

on the regression line. To retrieve the layout 

settings, double click on the legend. 

Regression legends can be positioned and 

resized as other legends as well. 

Regression Legend settings

1.8.5.2 Inserting Annotations 


The annotation tools are the same as for the Borehole Document. Arrows, strings, 

bitmaps and callouts can be added to your cross-plot chart. As opposed to the 

Borehole Document no annotation layers need to be created first. 

Display the Annotation Bar or Annotation MiniBar selecting the corresponding 

option from View > Toolbars (or press CTRL + 5 respectively CTRL + 6). 

Details of the annotation tools can be found in 1.6 Annotations. 

1.8.5.3 Printing and graphic file export 

Once you have setup the cross-plot chart, extended it with annotations and adjusted 

its layout, you have basically two options to output the graphics: 

� Use File > Export to create a Bitmap (*.BMP), JPEG (*.jpg), Windows 

Enhanced Metafile (*.EMF) or other graphic file format. 

� Use File > Print Setup, Page Setup and Print to define the print page 

size and send the cross-plot to a printer for a hardcopy or printer driver to 

create a *.PDF. 

Page Setup 

The Page Setup option allows to 

add margins on each side of the 

cross-plot. E.g. if you wish to print 

only on the upper half of an A4 

sheet, set the Bottom margin to 

140mm. 

1.8.5.4 Using cross-plot chart templates 

Page Setup dialog box 

It is possible to save a template of your cross-plot chart into a separate Chart 

Template File (*.CHT). Please note that this is different from saving your cross-plot 

charts as part of a Borehole Document template file. 

A Chart Template stores only the layout and setup information of your current 

cross-plot chart. No data or information about the borehole document or other


www.alt.lu 

Chart Templates 

Folder containing 

Chart Templates 

charts is stored. You save a Chart Template using the View > Save Chart 

Template option with your cross-plot window being active. 

Chart Templates store data series (log title and type but no data) and the entire 

layout including title, legends and annotations. Cluster and regressions are part of 

the *.CHT file as well. 

Chart Templates can not be applied to an existing chart as opposed to applying a 

document template to an existing borehole document. The intended way to use the 

Chart Template is to create a new cross-plot chart from it. To do so: 

� Open the Borehole Document (*.WCL file) containing the source data. 

� Open the cross-plot tool using Tools > Crossplot or clicking the 

icon. 

� In the Chart Settings dialog box use the Browse button to locate the 

folder containing your Chart Template. Select the desired template from 

the list afterwards. (If your *.WCL file contains already a cross-plot, select 

the New option in the dialog box that opens to get the Chart Settings 

displayed.) 

Selecting a template in the first step of the Chart Settings 

� When clicking Next WellCAD will try to establish a link to the logs of the 

Borehole Document and load data into the cross-plot based on the data 

series information (log title and log type) stored in the Chart Template.

Appendix A 

APPENDIX A - 231 

The following pages provide a summary of all Log types used in WellCAD. Their 

characteristics are described as well as presentation settings (main settings) and 

interactive editing methods.

232 - APPENDIX A 

Well / Formula Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

The Well Log handles single point data sampled at a constant rate. It is used to 

display any kind of equally sampled geophysical data as curve (e.g. Gamma Ray, 

Density, Resistivity, Porosity, Transit Time). Well Log data is generally imported 

from LAS, LIS, DLIS or ASCII files (*.txt, *.csv) but can also be generated 

interactively (e.g. grain size curve in core description). 

The sampling rate of a Well Log is automatically set when data is imported from a 

file. It is recalculated from the number of data points and the distance between the 

top and bottom depth. If a Well Log is created from scratch the user will be asked to 

provide the sampling interval. 

An option to re-sample a selected Well Log can be found in the Process > 

Common menu. 

Formula Logs are calculated curves using one or more Well Logs as data source. 

They are dynamically linked to Well Logs and the log type specific settings are the 

same. 

Data Format: 

E.g. 

Depth, Data


Well Log data is always displayed as single curve. 

Inserting a new Well Log: 

Well Log curve 


Well Logs are automatically created when importing data sets from LAS, LIS, DLIS 

or ASCII files. Formula logs are usually the output of the Formula Parser (see 1.5.1 

Formula Parser). To create an empty Well Log that can be filled with data using one 

of the interactive methods described below do the following: 

� Open the Edit > Insert New Log menu. 

� Select the Well Log option. 

A dialog box asking for sampling rate, default value and depth interval pops up. 

Provide depth interval, sampling rate to initialize a Well Log 

This information is needed to initialize the Well Log and allocate the necessary 

resources. If necessary, the depth range can be extended using the Extend option


www.alt.lu 

from flying menu or Edit > Extend Logs. The Default Value can be any value 

including the “No Data” (NULL) value. The “No Data” value must be defined in 

the Default Settings of the Well Log prior to inserting a new log. 

Next the Main Settings dialog box will be displayed. 

Formula Logs can be created from the Edit > Insert New Log menu as well. The 

Formula Parser will be displayed instead of the Main Settings (see 1.5.1 Formula 

Parser). 

Main Settings: 

Well Log Settings dialog box 

Title: 

Enter the title that identifies the log. The title will be displayed in the Title area of 

the log handle. 

Unit: 

Enter the unit that corresponds to the stored data set. The unit string appears in the 

Properties area of the log handle, assumed the Properties area is large enough (or the 

font size small enough) to display the entire string.


Scale: 

The horizontal scale of the Well Log column can be changed by editing the numbers 

in the min and max edit boxes. The values displayed next to the edit boxes show 

the total minimum and maximum value of the data set. 

The scale values chosen will be displayed in the Properties area of the log handle if 

the size of the area is large enough. 

Linear / Logarithmic: 

To change the horizontal scale of the Well Log column from linear to logarithmic, 

click on the corresponding radio button. The vertical grid frequency of a Well Log in 

logarithmic mode is controlled by the decades option. To graphically represent the 

data correctly and to avoid log wrap the order of the magnitude between minimum 

and maximum scale value has to be taken into account. A log with a minimum of 8 

and a maximum of 250 covers two decades (3 – 30 and 30 – 300). WellCAD sets the 

scale limits as follows: The maximum scale value that has been entered is rounded 

up to a multiple of the highest power of ten (e.g. 250 will be rounded up to 300). 

Then the number of decades is used to calculate the minimum value (e.g. if the max. 

is 300 and decades is 2 the min. will be 3). The values will be set automatically 

without replacing the entries of max and min scale. 

Overwrite depth grids: 

If this option is checked the grid lines belonging to the log will be covert by the 

curve and the opaque shading if one has been chosen. 

Reverse: 

Grid lines on top (left) and grid lines overwritten by the curve (right) 

Normally the curve is drawn with increasing values from left to right. If the 

Reversed option has been selected the curve is drawn with the values increasing


www.alt.lu 

from right to left. Also the scale values in the Properties area of the log handle will 

be swapped. 

Curve with normal scale (left) and reversed scale (right) 

Display curve backup: 

To display the curve backup (wrap around) check this option. 

Curve with backup (left) and without curve wrap around displayed (right) 

Grid: 

In order to display vertical grid lines the user has the option to display major and 

minor grid lines. Tick the corresponding Major and Minor check box to toggle the 

display. To define the grid step simply enter a number into the Major and Minor 

edit boxes. 

Click the Settings… button to access the Grid Lines Settings dialog box.

Select the presentation style 

for each grid line type 


The user can select the grid line Style, thickness (Weight) and Color for each grid 

type separately. The grid step can be set in the Spacing field. 

Pen: 

The appearance of the curve can be changed in Color, line Style and line Width. To 

do so, select the new parameter from the corresponding drop down list. 

In some cases it might be possible that different line styles appear always as solid 

line or differences in line thickness (Weight) cannot be seen. One reason for this 

behavior can be the settings of your graphic card, in particular the selected 

resolution or optimization settings. 

Shading: 

Shading a Well Log triggers WellCAD to fill the area between log border and curve 

with a solid color or the colors derived from a palette. The curve will be drawn in 

black. The shading color corresponds to the selected Pen color. For gradient color 

shading the shading colors will automatically derived from the selected color palette 

(the pen color will still be used for the curve). From the Pos. drop down list choose 

whether you want to shade the area left or right of the curve. A selection of none 

disables the shading. 

The Type drop down list offers three different kinds of shading methods: 

- Opaque: The shading color covers everything that is below. Other log data will 

be covered if it is drawn before and the Overwrite Depth Grids option has 

been selected. The order of drawing can be seen from the order of log titles. 

The one on top is drawn first, the one at the bottom will be drawn last.


www.alt.lu 

Log 1 is drawn first 

Log 2 is drawn next 

Log 3 is drawn on top 

- Transparent: The shaded area appears translucent. Grid lines shine through as 

well as curves. If two transparent shading colors are superimposed a third color 

will be composed automatically. 

- Combined: In combined shading mode the area between two curves can be 

shaded. To do so, select both logs and call up the Main Settings Dialog box. 

Enable shading for both logs and set the shading type to Combined. Click OK 

and set a Pen color (shading color) for each of the two logs. 

- Horiz. / Vert. Gradient: In horizontal gradient shading mode the area 

between log border and curve will be shaded with a color determined from 

current data value and selected color palette. The range of color values in the 

color palette represents the range of data values between the Low and High 

scale values set. Horizontal and vertical is the direction in which the color 

gradient is applied. 

Click the Palette button to open the Palette Editor (see 1.5.4 Color Palette 

Design).

Classification: 



(classes). Refer to 1.5.5 Setting up Classifications for details about how to set up a 

classification for your log. 

Position: 

You can set the left and right position of the log track in selected units. The default 

unit displayed is the one set for the Ruler Bar (see 1.3.2.4 Positioning Logs). 

Set the left and right limits of the log border and select the unit you want the position to be measured in. 

Filter: 

The Filter function enables you to smooth your log data display on a moving 

average basis. By selecting a filter width of 5, WellCAD will filter the log curve using 

a moving average of five subsequent data points. The display of spiky data can be 

smoothed. 

This filter does not change the data itself, it is applied “on the fly” when the data is 

displayed on screen and leaves the original data untouched. The Process > 

Common menu offers filter algorithms that will create a new, filtered data set. 

Editing Methods: 

The Well Log can be edited interactively. To do so the log must be selected and not 

locked (see 1.3.3.1 Base Settings). As soon as the mouse pointer is in the data area of 

the log the cursor shape changes to a pen symbol. If the user clicks and drags the 

mouse a curve is drawn and corresponding data points are generated. The sampling 

rate set for the Well Log influences the roughness of the curve significantly. The 

smaller the sampling interval, the smoother the curve comes out. Block input of data 

is possible when holding the SHIFT key down while dragging the mouse (SHIFT 

+ CTRL and drag to snap to nearest starting point). To erase data the CTRL key 

must be pressed while dragging the mouse.


www.alt.lu 

drag, SHIFT + drag, CTRL + drag 

Well Log data can also be edited using the tabular editor. How to use he tabular 

editor is described in (1.3.2.14 The Tabular Editor). Note that the depth values of a 

Well Log cannot be edited in order to maintain a constant sampling rate. 

Flying Menu: 

Right click on the log handle to display the Flying Menu. 

Well Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 

Get access to Base, Main and Title Settings of the log. If it is a Formula Log one 

can access the Formula Editor as well. 

Editor: 

Opens the tabular editor of the log. 

Cut: 

Copies the data to the clipboard and removes the data set from the borehole 

document.


Copy: 

Copies the data set to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into a borehole 

document or an application like MS Excel. 

Clear Contents: 

Erases all data from the log without removing the log from the document. 

Delete: 

Removes the log and its data from the borehole document. 

Slice at: 

Splits the data set into upper and lower part. 

Shift by: 

Performs a constant depth shift of the entire data set. 

Extend: 

You can extend the data range of the Well Log and allocate the necessary resources 

to store the data. No Data values will be inserted by default. 

Conversion to other log types: 

A Well Log can be converted to a Mud Log data type. To do so select the Convert 

Log To option from the Edit menu and choose Mud Log. 

If the Well Log has a classification it can be converted to a Litho Log. One litho 

pattern can be assigned to each class. 

Default Settings: 

Default settings are used in WellCAD when creating a new Well Log (either 

automatic when importing data or manually by the user). 

To display the Default Settings dialog box select Tools > Options and click the 

Well Log entry under the Logs knot.


www.alt.lu 

Well Log default settings 

Possible options the user can set are: 

Position: 

Set the default position of a new inserted Well Log defining its left and right border. 

NULL value: 

Enter a value that is used to indicate and handle absent data values. Most commonly 

–999 or –999.25 are used. 

Palette: 


Design). 

Major and Minor Grid Lines: 

Set line style, weight and color you want to use as default for the vertical grid lines.

Mud Log 

Description: 


The Mud Log data type handles any depth to value based data. Imported from LAS, 

LIS, DLIS or ASCII files (*.txt, *.csv) or generated interactively, the Mud Log is 

used to display data such as DST data, bit penetration rates or core recovery data. 

The depth sample rate does not have to be constant. 

Data Format: 

E.g. 


Depth, Data 

Each data value is represented as bar or symbol. The horizontal extend of the bar or 

horizontal position of the symbol reflects the data value. Different line types can be 

used to interconnect data points. 

Mud Log data can be displayed as bar, line, symbol or a combination of the former styles with the value 

displayed as string


www.alt.lu 

Inserting a new Mud Log: 

Mud Logs are automatically created when importing data sets from LAS, LIS, DLIS 

or ASCII files. To create an empty Mud Log do the following: 


� Select the Mud Log option. 

The Main Settings dialog box is displayed next. 


Mud Log Settings dialog box 

Title: 


the log handle (see 1.3.3.3 Title Settings). 

Unit: 





Scale: 

The horizontal scale of the Mud Log column can be changed by editing the numbers 

in the min and max edit boxes. The values displayed next to the edit boxes show 

the total minimum and maximum value of the data set. 




To change the horizontal scale of the Mud Log column from linear to logarithmic, 

click on the corresponding radio button. The vertical grid frequency of a Mud Log in 






up to a multiple of the highest power of 10 (e.g. 250 will be rounded up to 300). 



without replacing the entries of max and min scale 



displayed data. 

Grid lines on top (left) and grid lines overwritten by the curve (right) 

Reverse: 

Normally the data is displayed with increasing values from left to right. If the 

Reversed option has been selected the curve is drawn with the values increasing 

from right to left. Also the scale values in the Properties area of the log handle will 

be swapped.


www.alt.lu 



Grid: 

In order to display vertical grid lines the user has the option to display major and 

minor grid lines. Tick the corresponding Major and Minor check box to toggle the 

display. To define the grid step simply enter a number into the Major and Minor 

edit boxes. 

Click the Settings… button to access the Grid Lines Settings dialog box. 



Style: 

Mud Log data can be presented in many ways. The following figures will show all of 

them. Combinations of display styles are possible. 

Fixed Bar (left) and Fixed Bar with polarity (right) 

In Fixed Bar style each data point is represented as bar of discrete thickness. You 

can change the thickness of the bar from 0.1 to 5 mm. If the data is displayed with


polarity positive data values extend to the right and negative values to the left of the 

zero level. 

Dynamic Bar (left) and Dynamic Bar with polarity (right) 

In Dynamic Bar style upper and lower limits of adjacent data points are linked to 

form a continuous dynamic bar. If the data is displayed with polarity positive data 

values extend to the right and negative values to the left of the zero level. 

As data is represented as bar of a certain height, you can set the point of depth 

correspondence (e.g. top, middle or bottom of bar) clicking the Advanced Button 

(see explanation further down). 

BarEdge Line (left) and Standard Line (right) 

The Bar Edge Line style links data points together to form a line, which is the 

envelope of the dynamic bar style. When data is displayed in Standard Line style all 

data points are connected to form a continuous interpolated line (similar to a Well 

Log curve). The thickness of the line drawn in Bar Edge and Standard style can be 

changed in the adjacent edit box. Simply enter a number that corresponds to the line 

thickness in tenths of millimeter.


www.alt.lu 

Symbol style (left) and Value style (right) 

Select a symbol (disk, square, triangle,…) from the Symbol drop down list that you 

want to display at the position that corresponds to each data value. You can also 

pick a symbol color. Each data value can be shown as a text string if the Value 

option is checked. The Value style must be combined with one of the remaining 

display styles. 


Clicking the Advanced button allows you setting the data point position for the bar 

styles. The two figures below illustrate the problem for a data point recorded at a 

depth of 1. 

Data point position set to 

middle of the bar 


bottom of the bar 

Select the option from the Advanced Settings dialog box that best fits your needs. 

For a Fixed Bar style the mid option might be appropriate while for the Dynamic 

Bar the top or bottom might be the best choice. Symbols are always drawn at the


correct depth. A combination of Symbol and bar style might help finding 

appropriate best data point position. 





Position: 

You can set the left and right position of the log column in selected units. The 

default unit displayed is the one set for the Ruler Bar (see 1.3.2.4 Positioning Logs). 


Pen Color: 

The color of bars and lines representing the data can be changed. To do so, select 

the new color from the corresponding drop down list. 

Shading: 

Shading a Mud Log triggers WellCAD to fill the area between log border and line 

with a solid color. The curve will be drawn in black. The shading color corresponds 

to the selected Pen color. From the Pos. drop down list choose whether you want 

to shade the area left or right of the curve. A selection of none disables the shading. 


- Opaque: The shading color covers everything underneath. Other log data will 



The one on top of the title stack is drawn first, the one at the bottom will be 

drawn last.


www.alt.lu 
















gradient is applied. 


Design).



The Mud Log can be edited interactively either with the mouse or by adding and 

changing data points in the tabular editor. The edition of values – depth and data 

value – in the tabular editor is explained in 1.3.2.14 The Tabular Editor. Adding and 

deleting data points using the mouse can be done the following way. 

Inserting a data point: 

� Select the Mud Log you want to edit. 

� Move the mouse pointer into the log column and press the SHIFT key. 

� The mouse pointer changes to a “data insert” shape. Position the tip of the 

pointer at the position you want to insert a new data point. Observe the 

Status Bar for the coordinates of the pointer position (depth and value). 

� Left Click to insert and record a data point. 

Deleting a data point: 

� Select the Mud Log. 

� Move the mouse pointer into the log column and press the CTRL key. 

� Left Click on the data point you want to delete. 

Changing depth and value of an existing data point: 

� Select the Mud Log. 

� Move the mouse pointer to the data point you wish to alter. 

� If the mouse pointer changes its shape to a horizontal or vertical arrow left 

click and drag the mouse to alter the data value or depth position. 

Drag the border to change data value (left) or depth position (right)


www.alt.lu 

Flying Menu: 


Mud Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 

Get access to Base, Main and Title Settings of the log. 

Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 



Erases all data without removing the log from the document. 

Slice at: 

Splits the data set into upper and lower part.

Shift by: 




The Mud Log can be converted to Well Log, Comment Log, Stacking Pattern Log 

and Depth Column Log. Select the log to convert and use one of the conversion 

option from the Edit > Convert Log To menu. 

Mud Log to Well Log: 

The Mud Log can be converted to a Well Log. The following dialog box will open: 

The Well Log requires a 


Choose whether an interpolation between data 

points is performed or not. 

As the Well Log data type requires a constant sampling rate you have to set a value 

for the depth-sampling interval. In addition you can choose whether an interpolation 

between data points is performed during re-sampling the data or not. 

If Do not interpolate is selected data points from the Mud Log will be taken when 

their depth matches the new depth of the Well Log determined by the sample rate. 

The Tolerance parameter allows finding the nearest value in the Mud Log within 

the range depth +/- Tolerance. If the closest Mud Log value is outside the tolerance 

limits a NULL value will be set. 

Use previous data repeats the last data while Interpolate performs a linear 

interpolation between the nearest Mud Log data points.


www.alt.lu 

Mud Log to Comment Log: 

Each data value is converted into a text string and displayed in a text box. 

Mud Log (left) converted to Comment Log (right) 

Mud Log to Depth Column Log: 

When selecting the Depth Column Log (short: Depth Log) as conversion option the 

following Conversion Options dialog box comes up. 

Select the type of data stored in 

the Mud Log 

As the Depth Log displays depth and time in different units you must specify the 

type of data currently handled in the Mud Log. E.g. if the data of the Mud Log is a 

depth in feet you have to select the depth in [ft] option in order to convert the data 

correctly and get a depth column axis in feet displayed. 

Possible options for the incoming data are: depth in [m], depth in [ft], time in 

[sec], time in [ms], time in [�s] and no special type.


Mud Log to Litho Log: 

When a classification has been defined the Mud Log can be converted into a Litho 

Log. A dialog box opens allowing to assign a litho pattern to each class. 


Default settings are applied when creating a new Mud Log (either automatic when 

importing data or manually by the user). 


Mud Log entry under the Logs knot. 

Mud Log default settings 

Defaults can be set concerning data display style, data point position (depth to bar 

correspondence), color palette and log position. The options have already been 

introduced in the description of the Main Settings further above.


Depth Column Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

The Depth Column Log (short: Depth Log) deals with any depth to value based 

data. Data points are displayed as depth axis. The log can be used to handle different 

depth systems (e.g. MD, TVD) but also allows generation of elevation or date/time 

axis. 

Data Format: 

E.g. 


Inserting a new Depth Log: 

Depth, Data 

Depth Column Log data presented as: Depth axis, date/time axis 

Depth Logs are automatically created when importing data sets from ASCII files or 

they are created as output of the Depth Matching and Borehole Deviation 

processes. To create an empty Depth Log that can be filled with data using one of 

the interactive methods described below do the following:


� Select the Depth Column Log option. 



Depth Log Settings dialog box 


Name: 

Enter the title of the depth column log. If conflicts with existing log titles occur (e.g. 

the name ‘Depth’ is already used by the master depth axis) hide the title and use the 

comment to display the log name (see: 1.3.3.3 Title Settings). 

Unit: 

Enter the unit that corresponds to the stored data set. Depth log data is displayed as 

depth axis (in feet or meter) or as a date/time axis. 

Reverse: 

Tick this option if you want to display an elevation axis where the values are counted 

negative downwards as opposed to the standard depth display in WellCAD where 

the values are counted and displayed positive downwards.


www.alt.lu 

A depth log with the Reverse flag set can still be selected as reference axis. 

Decimal places: 

Enter the number of decimals to be displayed in the depth string. Valid numbers are 

0 to 5. 

Horizontal Grid: 

To alter the appearance of the horizontal grid lines you have to define a Spacing 

first. The Spacing is measured in units set for the depth axis and is simply a 

reference interval for which the frequency of major and minor grid lines as well as 

the number of major/minor depth indicators (depth strings) can be set. 

Spacing set to 2 

Major grid line 

Minor grid line 

E.g. if a depth scale of 1:200 meters has been chosen with a Spacing set to 2. The 

displayed spacing interval will be every 2 meters. If the depth units are changed to 

feet, then the Spacing value of 2 will correspond to an interval of 2 feet. 

The user can toggle the display of major and/or minor grid lines using the Major & 

minor, Major, None options. 

More detailed settings for major, minor grid lines and the frequency of depth marker 

can be accessed when clicking the Advanced button. 

Scale: 

A scale of 1:100 means that the data acquired over an interval of 100 units (e.g. 100 

m depth) will be displayed on 1 unit (e.g. 1 m) of paper (or screen). 

Enter a new scale value into the corresponding edit box of the Depth Log Settings 

dialog. If the Link scale to master depth option is enabled the actual scale settings 

of the master depth axis (see: 1.4.1 Depth Axis) are applied. 

If you check the Link scale to master option the depth scale is determined from 

the Master Depth axis when making the Depth Log the reference axis of the 

borehole document (right click on log title and choose Use As Depth Scale).


Position: 

The depth axis column can be moved, positioned and resized the same way a log can 

be. Enter numbers for the Left and Right position of the column border in selected 

units. 

Standard depth scale / Display every: 

The main purpose of the Depth Log is to display a depth / time axis. You will 

recognize that even if only one data point is available a complete axis will be 

displayed with strings displayed according to the Horizontal Grid settings. In order 

to display a string for every data point (or every 2nd , 3rd , etc.) that really exists in your 

data set, you have to check the Display every option. Set a number other than 1if 

you want to display only every 2nd , 3rd ,… data point of the record set. 

One possible application of this option would be displaying seismic travel times 

(stored as Depth Log data) at distinct depth locations such as the borders of 

stratigraphic sequences. 

Date / Time: 

The Date / Time Format Settings dialog box is accessible only if the selected 

Unit is set to date/time. It provides further settings to control the display format 

of date and time stamps. 

Date / Time Format Settings dialog box


www.alt.lu 

Date: 

From the Format drop down list select the desired format for your date strings. If 

you want to display a date stamp every 12 hours you should enter a value of 720 in 

to the corresponding edit box. 

Time: 

Select the desired format for your time strings from the Format drop down list. 

GMT offset: 

To display your data corrected for a certain GMT offset enter the required value in 

the corresponding edit box. If the data stored corresponds to 6 a.m. GMT and you 

want to display a data/time string in GMT+1 enter a value of 60. 

Time Zero: 

If date/time data is handled in a Depth Log the data values stored correspond to 

seconds. You can use the Time Zero to define the initial date and time of your data 

column. E.g. the progress in depth during a drilling operation is monitored. For each 

measured depth the time in seconds since beginning of the drilling is stored in the 

Depth Log. The Time Zero would be set to date and time corresponding to the 

beginning of the drilling in order to read real dates and times from the displayed axis 

(see 1.7.3 Using Time Based Data). 


The Advanced Depth Settings dialog box provides further settings to control the 

appearance of major / minor horizontal and vertical grid lines. 

Advanced Settings dialog box


Items Count: 

For each Horizontal Grid Spacing set, you can define the number of indicators 

(depth strings), major grid lines and minor grid lines to be displayed. Usually one 

indicator and one major line is displayed per spacing. 

2 major and 4 minor subdivisions (left) and 1 major and 8 subdivisions (right) 

Depth Column Ticks: 

Depth Ticks are little extensions of the depth grid lines into the depth axis. The user 

has the choice to display these ticks on the left, right or on both sides of the depth 

axis column. Select the desired option from the drop down list. 

Ticks displayed on both, left and no side of the depth axis column 

Background: 

If the depth axis is superimposed to other log types it enhances the readability of 

depth strings when displaying them on an opaque background. 

Without (left) and with opaque background enabled (right)


www.alt.lu 

Major / Minor Grid Lines: 

Major and minor depth grid line thickness and color settings can be selected from 

the corresponding drop down lists. In addition the appearance style of major and 

minor tick marks can be chosen. 

Font: 

Displays the standard Font selection dialog box to choose a font for the depth 

strings shown within the depth axis. 


The Depth Column Log can only be edited interactively in the tabular editor (see 

1.3.2.14 The Tabular Editor). 

Flying Menu: 


Depth Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 


Editor: 

Opens the tabular editor of the log.


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 


Slice at: 


Shift by: 


Use as depth scale: 

If the depth column log data set does not contain depth reversals the Use as depth 

scale option becomes accessible. By choosing this option one can switch from the 

master depth axis being the linear axis and depth reference of the displayed data to 

the Depth Log becoming the linear depth axis. The data displayed will be stretched 

and/or squeezed accordingly. Even if the Status Bar and Tabular Editor show the 

new depth values the stored data has not been altered and still corresponds to the 

master depth axis. To reverse the process one can right click on the master depth axis 

and choose the Use as depth scale option from the master depth axis flying menu. 

This feature is useful if the user wants to generate a print out with a linear MD axis 

on one document and a linear TVD axis on another document. One could also 

think about borehole documents handling core depth and logger depth or depth and 

time side by side. 


The Depth Log can be converted into a Mud Log in order to access the 

presentation styles of Mud Logs. 


Default settings are applied when creating a new Depth Column Log (either 

automatic when importing data or manually by the user). These settings are shared 

with the Master Depth Axis.


www.alt.lu 

Depth Log default settings 

Defaults can be set concerning scale, grid display style and appearance of depth ticks 

as already explained in the Main Settings further above. The Vertical Grid Color 

is used as default for all log type which have no individual grid settings as Well or 

Mud Logs have.

Interval Log 

Description: 


The Interval Log handles single value data per depth interval. It is possible that 

consecutive intervals overlap each other. Data can be imported from ASCII files 

(*.txt, *.csv) or entered interactively. The Interval Log can be used, besides others, to 

display blocked curves, pump tests or grain size data. 

Data Format: 

E.g. 


TopDepth, BottomDepth, Data 

Interval Log data presented as: Bar, Segment, Bar Edge Line and Classified Bar


www.alt.lu 

Inserting a new Interval Log: 

Interval Logs are automatically created when importing data sets from ASCII files. 

To create an empty Interval Log that can be filled with data using one of the 

interactive methods described below do the following: 


� Select the Interval Log option. 



Title: 

Interval Log Settings dialog box 



Unit: 





Scale: 

The horizontal scale of the Interval Log column can be changed by editing the 

numbers in the min and max edit boxes. The values displayed next to the edit boxes 

show the total minimum and maximum value of the data set. 




To change the horizontal scale of the Mud Log column from linear to logarithmic, 

click on the corresponding radio button. The vertical grid frequency of a Mud Log in 






up to a multiple of the highest power of 10 (e.g. 250 will be rounded up to 300). 



without replacing the entries of max and min scale 



displayed data. 

Grid lines on top (left) and grid lines overwritten by the data (right) 

Grid: 

In order to display vertical grid lines you have the option to display major and minor 

grid lines. Tick the corresponding Major and Minor check box to toggle the display. 

To define the grid step simply enter a number into the Major and Minor edit boxes. 

Click the Settings… button to access the Grid Lines Settings dialog box.


www.alt.lu 





Style: 

Bar / Bar With Polarity: 

Bar (left) and Bar With Polarity (right) 

Data is displayed as a bar with the vertical extension of the bar given by top and 

bottom depth and the horizontal extension defined by the data value. If the data is 

displayed with polarity positive data values extend to the right and negative values to 

the left of the zero level.

Classified Bar: 

Classified Bar style 


This option is accessible only if a classification scheme for the data is applied (see 

Classification below). For each depth interval the corresponding classification 

column is filled with the chosen color. 

Bar Edge Line: 

Bar Edge Line 

If data is drawn in Bar Edge style only the edges of the bar representing the data are 

connected by a line. Only if the bars (depth intervals) stick to each other a 

continuous line is shown.


www.alt.lu 

Segment: 

Segment style 

In Segment style the edges of the bar representing the data are connected by a line. 

The shape of the beginning and end of the line can be modified to display e.g. an 

arrow tip (see Segment below). This way the start and end point of the depth 

interval can be highlighted. 

Segment: 

Segment Settings dialog box 

Various shapes can be assigned to the start and end point of the depth interval if the 

data display style has been set to Segment. The type of shape can be selected from 

the corresponding drop down lists, its width and height measured in tenth of 

millimeters can be defined in the corresponding edit boxes. 

Pen: 

The appearance of the lines can be changed in Color, line Style and line Width. To 

do so, select the new parameter from the corresponding drop down list.


In some cases it might be possible that different line styles appear always as solid 

line or differences in line thickness (Weight) cannot be seen. One reason for this 

behavior can be the settings of your graphic card, in particular the selected 

resolution or optimization settings. 

Shading: 

Shading an Interval Log triggers WellCAD to fill the area between log border and 

line with a solid color if the data display style in Bar Edge. The shading color 

corresponds to the selected Pen color. From the Pos. drop down list choose 

whether you want to shade the area left or right of the line. A selection of none 

disables the shading. 


- Opaque: The shading color covers everything that is below. Other log data will 



The one on top is drawn first, the one at the bottom will be drawn last. 

- 
















gradient is applied.


www.alt.lu 


Design). 

Position: 









The Interval Log can be edited interactively in Tabular Editor as well as on screen 

with your mouse. 

To add, edit or delete data points using the tabular editor refer to 1.3.2.14 The 

Tabular Editor for more details. 

To insert a new data point using your mouse, do the following:


Inserting data: 

� Select the Interval Log you want to edit. 



pointer at the position you want to insert a new data interval. Observe the 


� Left click and drag to insert and record a data interval. With a single click you 

will insert a bar of a default height. 

Deleting data: 

� Select the Interval Log. 


� Left click on the data point you want to delete. 

Changing depth and value of an existing data interval: 

� Select the Interval Log. 

� Move the mouse pointer to the data point you wish to alter. 

� If the mouse pointer changes its shape to a horizontal or vertical arrow left 

click and drag the mouse to alter the data value or depth position. 

Flying Menu: 

Drag the border to change data value (left) or depth position (right) 

Right click on the log handle to display the Flying Menu.


www.alt.lu 

Interval Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 




Slice at: 


Shift by: 

Performs a constant depth shift of the entire data set.



The Interval Log can be converted into a Mud Log. As data from a depth interval 

will be converted to a point depth the user will have to make some conversion 

settings. 

Conversion of Interval to Mud Log data 

Value: 

As it is allowed that data intervals overlap each other in the Interval Log you have to 

specify whether the minimum, maximum or average value found in the overlap will 

be converted. 

Attach Depth To: 

A decision must be made regarding the depth as well. Does the new Mud log depth 

point correspond to the Top, Middle or Bottom of the Interval Log data interval? 


Interval Log (track 1) and three possible conversions to 

Mud Log (track 2,3 and 4) 

Default settings are applied when creating a new Interval Log (either automatic 

when importing data or manually by the user). 


Interval Log entry under the Logs knot.


www.alt.lu 

Interval Log default settings 

Defaults can be set concerning the log position, color palette, vertical grid lines and 

the minimum thickness allowed to display. The latter is useful to retrieve a default 

bar height when inserting data interactively with a simple click instead of dragging 

the mouse. In addition, depth intervals can not be smaller than the Min. Thickness 

when data is interactively inserted.

Comment Log 

Description: 


The Comment Log handles text in boxes, where a top and bottom depth is used to 

define each boxes extension. Comment Logs are used to handle any kind of depth 

related descriptions within a borehole document (e.g. lithology descriptions, remarks 

etc.). 


Data Format: 

E.g. 


TopDepth, BottomDepth, Text 

Comment Log data can be presented in different font styles and orientations


www.alt.lu 

Inserting a new Comment Log: 

Comment Logs are automatically created when importing data sets from ASCII files. 

To create an empty Comment Log that can be filled with data using one of the 

interactive methods described below do the following: 


� Select the Comment Log option. 



Comment Log Settings dialog box 

Title: 



Box Style: 

Pinches are little marks displayed to indicate the recorded depth interval while the 

box allocated to display the entire text is larger. The Box Style option lets the user 

define on which side of the text box pinches appear. Pinches are set automatically if 

the Allow Pinches option is enabled. Otherwise the text box is not adjusted to 

display the entire string and text might be cropped.

Format: 


From left to right: Pinches left, centered, right, none and Pinches not allowed 

The difference between Plain Text and Rich Text (RTF) is that text can be 

formatted inside each text box individually if the RTF option is enabled. The text 

editor is very similar to the MS WordPad. In Plain Text only the font style for the 

entire log can be set. 

Plain Text (left) and Rich Text (right) 

Position: 



Set the left and right limits of the log border and select the unit you want the position to be measured in


www.alt.lu 

Repeat Text: 

The user can enable the option to repeat the display of text within a text box at 

distinct intervals measured in millimeter (e.g. the name of a reservoir zone is 

displayed in a single Comment Log box that covers multiple printed pages. To 

display the name on each printed page the Repeat Text option could be enabled.). 

Font: 

Opens the standard Font selection dialog box to choose the font for the text display 

(in Plain Text). 

Orientation: 

Define the way each text string is positioned within a box. 

Allows changing the orientation of text within the text box 

Depth Indicator: 

Allow small depth marker strings to be displayed at the top and/or bottom of each 

box. 

Depth Marker 

Specify if depth indicators should appear on top and/or bottom of each text box



Comment Log data can be edited interactively in the Tabular Editor (see 1.3.2.14 

The Tabular Editor) as well as in the log column itself. Adding and deleting text 

boxes using the mouse can be done in one of the following ways. 

Inserting a text box: 

� Select the Comment Log you want to edit. 



pointer at the position you want to start inserting a new text box. Observe 

the Status Bar for the coordinates of the pointer position (depth). 

� Left Click and drag the mouse to insert a new text box and record interval 

top and bottom. 

Inserting Text: 

� Select the Comment Log you want to edit. 

� Move the mouse pointer into the log column. Once you are on top of a 

text box your cursor symbol changes to a pen. 

� Left click to display the text editor that lets you edit your descriptions. 

Note that the layout and functionality of the text editor depends on the text 

format selected (Plain Text or Rich Text). 

Plain Text editor (left). The Rich Text editor (right) provides additional text formatting options. 


� Select the Comment Log. 

� Move the mouse pointer into the log column and press the CTRL key.


www.alt.lu 

� Left Click on the text box you want to delete. 

Changing the depth of an existing box: 

� Select the Comment Log. 

� Move the mouse pointer to the top or bottom border of the box. 

� If the mouse pointer changes its shape to a vertical arrow left click and drag 

the mouse to alter the data value or depth position. 

Auto completion of words: 

Click if cursor changes shape and drag to extend the depth interval. 

You can enable the text auto completion under Tools > Options > Logs > Comment Log. 

All words the user types into the text boxes are stored in a dictionary. As soon as the user 

typed the first three characters of a word WellCAD will suggest the words beginning 

with the same first three characters found in the dictionary for auto completion. The 

suggestions are displayed as a tick mark. Simply press the enter key to accept a 

suggestion otherwise continue typing. 

Flying Menu: 


Comment Log Flying Menu



Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 



Erases all data from the log without removing the data container from the 

document. 

Slice at: 


Shift by: 



Abilities to convert the Comment Log to Stratigraphic (Strata), Marker, Lithology 

and Stacking Pattern Log exist. 

Comment Log to Strata Log: 

Each text box of the Comment Log will be converted into a text box of the Strata 

Log. If neighboring boxes share their top or bottom border and have equal content 

they will be displayed as a single text box and the text string is displayed once except 

the Repeat Text option had been set.


www.alt.lu 

Comment Log to Marker Log: 

The text of the Comment Log boxes will be copied as marker name to the new 

Marker Log taking the box top depth as marker depth. 

Comment Log to Lithology Log: 

When converting a Comment Log to a Lithology Log WellCAD tries to find an 

exact match between the text string of each box and the name of a Lithology 

Pattern. Only the currently selected default Lithology Pattern library is searched. If 

no exact match can be found the text string is compared to the code of the 

Lithology Patterns next. If still no correspondence can be found, an empty box will 

be created. 

Comment Log to Stacking Pattern Log: 

A successful conversion depends on the exact match between the text string of each 

box and the entries for RetrogradationPattern, ProgradationPattern and 

AggradationPattern set in the WellCAD.ini file. The defaults are: 

RetrogradationPattern=Retrogradation 

ProgradationPattern=Progradation 

AggradationPattern=Aggradation 


Default settings are applied when creating a new Comment Log (either automatic 



Comment Log entry under the Logs knot. 

Comment Log default settings


Defaults can be set concerning text style, format, orientation and log position. The 

options have already been introduced in the description of the Main Settings 

further above. 

The Thickness parameter allows the definition of a Default and a Minimum box 

thickness. If you click only once to insert a new text box the height of the box will 

be the Default thickness. When changing the height of a text box the smallest 

extension of the box that can be reached is given by the Minimum thickness. 

When the Auto Complete option is enabled all words typed into the comments 

boxes will be stored into the dictionary file specified under the path shown in the 

edit box. If necessary an alternative file can be created and selected. As soon as the 

user typed the first three characters of a word WellCAD will suggest the words 

beginning with the same first three characters for auto completion.


Marker Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

The Marker Log handles single point data. It can be used to store and display 

markers such as formation tops, major/minor contacts, unconformities, etc.. Its 

main purpose is to allow an auto correlation and automatic insertion of surfaces in 

the multi well module. 

Data Format: 

Depth, Name, Comment, Contact 

E.g. 

If you want to use the Marker Log later as auto correlation reference in the Multi 

Well Module you should ensure the Name is used as unique identifier and that equal 

marker names are used in all the wells. 


The Marker Log allows the display of data in three different ways: 

Current depth 

Marker name (identifier) 

Marker comment 

Top, Surface and Marker.

Inserting a new Marker Log: 


Marker Logs are automatically created when importing data sets from an ASCII or 

*.WAY file. You can also create a Marker Log through conversion of Strata or 

Comment Logs. To create an empty Marker Log that can be filled with data using 

one of the interactive methods described below do the following: 

To create a new Marker Log: 


� Select the Marker Log option. 

The Marker Log Main Settings dialog will open. 


Title: 



Position: 

Set the position of the left and right border of the log column. Even though the 

preferred unit can be selected the position of a log column will be saved as a relative 

position compared to the actual document width (e.g. always 10% of the document 

width). 

Style: 

The Marker Log allows the display of data in three different ways: 

Top, Surface and Marker.


www.alt.lu 

When displayed as Top the actual depth, name and comment of the marker will be 

displayed on three different lines – depth on top of the chosen marker line style and 

name and comment below. 

When the Surface style has been chosen, the actual depth and name of the marker 

will be display on top of the selected marker line. The comment will be displayed 

below. 

Displaying the data in Marker style shows the actual depth and Name on the depth. 

No marker line will be displayed. Users who want an easy way to put depth 

referenced remarks on a log column might prefer this display style. 

The horizontal position of the text can be chosen from the Text Alignment drop 

down box. Possible options are Left, Center and Right. 

If the text of adjacent markers would overlap, the lower marker will be shifted down 

displaying a line (pinch) pointing to the correct depth. By selecting one of the 

options provided in the Pinches drop down box the position of the pinches can be 

set. If None is selected no pinches will be displayed but overlapping markers will 

not be shifted either. 

Display Options: 

The user can select which of the three marker details – actual depth (derived from 

actual depth scale), name or comment – is displayed, by checking the corresponding 

option. Further the font style for each of the details can be set independently. 

Contact Dictionary: 

When the Style has been set to Top or Surface a line will be displayed at the markers 

depth. The line style can be pre-defined and stored in Contact Dictionaries (see 1.5.3 

Using Contact Styles).

Name Dictionary: 


The user can create a library of e.g. formation names and pick the appropriate 

marker name from the library rather then typing them in for different wells. This 

ensures also that the auto correlation process within the Multi Well module would 

run successfully as it interconnects markers with the same name. The name libraries 

can be created using the LithCAD application and will be saved in *.LTH files. Only 

the Code of the “Litho Pattern” will be used to derive the markers name. The 

Description will be displayed when using a legend in the document header. The “Litho 

Pattern” or associated color is not used. 


Marker Log data can be edited interactively in the Tabular Editor as well as in the 

log column itself. Adding and deleting markers using the mouse can be done in one 

of the following ways. 

Inserting a marker: 

� Select the Marker Log you want to edit. 



pointer at the position where you want to insert a new marker and left 

click. Observe the Status Bar for the coordinates of the pointer position 

(depth). 

� Move the mouse pointer onto the marker. Once you are on top of the 

marker box your cursor symbol changes to a pen. 

� Left click to display the Edit Marker Log dialog box.


www.alt.lu 

Select or enter marker 

name (identifier) 

Enter Comment 

� In the Name field enter the name of the marker or select one from the 

attached library (name dictionary) using the drop down box. As marker 

names will be used for autocorrelation in the multi well module the user 

should handle a marker name as unique identifier within a document. 

If you want to enter further information about the marker, use the Comment field. 

The line displayed for Tops and Surfaces can only be selected from an attached 

contact dictionary. The dictionary holds all the information about line style, color, 

thickness and whether the line crosses the entire document or not. (see 1.5.3 Using 

Contact Styles) 


� Select the Marker Log. 


� Left Click on the marker you want to delete. 

Changing the depth of an existing marker: 

� Select the Marker Log. 

� Move the mouse pointer on top of the marker. 

Select Contact 

� If the mouse pointer changes its shape to a vertical arrow left click and 

drag the mouse to alter the depth position.

Flying Menu: 

Settings: 



Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 




Slice at: 


Shift by: 



www.alt.lu 


The Marker Log can be converted into a Comment Log or Strata Log with a single 

column. During the conversion process only the marker name will be transferred as 

comment respectively as strata text. In case of a conversion to a Strata Log the 

contact styles will be copied as well. The top depth of the Comment and Strata Log 

data intervals corresponds to the marker depth. The bottom depth is determined 

from the following marker position. In case the last marker in the log is converted, 

top and bottom depth of the Comment or Strata interval are the same. 


Default settings are applied when creating a new Marker Log (either automatic when 

importing data or manually by the user). 


Marker Log entry under the Logs knot. 

Marker Log default settings 

Defaults can be set concerning Contact and Name dictionary, display options, 

display styles and log position. The options have already been introduced in the 

description of the Main Settings further above.

CoreDesc Log 

Description: 


The Core Description Log (short: CoreDesc Log) deals with interval data and 

visualizes the occurrence of certain features within a given depth range. A code 

refers to the symbol that will be displayed in the borehole document. Further, 

classification can be applied in terms of Abundance (reflected by the line style) and 

Dominance (shown as different arrow tips). 

Data is generally imported from ASCII files or entered by the user. 

Data Format: 

TopDepth, 

Dominance 

E.g. 

BottomDepth, Symbol Code, Abundance, 


Symbol identifying the feature 

(e.g. fossil) 

Line style and end point shape 

reflecting abundance and 

dominance 

CoreDesc Log data showing the occurrence of a certain feature (symbol) within a depth range. Different line 

styles and arrow tips refer to Abundance and Dominance classes.


www.alt.lu 

The Abundance and Dominance values have the following meaning: 

Abundance: 

Dominance: 

Rare (1), Moderate (3),Common (5), Abundant (7), Pervasive (9) 

Inserting a new CoreDesc Log: 

Undifferentiated (0), Minor (1),Major (2) 

CoreDesc Logs can be created when importing ASCII data. Most of the time they 

will be created as empty logs and populated with data interactively (e.g. using 

CoreCAD, the digital core description add-on module for WellCAD). 

To create a new CoreDesc Log: 


� Select the CoreDesc Log option. 

The CoreDesc Log main settings dialog pops up.


Title: 

Core Description Log Settings dialog box 




Symbol Dictionary: 

The symbols representing the observed features are taken from a previously loaded 

library. Each data point of a CoreDesc Log contains a code that refers to a particular 

pattern in the library. Library files have the extension .LTH and can be created using 

the LithCAD application, which is installed with WellCAD. LTH libraries are also 

used in Lithology, Analysis and Percentage Logs to display for example graphical 

patterns of lithology, minerals or sedimentary structure. The code that is recorded 

and stored as data of the CoreDesc Log, refers to a particular symbol within the 

library. A default library is loaded if a new CoreDesc Log is created (see Default 

Settings below). 

To load a new symbol library 

� Click the Change button. 

� Use the file open dialog box to browse to the folder containing your 

symbol libraries and load the desired file. (WellCAD sample libraries can be 

found in the …\WellCAD\Dictionaries folder of the installation 

directory.) 

WellCAD will search the new library to find a symbol that matches exactly the code 

stored as data of the CoreDesc Log. If no corresponding symbol can be found only 

the lines representing Abundance and Dominance are displayed.


www.alt.lu 

Symbol found (left), no symbol (right) 

After a library has been loaded into a CoreDesc Log its information is saved 

together with the log. In case a library has been modified in LithCAD and the user 

wants to apply the changes to the log, the corresponding LTH file must be reloaded 

to become part of the CoreDesc Log. 

Symbol Scale: 

Symbols are designed having a fixed size. The option to increase or decrease the size 

of a symbol is useful when changing the size and scale of a borehole document. Use 

the Symbol Scale drop down list or simply enter a number into the text field to 

increase or decrease the size of the displayed symbol. A value of 100% corresponds 

to the original size. 

Symbols scaled to 100%, 150% and 200% 

Hide Symbol Background: 

If a CoreDesc Log is superimposed to other logs (e.g. Lithology Logs) or a color fill 

is used as background of the log column, the symbol can be highlighted when hiding 

the symbol background.

Background hidden (right) to enhance readability of symbol 


Position: 



Endpoint Size: 

The height and width of the symbol marking the extension of the interval can be 

altered separately. To do so a number measuring the end point size in tenth of 

millimeters must be entered in the corresponding fields. 


The CoreDesc Log can be edited interactively. The Tabular Editor allows setting the 

Top and Bottom depth as well as a Code referring to the symbol and Abundance 

and Dominance values (see 1.3.2.14 The Tabular Editor). 

To edit a CoreDesc Log using your mouse do the following: 

Inserting a new data interval: 

� Select the CoreDesc Log you want to edit. 



pointer at the position you want to start inserting a new data interval. 

Observe the Status Bar for the coordinates of the pointer position (depth 

and value). 

� Left Click and drag the mouse to span a new interval and record interval top 

and bottom. 

� The Select a symbol dialog pops up.


www.alt.lu 

Contents of the currently 

attached symbol library 

All symbols contained in the currently loaded library are displayed and the user 

can pick the one that he wants to display. In addition the ratings for 

Abundance and Dominance can be set. 

Changing the symbol or rating: 

� Select the CoreDesc Log you want to edit. 


data interval the shape of the cursor changes to a vertical, horizontal or 

crossed arrow symbol. 

� Right click to display the Select a symbol dialog that lets you change the 

symbol, abundance and dominance parameters. 


� Select the CoreDesc Log. 


� Left Click on the item you want to delete. 

Changing the depth of an existing item: 

� Select the CoreDesc Log. 

� Move the mouse pointer to the top or bottom border of the data interval. 


the mouse to alter the depth span.

To re-position the entire interval: 

� Move the mouse pointer into the middle of the data interval. 


� If the mouse pointer changes its shape to a crossed arrow left click and drag 

to change the vertical or horizontal position of the item. 

Flying Menu: 

Settings: 

Changing vertical extension (left) and position of entire interval (right) 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document.


www.alt.lu 

Copy: 



Delete: 




Slice at: 


Shift by: 


Sort: 

Select sorting criteria and direction 

Symbols can be sorted in horizontal direction within the log column. Either the 

assigned Abundance value can be used to sort and display the symbols from left to 

right with increasing (decreasing) abundance or the symbol code can be chosen as 

sorting criteria. 

Not sorted (left) and sorted by Abundance (right)


When sorting is performed the vertical position of the data interval stays unchanged 

while the horizontal position is changed. The symbols will be spread equally across 

the entire with of the log column. 


The CoreDesc Log can be converted into an Interval Log or split up into other Core 

Desc Logs. One Interval Log can be created for each category (symbol) used in the 

CoreDesc Log. Only the depth information and the Abundance values are 

converted. 

Select the category for which a new log will be created 

CoreDesc Log data (left) and the conversion of Abundance to Interval Logs for each category 

When converting to CoreDesc logs one new Core Desc log will be created for each 

type of symbol used in the log.


www.alt.lu 


Default settings are applied when creating a new CoreDesc Log (either automatic 



CoreDesc Log entry under the Logs knot. 

Defaults for the position of the log and the symbol library can be set. To change the 

default symbol library, type in a valid path to an .LTH file or click the Browse 

button to select a file. To set a default for the Abundance and Dominance values 

select the desired value from the drop down lists. You can also set the name of a 

default item.

Lithology Log 

Description: 


Lithology Logs (short: Litho Logs) have been designed to display information about 

lithology, sedimentary structure etc. using box filling graphical patterns loaded from 

user-defined libraries (refer to the LithCAD User’s Guide for details on how to 

setup a library). Top and bottom contact styles can be assigned to each lithology 

box. The same log type can be used to display non repeated (not box filling) symbols 

in order to indicate lithology accessories, qualifiers etc.. 

For each data point of a Lithology Log a code is recorded that refers to a particular 

graphical pattern in the attached library. 

Often two or more lithology logs are superimposed to allow a complex lithology to 

be displayed in a single track (e.g. dominant lithology and accessories). 

Data Format: 

Top Depth, Bottom Depth, Pattern Code, Hardness, Top 

contact, Bottom contact 

E.g. 


Repeated Pattern: A generic 

cell is repeated until the box is 

filled 

Lithology Log with box filling repeated graphical pattern (left) and non-repeated symbol (right). 

Non Repeated Pattern: 

A single symbol is drawn 

at each data point.


www.alt.lu 

Inserting a new Lithology Log: 

Lithology Logs are created when importing ASCII data. If the Text File Import 

Wizard is used the log type must be set to Lithological Log in the last step in order 

to import the data correctly. 

Lithology Logs are also inserted as empty logs and populated with data interactively. 

CoreCAD, the digital core description add-on module for WellCAD, can also be 

used to fill Lithology Log columns. 

To create a new Lithology Log: 


� Select the Lithological Log option. 

The Lithology Log main settings dialog will pop up. 


Lithology Log Settings dialog box 

Title: 



Pattern Dictionary: 

The patterns representing different lithology or accessory symbols will be taken 

from a previously loaded library. Each data point of a Lithology Log contains a code 

that refers to a particular pattern in the library. Library files have the extension .LTH 

and can be created using the LithCAD application, which is usually installed with


WellCAD. LTH libraries are also used in CoreDesc, Analysis and Percentage Logs 

to display for example graphical patterns of lithology composition, minerals or 

sedimentary structure. A default library is loaded if a new Lithology Log is created 

(see Default Settings below). 

To load a new symbol library 

� Click the Change button. 

� Use the file open dialog box to browse to the folder containing your 

symbol libraries and load the desired file. (WellCAD sample libraries can be 

found in the …\WellCAD\Dictionaries folder of the installation 

directory.) 

Using the associated color: When designing a lithology pattern in LithCAD the user 

has the possibility to define a solid color independent from the pattern itself. The 

solid color can be used instead of the lithology pattern to fill a litho bed if required. 

When working on a scale where graphical patterns become hard to distinguish a 

solid color fill might be more meaningful. Also, when printing large Borehole 

Documents, a solid color fill using the associated color might provide a better 

performance. Tick the Use Associated Color option to switch from graphical 

pattern to solid color filling. 

Hiding the symbol background: It is common practice to superimpose Lithology 

Logs showing non-repeated symbols (e.g. lithology accessories) to Lithology Logs 

using repeated patterns (e.g. dominant lithology). To get the symbols display 

enhanced the user can check the Hide Symbol Background option. Symbols will 

no longer be drawn with a transparent background and will cover the information 

already in place. 

Left: Symbols drawn on top of repeated pattern. Right: Same Symbols drawn on top of repeated pattern with 

option to hide the background enabled. 

Symbol Scale: Symbols and patterns are created of a fixed size in LithCAD. To 

increase or decrease the size of the displayed pattern or symbol without recreating 

the library, the user can select a new scale factor from the Symbol Scale drop down 

list or simply enter a new scale value. A value of 100% reflects the original size.


www.alt.lu 

Symbol shown in three different scales 

Position: 



Bed Style: 

If you look at the data format of a Lithology Log you will notice that a Hardness 

value can be recorded. It is usually a value between 0 and 1. If the Bed Style 

parameter is set to another value than Full, the Hardness parameter is used to 

determine the width of a pattern filled bed. This way normalized rock hardness, a 

confidence index or any other information related to the lithology bed can be 

shown. 

Bed Style set to Full, Right, Both and Left 

Style: 

All lithology data is confined to beds that have a top depth and a bottom depth. A 

lithology log in Primary style always displays the top and bottom bed boundaries 

graphically as a straight line or with a user assigned contact line style. 

With the Lithology Log in secondary style (non primary) the graphical representation 

of bed limits is skipped. Further, non-repeated symbols are not clipped if their size 

exceeds the bed extension.

Primary: Bed limits and 

contact lines shown for 

repeated pattern 

Primary: Bed limits shown for 

non- repeated symbol 

Difference between Primary and Secondary lithology style 


The Style is usually set to Primary if basic or dominant lithology is displayed. Nonrepeated 

symbols such as qualifiers or accessories are best displayed with the 

Primary Style option not set (secondary style). 


If lithology beds are displayed in Primary style the top and bottom boundaries of a 

bed are graphically displayed as a straight line. It is possible to change the line style 

to indicate a certain type of contact between adjacent lithology beds. Top and 

bottom contact style will be stored as part of the data as well. 

Contact 

Example of different contact styles between adjacent lithology beds 

Secondary: Bed limit display 

skipped for repeated pattern 

Secondary: Bed limit display 

skipped for non-repeated 

symbol 

Contact styles are organized in libraries (dictionaries) and referred to by a code 

similar to lithology patterns. Refer to 1.5.3 Using Contact Styles for more details on 

how to create a contact dictionary


www.alt.lu 


The Lithology Log can be edited interactively either in the Tabular Editor or directly 

in the Borehole Document using the mouse. Rows with Top and Bottom Depth, 

Code, Hardness, Top and Bottom contact style can by added to the spreadsheet 

view of the Tabular Editor (see 1.3.2.14 The Tabular Editor). To edit data using the 

mouse do the following: 

Inserting a new bed with a repeated pattern: 

� Select the Lithology Log you want to edit. 


� The mouse pointer changes to a “data insert” symbol. Position the tip of 

the pointer at the position you want to start inserting a new lithology bed. 

Observe the Status Bar displaying the depth at the mouse pointer position. 

If you want to snap the starting point of the bed to the nearest existing 

litho bed, press the SHIFT + CTRL key and position your mouse pointer 

in the vicinity of the neighboring litho bed. 

� Left Click and drag the mouse to span a new bed and record interval top and 

bottom. 

Left Click and Drag to insert a new bed. Only SHIFT key pressed (left) and SHIFT + CTRL key 

pressed to enable snap (right). 

� Click into the new bed. You are in the bed if the mouse pointer is displayed 

as a hammer. A dialog box showing thumbnails of all lithology patterns 

contained in the loaded library opens. 

� Click on a pattern to select it and fill the lithology bed. Besides selecting a 

pattern fill the user can apply a contact style to the top and bottom of the 

lithology bed. If a contact dictionary has been defined and the Primary style

Select a pattern that will be used to 

fill the lithology bed. 

Select top and/or bottom contact 

style. Primary style must be 

enabled. 


has been enabled the user can pick a style from the corresponding down 

lists. 

List of patterns contained in currently loaded libraries. 

To ease navigation and alignment of bed boundaries with features observed in other 

data columns, you can enable a cross hair cursor by clicking on the icon or using 

the CTRL + L shortcut.


www.alt.lu 

Cross Hair Cursor assists in bed 

alignment. 

Press CTRL+L to toggle the cursor mode. 

Changing bed boundaries and hardness: 

� Select the Lithology Log. 

� Move the cursor into the proximity of the bed boundary you want to 

change. 

� If the cursor changes to a double-sided arrow, click and drag the bed limit to 

its new position. Note that bed boundaries will snap to each other 

automatically if they are close enough. 

To change the hardness expressed by the litho bed width the Bed Style must be set 

to another value then Full. Simply move the mouse pointer to the vertical bed limit 

and click and drag the boundary if the cursor changes to a horizontal double-sided 

arrow. 

Changing vertical and horizontal extend of a litho bed 

Inserting a new non-repeated symbol: 

As we will position the symbols with a single mouse click (there is no need to drag a 

box) it is more convenient to select the type of symbol from the Litho Bar (see 

Appendix B) prior to inserting the symbol.

Litho Bar attached to 

WellCAD Workspace 

Ensure the Primary style in the logs Main Settings is disabled. 


� Select the Litho Bar option from the View > Toolbars menu to display 

the toolbar. 

� Select the Lithology Log you wish to edit. The Litho Bar shows the entire 

contents of the loaded library. To setup the appearance of the Litho Bar go 

to Tools > Options and look for the Litho Bar tab. 

� Select a symbol from the Litho Bar. 

WellCAD Workspace with Litho Bar attached 

� Move your mouse pointer into the Lithology Log column (the log is still 

selected). 

� Click at the position you want to insert the symbol (do not drag). 

Inserting symbols at a point depth will be recorded as data with top and bottom 

depth having the same value. 

Moving a symbol: 

� Select the Lithology Log. 

� Move your mouse pointer to the symbol you want to move.


www.alt.lu 

� If the cursor changes to a crossed arrow shape, click and drag the symbol to 

its new position. 

Deleting a symbol or pattern filled litho bed: 

� Select the Lithology Log you wish to edit. 

� Press the CTRL key and simply click on the litho bed or symbol that you 

Flying Menu: 

want to remove. The mouse pointer shows a shape if you are able to 

delete an item. 

Lithology Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 




Erases all data without removing the log from the document.

Delete: 


Slice at: 


Shift by: 




The Lithology Log type can be converted into a Strata, Comment, CoreDesc or 

Stacking pattern Log. Choose the desired option from the Edit > Convert Log To 

menu. 

Lithology Log to Comment Log: 

As a lithology pattern designed in LithCAD carries not only a code but also a text 

description it is possible to convert the depth information and descriptive text of 

each pattern into a Comment Log box. 

Lithology column and its direct conversion to text. 

Lithology Log to Strata Log: 

A Strata Log containing a single column will be created with litho beds converted to 

text boxes. The text shown corresponds to the pattern code and the pattern itself is 

used for the background.


www.alt.lu 

Lithology Log to CoreDesc Log: 

Each pattern is converted into the characteristic CoreDesc data display. The 

conversion might be used to recover the depth information and edit the log data to 

display more meaningful symbols afterwards. 

Lithology Log to Stacking Pattern Log: 

The Stacking Pattern Log deals with three different shapes representing 

Retrogradation (increasing trend), Progradation (decreasing trend) and Aggradation 

(no change in trend). The WellCAD.ini file allows assigning a lithology pattern to 

each of the trend shapes: 

[StackLog] 

RetrogradationPattern=Coarse 

ProgradationPattern=Fine 

AggradationPattern=Equal 

The names set for the pattern identification should correspond to the description 

(not the code) of a lithology pattern to achieve a successful conversion. 

Default settings: 

Default settings are applied when creating a new Lithology Log (either automatic 



Litho Log entry under the Logs knot.

Pattern Dictionary: 

Lithology Log default settings 


Define the default library of lithology patterns that will be used each time a new 

Lithology Log is created. 


Define the default contact style library that will be used with a new Lithology Log. 

Bed Style: 

If you want to see the hardness value reflected in the litho bed width, select another 

option than Full. 

Default Bed: 

Set up the parameters – default vertical bed extension, hardness value and a code - 

for a default bed. When you insert a lithology bed with a single click in will have the 

default extension. 

Min. Bed Thickness: 

You cannot make a lithology bed smaller than the limits given by the minimum bed 

thickness.


Strata Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

The Strata (Stratigraphic) Log has been developed to handle and display chrono or 

litho-stratigraphic columns (e.g. System, Series and Stage) in a single log column. 

Manually entered text or text and color/pattern fill loaded from libraries can be 

displayed in boxes limited by column width and Top and Bottom Depth. Any 

number of columns can be handled. If text found in adjacent boxes is equal it will be 

merged and displayed as single box. 

Top and Bottom Contact styles can be assigned to each box boundary. In order to 

highlight important zones (e.g. reservoir top/bottom) the user can allow contact 

style lines to be drawn across the entire borehole document. 

Data Format: 

TopDepth, BottomDepth, DataCol1, DataCol2,…,DataColN, 

TopContact, BottomContact 

E.g. 

The first two columns – top and bottom depth – are followed by a user-defined 

number of stratigraphic data columns. Two columns containing information about 

the top and bottom contact style complete each data row. When the data is 

displayed cells with equal information will be shown as one text box.



Strata Log with three columns. Data displayed as plain text (left) and text / color fill combined (right). 

Inserting a new Strata Log: 

Strata Logs are created automatically when ASCII data is imported. The import 

algorithm tries to determine the number of strata columns needed from the number 

of incoming data columns. A new Strata Log can also be the result of the conversion 

from Lithology or Comment Log. Last but not least the user can create an empty 

Strata Log and populate it with data as described under Editing Methods. 

To create a new Strata Log: 


� Select the Strata Log option. 

The Strata Log Settings dialog box opens.


www.alt.lu 


Title: 

Strata Log Settings dialog box 


the log handle. Note that the titles for each column must be set in the column 

settings. 

Strata Log Title 

Strata Column Title 

Log and column titles


Column Settings: 

The list control shows all strata columns currently handled in the log. Use the Add 

and Delete button to create or remove columns. If you want to change the relative 

width of the columns – e.g. having column one twice the width of column two – 

click into the corresponding cell in the Relative Width field and change the value 

(e.g. set a value of 2 for column one and a value of 1 for column two). 

Select one or more strata columns and click the Settings button to set column 

details (see below). 


The information displayed in each box of the Strata Log can be either text, a 

background fill or the combination of both. Tick the corresponding Display Text 

and Display Background options. A background is only available if a Strata 

Dictionary (it is the same as a lithology dictionary) has been loaded. Please note that 

the text of a box must exactly match the code of a pattern in the library to display a 

background pattern. In other words, the text displayed corresponds always to the 

code of the background pattern loaded from the library (*.lth file). 

Display options: Plain Text or text with background fill.


www.alt.lu 

Strata Log 

Contact (not crossing the 

document) 

Contact (crossing the 

document) 

Position: 



The total width of the log given through the Position values is subdivided to display 

the strata columns according to their relative width. 


The top and bottom boundaries of each box in a strata column are graphically 

presented as straight lines. To present the box limits in a more significant manner to 

reflect i.e. major/minor tops or unconformities a Contact Dictionary can be 

designed or loaded. Refer to 1.5.3 Using Contact Styles for more details. 

Example of a Borehole Document with Strata Log displaying different contact styles 

Strata Dictionary: 

The text displayed in a strata box can either be a string typed in from the user or it 

can be text picked from a library along with a pattern or color fill for the box 

background. These library file are the same as the ones for the Lithology Log and 

carry the extension *.LTH. Remember that within LithCAD you can create whatever 

pattern you want. The text displayed in the strata box is the code set for a pattern. 

Refer to the LithCAD User’s Guide to learn how to create patterns and libraries.


Left: Strata column with plain text that was typed in. Middle and right: Text and background fill (associated 

color and pattern) picked from library. 

To define or change the library file: 

� Click the Change button and select a *.LTH file from the File Open dialog 

box. 

Using the Associated Color: When designing a lithology pattern in LithCAD the 

user has the possibility to define a solid color independent from the pattern itself. 

To switch from a pattern fill to a color fill tick the corresponding option. 

Settings: 

To change the details for one or more selected columns, click the corresponding 

items in the Column Settings list to select them. Click the Settings button to open 

the Column Settings dialog box. 

Strata Log Settings dialog box


www.alt.lu 

Title: 

Enter the title of the column. This option is only available if a single column was 

selected. 

Text: 

As the height of a single text box can be very large (covering multiple pages of the 

printed log chart) the text string display can be repeated in order to show the 

information at least once per page. If this option is off the text string will be shown 

only once per box at a position determined from the Orientation settings. The 

frequency of repetition is set in millimeters. 

String repeated 

String repeated (left) and displayed once per box (right) 

Box Style: 

Each box limit given through the top and bottom depth values is displayed as a line. 

If the space necessary to display the text string within a box exceeds the limits 

defined through top and bottom depth, so called pinches will be displayed to 

indicate the true limits. Pinches can be displayed according to the Box Style settings.

Box Style set to Center, Left, Right and None 


Font: 

Display the standard Font Settings dialog box to alter the settings of the text font. 

Orientation: 

Define the way each text string is positioned within a box. 

Allows changing the orientation of text within the text box 

Depth Indicator: 

Allow little depth marker strings to be displayed at the top and/or bottom of each 

box.


www.alt.lu 


Depth Marker 

Strata Log data can be edited interactively in the Tabular Editor (see 1.3.2.14 The 

Tabular Editor) or in each box of the log columns. Adding and deleting text boxes 

using the mouse can be done in one of the following ways. 

Inserting a text box: 

� Select the Strata Log column you want to edit. 



pointer at the position you want to start inserting a new text box. Observe 

the Status Bar for the coordinates of the pointer position (depth). 

� Left Click and drag the mouse to insert a new text box and record interval 

top and bottom. 

Remember that the box size in the different columns depend on each other. A 

hierarchical order will be followed in a way that a box in the second column must be 

a sub section of a box in the first column and so on.

Inserting Data: 

Click to insert free 

text 

Click to show contents of 

loaded Strata Dictionary. 

Hierarchical order in box height maintained. 

� Select the Strata Log column you want to edit. 


Box sizes follow 

hierarchical order 


text box your cursor symbol changes to a pen. 

� Left click to display the Edit Strata Log dialog box that allows you to insert 

a new string into the Content text box or to select text and pattern from 

the previously loaded *.LTH library (see “Strata Dictionary” above). 

If a contact dictionary is available choose the desired top or bottom 

contact style from the Contacts drop down lists. 

Insert free text or select text and background fill from the drop down list.


www.alt.lu 


� Select the Strata Log column. 


� Left Click on the text box you want to delete. 

Changing the depth of an existing box: 

� Select the Strata Log column. 

� Move the mouse pointer to the top or bottom border of the box. 


the mouse to alter the data value or depth position. 

Flying Menu: 

Click if cursor changes shape and drag to extend the depth interval. 

Strata Log Flying Menu



Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 




Slice at: 


Shift by: 



All or just a selection of Strata Log columns can be converted to a Comment or 

Marker Log. To do so: 

� Select the Strata Log to convert. 

� From the Edit>Convert Log To menu select the Comment Log option. 

� When converting to a Comment Log make your selection of columns to 

convert from the dialog box that pops up.


www.alt.lu 

Select the Strata Log columns to convert 

For a conversion to a Marker Log only the information from the last column and 

the top depth of the intervals will be copied to the new log. E.g. for a Strata Log 

with System, Group and Formation columns only the data from the Formation column 

will be converted. 


Defaults can be set for the library file containing the backfill patterns and 

corresponding text strings as well as for a contact style dictionary. In addition the 

start up position for a new Strata Log can be pre-defined.

Stacking Pattern Log 

Description: 


The Stacking Pattern log can be used to display trends within certain depth intervals 

such as coarsening or fining in grain size. Data values are represented by the means 

of geometrical figures (triangle and square). Besides Top and Bottom Depth the data 

format requires data values between 0 and 1, describing the width of the symbol at 

top and bottom of the interval. 

Data Format: 

TopDepth, BottomDepth, TopWidth, BottomWidth 

E.g. 


Each data point consists of a top and bottom depth with corresponding data values 

(between 0 and 1). As shown below the data values control the width of the symbol 

representing the direction of the trend.


www.alt.lu 

Two Stacking Pattern Logs showing different cycles of coarsening and fining (triangles) with areas of stagnation 

(squares). The right log highlights the box boundaries to allow correlation with lithology log intervals. 

Inserting a new Stacking Pattern Log: 

Stacking Pattern Logs are created when ASCII data is imported. If the Text File 

Import Wizard is used the Stacking Pattern Log type must have been chosen in the 

last step of the wizard. Besides that inserting a new Stacking Pattern log is possible 

from the Edit > Insert New Log menu. In this case the Main Settings dialog will 

pop up next. Populate the log with data using the interactive editing methods 

explained below. 


Stacking Pattern Log Settings dialog box


Title: 



Color: 

Use the Color Picker to set a new color for the trend symbols. 

Position: 



Frame: 

Select the line thickness in which the frame of the symbol will be drawn. 

Unchecking the Draw Pattern Limit option will prevent drawing the interval 

boundaries. 


Trend symbols drawn with (left) and without (right) pattern limit lines. 

The Stacking Pattern Log can be edited interactively either using the mouse directly 

in the data column or using the tabular editor. The general handling of the tabular 

editor is explained in 1.3.2.14 The Tabular Editor. 

To edit the data directly in the data column, the following methods can be used.


www.alt.lu 

Inserting data: 

� Select the Stacking Pattern Log to edit. 

� Move the mouse pointer into the log column and hold down the SHIFT 

key. 




� Left click and drag to insert and record a depth interval. Release the SHIFT 

key. 

� By default the square symbol is displayed – the top and bottom width 

values being equal. Click inside the symbol to change the symbol. To 

change the top or bottom width of the symbol use one of the methods 

explained below. 

Deleting data: 

� Select the Stacking Pattern Log. 


� Left click on the data interval you want to delete. 

Changing depth and value of an existing data interval: 


� Move the mouse pointer into the vicinity of the interval boundary you 

want to change. 


the mouse to alter the depth interval. 

Alter the depth interval


Changing top and bottom width values of an existing data interval: 


� Move the mouse pointer into the vicinity of one of the symbol’s edges or 

the mid point of the left or right side. 

� If the mouse pointer changes to a double-sided horizontal arrow left click 

and drag to change the symbols shape and alter the top or bottom width 

value accordingly. The status bar provides information about the current 

position. 

Flying Menu: 

Edit top and bottom width value 

Stacking Pattern Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 


Editor: 



www.alt.lu 

Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 





Delete: 


Slice at: 


Shift by: 



The Stacking Pattern Log can be converted to Well, Mud, Comment and Lithology 

Log. 

Stacking Pattern Log to Well Log: 

When converting a Stacking Pattern Log to a Well Log the user has to specify a 

sampling rate first. Afterwards a new Well Log will be created containing 

interpolated top and bottom width data from the stacking pattern intervals. Please 

note that the values will be output in percent (e.g. 0.1 becomes 100). 

Stacking pattern Log to Mud Log: 

When converting a Stacking Pattern Log into a Mud Log each top and bottom 

depth value of the stacking pattern interval will become a data point of the new Mud 

Log. Please note that the data values will be output in percent (e.g. 0.1 becomes 

100). 

Stacking pattern Log to Comment Log: 

Converting a Stacking Pattern Log into a Comment Log results in a text box for 

each stacking pattern interval. A description of the symbol is given as well as the 

data values at top and bottom of the interval in percent.

Conversion of stacking pattern intervals into text boxes 


The strings for the description are taken from the WellCAD.ini file [StackLog] 

section and can be replaced by another string. The symbols are referred to as: 

AggradationTerm 

ProgradationTerm 

RetrogradationTerm 

Stacking Pattern Log to Lithology Log: 

The WellCAD.ini file [StackLog] section allows setting a lithology pattern code 

for each symbol (AggradationPattern, ProgradationPattern and 

RetrogradationPattern). These codes will be compared against the content 

of the default lithology library when the stacking pattern intervals are converted to 

lithology intervals. If the code matches a pattern from the library the lithology box 

will be filled. The hardness value corresponds to the difference between top and 

bottom width value.


www.alt.lu 


Conversion of stacking pattern intervals to lithology intervals 

Defaults can be set for symbol, color and log position. These parameters were 

explained in the Main Settings. Additionally a Minimum Pattern Thickness value, 

measured in units of the current depth axis, can be specified which is the smallest 

extension a symbol could have. Keeping the smallest symbol at a size that it is still 

visible in the Borehole Document prevents from having “ghost data”. Use the Top 

Width and Bottom Width values to control the shape of the default pattern 

inserted with each mouse drag.

OLE Log 

Description: 


OLE is the acronym for Object Linking and Embedding. OLE is an application 

integration technology that can be used to share information between OLE 

compatible applications. In WellCAD, embedded and linked OLE objects (such as 

photographs, EXCEL charts, WORD documents) are handled by the OLE Log. 

The data consists of individual OLE objects each with a top and bottom depth. 

Since WellCAD version 4.2 the display of pictures (e.g. JPG, GIF, BMP etc.) is 

handled internally unless the user explicitly wants the pictures to be handled as OLE 

objects. This can be defined in the logs default settings. Handling pictures internally 

skips the dependency on external software to display the pictures and provides a 

resource friendly alternative to the RGB Log when handling large volumes of 

pictures. When importing a picture use File > Import simply select the OLE Log 

when prompted. 

Data can also be inserted manually or loaded from ASCII files. E.g. to import a 

series of core photographs (picture file list) simply import an ASCII file providing 

top and bottom depth and the path to the picture file as OLE Log (see also 1.4.2.5 

Picture import). 

Data Format: 

E.g. 

TopDepth, BottomDepth, OleObject


www.alt.lu 

Display Examples: 

OLE Log showing an embedded EXCEL sheet and a thin section picture. 

Inserting a new OLE Log: 

A new OLE Log can be inserted using the Edit > Insert New Log option. The 

Main Settings dialog will pop up. After setting the log title and confirming with the 

OK button the Insert Object dialog box will be displayed. It allows you to create a 

new OLE object or to access already existing ones. 

Creating and embedding a new OLE object 

Select the Create New option and select the type of object you would like to create 

and embed from the Object Type list. The new object is automatically activated 

“in-place”, if the object server supports in-place activation, or the new OLE object 

will open in its own application window. 

Insert and embed a new OLE object

Tool Bar and Menu Bar from 

EXCEL 

New EXCEL Worksheet 

activated in-place. 


The following screen shot shows an EXCEL sheet activated within a Borehole 

Document. 

OLE log with a new embedded object (here an EXCEL Worksheet) 

Embedding an OLE object from an existing file 

Select the Create From File option and specify the path to the file. 

You can either embed or link an OLE object. If an object is embedded the file is 

saved within the Borehole Document. If a link has been created only the file path is 

saved.


www.alt.lu 

A core photograph was embedded from a JPG file 

It is also possible to import OLE information from an ASCII file using the Text File 

Import wizard. In this case the incoming data must be of the right format and the 

OLE Log type must be selected in the last step of the import wizard. The latter 

method is often used to import a sequence of core photographs into WellCAD. An 

ASCII file with top and bottom depth and the path to the bitmap in each data row 

must be imported in that case. 

Another way to create a new OLE Log is to paste an object from the Windows 

clipboard. Once an object has been copied to the clipboard, open the Edit menu in 

WellCAD and select the Paste option. Select Paste Special if you want to select the 

data format to paste. Depending on how the server application can place data on the 

clipboard you can choose from various options. 

To import a picture file list using the Text File Import Wizard see 1.4.2.5 Picture 

import.


Title: 

OLE Log Settings dialog box 




Position: 




The OLE Log can be edited using the Tabular Editor as well as the mouse. The 

general handling of the tabular editor is explained in 1.3.2.14 The Tabular Editor. If 

a new data row is inserted the Insert Object dialog box explained above will be 

displayed. 

Inserting a new object using the mouse: 

� Select the OLE Log to edit. 

� Move the mouse pointer into the log column and hold down the SHIFT 

key. 




� Left click and drag to insert and record a depth interval. Release the SHIFT 

key.


www.alt.lu 

� The Insert Object dialog box explained above will open to embed a new 

or existing OLE object. 

Note: In order to place OLE objects with the log at discrete intervals the Tabular 

Editor can be used. The editor automatically recalculates the top and bottom limits 

to have the objects interval stick to each other. To avoid this behavior dummy 

intervals must be inserted. 

Flying Menu: 

OLE Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 





Delete: 

Removes the log and its data from the borehole document.

Slice at: 


Shift by: 


APPENDIX A - 343


Full Wave Sonic Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

FWS Log (Full Waveform Sonic) data is a two dimensional array of floating point 

values. One dimension consists of depth, sampled at a constant rate, the second 

dimension usually consists of time in �s, sampled at a constant rate, too. Thus, for 

each depth increment the log holds a data trace sampled in time. The FWS log is 

most commonly used to store and display full waveform sonic data but can also 

used to display spectral gamma, borehole radar data, slowness or T2 distribution 

curves. The horizontal dimension can be “misused” and must not necessarily 

correspond to time in �s all the time. When importing FWS data from an ASCII file 

the user can set calibrate the data corresponding to the equation y � a � bx , 

where a is an offset and b is the horizontal sampling step. 

Data Format: 

E.g. 


Depth, Data1, Data2, Data3, … ,DataN 

FWS Log data presented as Wiggle, b/w VDL and color VDL.

Inserting a new FWS Log: 


The only way to create a FWS Log is through file import. Various file formats are 

supported. It is important for the processing of FWS data that during import the 

time sampling rate is set correctly (measured in [�sec]). To check which time 

sampling rate has been set open the Tabular Editor after your log has been created 

and check the column titles. A default value for the time sampling rate can be set in 

the FWS Log Default Settings. 


Full Wave Sonic Log Settings dialog box 

Title: 



Unit: 

Insert the units of the amplitude scale. E.g. if spectral gamma data is handled in a 

FWS Log container the unit could be counts or counts per second. Changing this 

value has no effect on the data. 

Amplitude Scale: 

Adjust the low and high values of the signal amplitude to enhance the display of the 

sonic traces on screen.


www.alt.lu 

Trace Scale: 

You can set the upper (Max) and lower (Min) limits of the horizontal scale (time, 

energy, channels depending on nature of data) and have a distinct interval out of the 

entire trace displayed. You can also set a Unit string for the horizontal axis. E.g. for 

a sonic trace it would be [µsec], for an energy spectrum it could be [keV]. 

Amplitude (vertical) scale and unit as well as Trace (horizontal) scale and unit displayed in log title 

Check the Display Grids option to draw vertical grid lines using the specified step. 

Display As: 

Sonic data traces can be displayed as Wiggle lines, black and white variable density 

line (B/W vdl) or you can color code the amplitudes and display the traces as Color 

vdl. 

Wiggle line (left), B/W vdl (middle) and Color vdl display 

Shading: 

If the wiggle line display has been chosen for the data display you can shade the 

positive and negative amplitudes with different colors. Additionally you can shift the 

base line (Zero Line), which is usually at zero, so shading will be applied to the


upper and lower parts of the base line. To shift the base line enter a positive or 

negative number into the corresponding text box. 

Upper and Lower amplitude shaded differently 

Position: 



Pen: 

Choose the color and style of the wiggle line that is used to display the data. The 

color selected is independent from the shading color. 

Palette: 

If data is displayed in color variable density (Color vdl), the color palette used can 

be loaded or designed by you. Click the Palette button to open the Palette Editor 

(see 1.5.4 Color Palette Design). 


Amplitude values of the FWS can be altered in the Tabular Editor. Other interactive 

editing methods are not supported. 

Flying Menu: 

FWS Log Flying Menu


www.alt.lu 


Settings: 

Get access to Base, Main, Title and Palette Settings of the log. 

Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 




Slice at: 


Shift by: 



The FWS Log can be converted into one of the Image Log data types or into a VSP 

Log. Select the Convert Log To option from the Edit menu.



Defaults can be set for data display style, color palette and position. These 

parameters were explained in the Main Settings. Additionally a default value for the 

time sampling rate can be set. This value is used if no other information for the time 

sampling rate is available during file import. Setting the correct time sampling is 

critical if FWS is going to be processed using the FWS Processing Module (add-on 

for WellCAD). 

The Min cell dimension is only used when data is displayed in wiggle line style. 

You will notice that the display of data traces is skipped the higher the inserted value 

is. This parameter can be altered if the data traces can no longer be distinguished on 

screen or if you notice an impact on the performance when redrawing the data on 

screen.


VSP Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

The VSP (Vertical Seismic Profile) Log handles a two dimensional array of floating 

point data. One dimension consists of depth sampled at a constant sample rate the 

second dimension is a series of station names (e.g. geophones), each data point has a 

certain amplitude value that is displayed along a vertical trace. The log can be used to 

display synthetic seismograms or seismic profiles as well. 

Data Format: 

E.g. 


Depth, RX1, Rx2, Rx3, … ,RxN 

VSP Log with data presented as Wiggle, Variable Area, b/w VDL and color VDL

Inserting a new VSP Log: 


The only way to create a VSP Log is through file import. Various file formats are 

supported. 


VSP Log Settings dialog box 

Title: 




You can limit the high value of the amplitude displayed in your seismic trace by 

changing the max value. If you want to reverse the amplitude display so that 

positive amplitudes deflect to the left instead to the right you can do that by 

checking the corresponding Reverse Amplitude option. When displaying the data 

using the False Color style an option to display the amplitude in logarithmic scale 

become available. 

Trace Order: 

The display of each data trace can be repeated according to the Repeat Factor in 

order to achieve a denser data display. To reverse the order of trace display –


www.alt.lu 

starting with the first station on the right of the track – check the Reverse Trace 

Order option. 

Grid: 

Enable the Display Grids option and set a display frequency in number of stations 

to display vertical grid lines. 

Style: 

Four different display styles exist: 

In Wiggle mode the amplitudes are outlined using the pen style settings. Left or 

right of the amplitude can be color shaded using the Variable Area style. A variable 

density display can be achieved in Grey Shade and False Color style. The latter one 

allows application of a user define color palette. 

Wiggle, Variable Area, Grey Shade and False Color display styles 

Shading: 

When displaying the data in Variable Area style the left or the right half of the 

amplitudes can be shaded using the currently selected pen color. 

Position: 



Pen: 

The selected style for the drawing pen is used when the data is displayed in Wiggle 

or Variable Area style. 

Palette: 

If data is displayed in False Color mode, the color palette used can be loaded or 

designed by you. Click the Palette button to open the Palette Editor (see 1.5.4 

Color Palette Design).



VSP Logs do not support interactive editing of their data. You can change the 

amplitude values using the Tabular Editor. 

Flying Menu: 

VSP Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 





Delete: 



www.alt.lu 

Slice at: 


Shift by: 



A conversion of each station trace into a Well Log is possible ad well as a 

conversion of the entire VSP Log into a FWS Log. Select the VSP Log you would 

like to convert and chose the Convert Log To option from the Edit menu. 

When converting to a Well Log you can select a subset of stations you would like to 

convert. 


Defaults can be set for position, data display style and color palette. All parameters 

were explained in the Main Settings. The Min cell dimension is only used when 

data is displayed in wiggle line style. You will notice that the display of data traces is 

skipped the higher the inserted value is. This parameter can be altered if the data 

traces can no longer be distinguished on screen or if you notice an impact on the 

performance when redrawing the data on screen.


Image Log / Image Log Float 2 / Image Log Float 4 

Description: 

In general the Image Log handles an array of data where one dimension consists of 

equally sampled depth and the second dimension of radial equally sampled data 

values (one data point every x degree of an arc). The Image Log stores and displays 

acoustic scanner data (e.g. amplitude, travel time, thickness) as well as multi arm 

caliper or FMI data. Three different types of Image Logs exists each of them storing 

the data using a different data type. 

The Image Log Integer stores all values as unsigned integer (two bytes), which 

means that all values are between 0 and 65535. This is sufficient for acoustic scanner 

travel time and amplitude measurements or other data where no negative or decimal 

numbers occur. Image Log Float 2 (two bytes) and Image Log Float 4 (four bytes) 

types store data as floating point values, which allows proper handling of negative 

and decimal numbers. 

Data Format: 

E.g. 

Depth, Amp1, Amp2, Amp3, … , AmpN


www.alt.lu 


Image Log displayed in Color Image (left), Shifted Curve (middle) and Stacked Curve (right) style. 

Inserting a new Image Log: 

Image Logs are automatically created when files are imported. During the import of 

DLIS files the type of Image Log (integer, float 2 or float 4) can be specified. Other 

import algorithms create the integer type Image Log by default. To check which type 

of Image Log you are working on, simply open the Main Settings dialog box. The 

dialog box title states the type of log. 

It is also possible to create a new Image Log using the Insert New Log command 

from the Edit menu. The Logs Selection dialog opens listing all Well Logs 

contained in your Borehole Document. The new Image Log, which is always of type 

float 4, will be created from your selection of Well Logs. E.g. you want to display a 4 

arm caliper measurement for which you have 4 Well Logs in your document. In the 

Logs Selection dialog box select the corresponding Well Logs. As you have 4 Logs 

you will get 4 data traces in the Image Log (at 0°, 90°, 180° and 270°). The logs are 

taken in the order as they are listed in the Logs Selection dialog box which 

corresponds to the order the logs were added to the Borehole Document. To 

change the order in the Borehole Document use the Move Up / Down option 

from the Layout Bar (see 1.3.2.5 Layout Toolbar).


Title: 

Select the Well Logs from which you create the new Image Log 

Image Log Settings dialog box 




Unit: 

The unit string as displayed in the title zone of the log.


www.alt.lu 


Set the low and high scale of the amplitude values. Total minimum and maximum of 

the dataset are displayed for your orientation next to the text fields. 

Special Value Color: 

To highlight distinct values in your data display (e.g. the No Data value) you can 

define special values and define a color for each of them. The color selected should 

be one that is not already in the selected color palette that is used for all other 

values. 

To add a special value: 

� Right Click in the Special Value Color control. 

� From the pop-up menu select Add Value. 

� Click in the Special Value Color control and enter a new value into the 

text field. 

� Click the color field to open a color picker. 

Position: 



Style: 

The Image Log supports three different display styles. Data displayed in Color 

Image style is presented as false color image where each data value is mapped to a 

color value according to a user customizable color palette. 

False Color Data Display


The Shifted Curve style divides the log track into equal intervals and draws all data 

columns as individual curves using the left border of each interval as zero baseline. 

Shifted Curve Data Display 

All data columns are drawn as superimposed curves if the Stacked Curve style has 

been set. 

Shifted Curve Data Display 

Reference: 

Usually the left hand side of the log track is used as reference for the data (e.g. 0°, 

High Side or North) and is the position of the first data point. To reverse the data 

display and have the reference on the opposite track border, check the Reverse 

option. 

E.g. an acoustic scanner tool scans the inside of the borehole wall. The Image Log 

displays the data starting with 0° on the left. The data is presented as if seen from 

the inside of the hole. A core scanner image would display the data as if seen from 

the outside of the hole if the left track border would be used as reference, too. To


www.alt.lu 

compare both results we should enable the Reverse option for one of the two 

Image Logs to have both images being an inside or outside view. Note that only the 

data display is inverted, not the data. The Mirror process of the Image & Structure 

Processing Module changes also the data. 

Palette: 

If data is displayed in False Color mode, the color palette used can be loaded or 

designed by you. Click the Palette button to open the Palette Editor (see 1.5.4 

Color Palette Design). 


The amplitude values of an Image Log can be edited in the Tabular Editor. Further 

interactive edition of the Image Log is not possible. 

Flying Menu: 

Image Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document.


Copy: 



Delete: 




Slice at: 


Shift by: 



The Image Log can directly be converted into an RGB Log using the color 

information of the actual loaded color palette. To convert the log select the Convert 

Log To option from the Edit menu. 

You can also convert the Image Log into Well Logs. An options dialog box allows 

selecting at which Image Log traces will be converted into Well Logs. A Starting 

point can be set as well as an Increment. An increment of 10 would output a Well 

Log every 90° for a 40 finger caliper measurement but a Well Log every 28.8° for a 

288 point acoustic scan. 

Select Starting a point and Increment for the conversion of Image Log data to Well Logs.


www.alt.lu 


Defaults for position, color palette and reference can be set. The parameters were 

already explained. The Image Log Data Divisor is no longer used.

RGB Log 

Description: 


The RGB Log is used to display bitmap data such as optical televiewer images, core 

photographs, video snapshots etc.. Data is stored in a two dimensional array of RGB 

(Red, Green, Blue) intensity triplets. One dimension consists of depth, sampled at a 

constant rate, and the second dimension of radial equally sampled data values (one 

data point every x degree of an arc). Thus, for each depth increment there is a data 

set associated, which represents the full (or partial) coverage of a borehole wall or 

core circumference. 

Data Format: 

E.g. 


Depth, RGB 1, RGB 2, RGB 3, … , RGB N 

The RGB Log data is displayed as bitmap according to resolution and color 

information provided by the data values. 

RGB Log display of optical televiewer data


www.alt.lu 

Inserting a new RGB Log: 

RGB Logs are automatically generated when files are imported. RGB Logs are also 

created as result of the conversion from Image Logs to RGB Logs. 


Title: 

RGB Log Settings dialog box 



Position: 



Reference: 

Usually the left hand side of the log track is used as reference (e.g. as 0°, High Side 

or North) and is the position of the first data point that is drawn. To reverse the 

data display and have the reference of the right hand side of the log track, check the 

Reverse option. 


The data values of an RGB log can be edited using the Tabular Editor only. Direct 

interactive data edition tools are not supported.

Flying Menu: 

RGB Log Flying Menu 



Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 





Delete: 


Slice at: 


Shift by: 



www.alt.lu 


It is possible to convert RGB Log traces into Well Logs or to create a new Image 

Log from the RGB information. 

Converting an RGB Log to Well Logs: 

RGB Log to Well Log conversion 

From the Edit menu select the Convert Log To > Well Log option and set a 

starting point and increment in the dialog box that opens. Each RGB Log trace at 

the position given through Starting point and Increment will be converted into a 

Well Log. The values set as data are the total color amplitude values calculated from 

the RGB intensity: 

A total 

� 

R 

2 

� G 

2 

� B 

Converting an RGB Log into an Image Log: 

From the Edit menu select the Convert Log To option. Select the type of Image 

Log you would like to create – integer, float 2 or float 4. 

The next dialog box asks you whether you want to convert all color intensities or 

only the Red, Green or Blue one. 

2

RGB Log to Image Log conversion 


The values set as data are the total color amplitude values calculated from the RGB 

intensity: 


A total 

� 

R 

2 

� G 

2 

� B 

The only default options that can be set are the position of the log and if the 

reference of the data display is the left or right track border. All parameter were 

already explained in the Main Settings. 

2


Analysis Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

Analysis logs are used to present the composition of lithology or balance between 

different components displaying each element according to its quantity (in percent) 

as graphical pattern. The Data is stored in a two dimensional array, where the first 

dimension consist of depth, sampled at a constant rate, and the second dimension 

holds the series of percentage values belonging to the different elements. The user 

can define the number and type of elements to be handled. 

Graphical patterns are user definable and their storage is organized by the means of 

lithology dictionaries. Lithology dictionaries can be created, edited and maintained 

using LithCAD. 

Data Format: 

E.g. 


Note that the numbers express a percentage of a certain component. The column 

titles are the codes referring to a particular display pattern in the attached pattern 

library. 


The Analysis Log supports three different data display styles. 

Fixed Bar style: A bar of fixed height is drawn for each depth point. 

Dynamic Bar style: A bar is drawn is drawn from one to the next depth point.


Line style: Data points belonging to the same element are connected and displayed 

as curve, where the area between the curves is filled with a graphical pattern 

reflecting the type of element. 

Analysis Log data presented as Fixed Bar, Dynamic Bar and Line. 

Inserting a new Analysis Log: 

Analysis Logs can be created through ASCII file import where each column 

following the depth will be read as a component. You can also use the Insert New 

Log option from the Edit menu. 

Create new Analysis Log from Well Logs 

The Insert New Analysis Log dialog box provides two options: Creating the log 

from existing Well Logs or starting with a blank data container. If you want to fill in 

your data interactively select the New option and specify the number of


www.alt.lu 

components you would like to handle, the depth sampling rate and startup depth 

range. For the startup your log data will be set to equal amounts of the selected 

components. 

If you have already one Well Logs per component in your borehole document 

containing the fraction data, select the Logs option and click on the logs from 

which you would like to copy the data into the new Analysis Log. Depth range and 

sampling rate will automatically be determined from the source logs. 

Click OK and the Main Settings dialog box will open next to let you specify how the 

components are displayed. 


Analysis Log Settings dialog box 

Title: 



Unit: 

Set the unit string that will appear in the log title zone. 

Scale: 

Set the scale low and high value. Usually you will use 0 to 100 but as you might get 

normalized values (0 to 1) or other values you can alter the scale accordingly. 

Grid: 

Set the details for the appearance of vertical grid lines.

Style: 


The Analysis Log can present its data in three different styles – Dynamic Bar, 

Fixed Bar and Line. For all display styles you can choose whether you want to 

show lines separating the components from each other or not. Check the Display 

Border Lines option if you want to see them. 

Dynamic Bar: 

Dynamic Bar style 

The upper and lower limits of adjacent data points are linked together to form a 

continuous dynamic bar. Please have a look to the Advanced settings to know if the 

data points depth belongs to the top, middle or bottom of the bar. 

Depending on your sample rate and document depth scale the bars appear as very 

small lines only. 

Fixed Bar: 

Fixed Bar style 

Each data point is displayed as a fixed discrete bar. The thickness of the bar can be 

defined and may be changed from 0.1 to 5.0 mm thickness by entering the 

corresponding value (measured in mm/10) into the edit box. Please have a look to


www.alt.lu 

the Advanced settings to know if the data points depth belongs to the top, middle 

or bottom of the bar. 

Depending on your sample rate and document depth scale the bars appear as very 

small lines only. 

Line Style: 

Line style 

The Line style may be best suited for an Analysis Log with a small sample rate. Data 

points are linked together by a continuous line to form well log type curves. The 

thickness of the line is user defined and may be changed from 0.1mm to 1.0mm 

thickness. As for the fixed bar style, the number in the text box is in tenths of a 

millimeter. 

Display Border Lines: 

Uncheck this option if you want to hide the black line separating the components. 

Position: 




Set the data point position


Clicking the Advanced button allows setting the data point position for the bar 


depth of 1. 







Bar the top or bottom might be the best choice. Symbols are always drawn at the 

correct depth. 

Components: 

Load the pattern dictionary and assign a pattern to each component 

The Analysis Log displays its data by the means of lithology patterns similar to the 

Lithology Log (see 1.5.2 Lithology Columns).


www.alt.lu 

Select the library (*.LTH file) that contains your lithology patterns using the Change 

button. If you want to display a solid color fill using the color associated with a 

particular pattern, check the Use Associated Color option. 

The Analysis Components list shows a field for each data channel in your log. 

Select the one for which you want to define the display pattern. Simply click into the 

corresponding cell in the list. Click on the Modify button next and select a pattern 

from the library. Continue until all components have a pattern assigned. 

If you want to add a component to your log, click the Add button and modify the 

new entry. Clicking the Remove button allows to delete a component. Note: 

Existing data will not change when adding or removing components. New 

components will be inserted with a default value of 0%. 


You can edit the percentage values of the Analysis Log in the Tabular Editor (see 

1.3.2.14 The Tabular Editor). If you prefer inserting data interactively using the 

mouse the Analysis Log offers different methods depending on the display style 

chosen. 

Inserting Data Points: 

The Analysis Log deals with a constant sample rate. This is the reason why you 

cannot simply click somewhere in the log column and have a data point inserted. A 

depth range must be defined first. The Analysis Log fills the interval with No Data 

values (-999.25) using the sample rate determined from the data that existed when 

the log was created (either imported from a file or created through Well Logs). 

To define a depth range: 

� Select the Analysis Log. 

� From the Edit menu select the Extend Logs option or right click on the 

log title and select Extend from the flying menu. 

Extend log with constant sample rate


Adjust the depth range of your log. No Data values will be filled in automatically. 

Editing Data In Dynamic Or Fixed Bar Style: 

If your log contains only NULL data (No Data values) you will not see any bar. 

Select the log and move your cursor into the log column and point to the left log 

border where you want to show composition. Your mouse pointer will change to a 

double-sided horizontal arrow. Click and drag the mouse to the right. You will see 

the first component appear. Drag until the entire track is filled with the first 

component (100%). 

Insert 100 % of the first component 

Now move your cursor to the right log border. Click and drag the first component 

to the left. The second component appears from the right. Observe the Status Bar, 

which displays the percentage for the second component. Release your mouse 

button when you reached the desired value. 

Drag from the right to insert the second component 

Point to the right log border again and start dragging the third component keeping 

an eye on the status bar.


www.alt.lu 

Drag the third component from the right 

Continue until the last component becomes visible. 

Editing Data In Line Style: 

Select the log and move your cursor into the log column and point to the left log 

border where you want to the show composition. Your mouse pointer will change 

to a pen symbol. Click and drag the mouse to the right. You will see the first 

component appear. Drag until the entire track is filled with the first component 

(100%). 

Insert 100 % of the first component 

Now point to the right log border and drag to the left to insert the second 

component. Keep an eye on the Status Bar that displays the current percentage value 

filled with the second component. 

Drag from the right to insert the second component


Continue inserting the remaining components using the free hand pen. The smaller 

the sample rate of the log is the smoother the curve will appear. But note that a 

small sample rate will also increase the file size significantly. 

Note: The Status Bar of the WellCAD Workspace will display the volume 

percentage of adjacent components while editing the data. 

Flying Menu: 

Analysis Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 

Get access to Base, Main, Title and Component Settings of the log. 

Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 



Erases all data without removing the log from the document.


www.alt.lu 

Slice at: 


Shift by: 


Extend: 

The user can extend the data range of the log and allocate the necessary resources to 

store the data. No Data values (-999.25) will be filled in automatically. 


You can convert the Analysis Log into a Percentage Log or Lithology Log. 

Additionally you can create a Well log from each component. Select the desired 

conversion option from the Edit > Convert Log To menu. 

Conversion to Lithology Log: 

A single Lithology Log will be created. WellCAD extracts from each depth sample 

the dominant component (the one with the highest percentage) and creates the 

corresponding beds in the output log. You can select the components to be included 

in the new log from the option dialog. 

Select the components that will be taken into account during the conversion to a Lithology Log



The default pattern library can be defined as well as the log position and preferred 

data display style. Set the defaults for the data point position in the Attach Depth 

To field. Major and minor grid details can also be set. All parameters were discussed 

in the Main Settings paragraph.


Percentage Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

The only difference between Analysis and Percentage Log is, that the depth 

increments for the Percentage log do not have to be constant. This results in 

variable bar thickness when the Dynamic Bar display style has been chosen. 

Data Format: 

E.g. 



Percentage Log data shown in Fixed Bar, Dynamic Bar and Line style 

Inserting a new Percentage Log: 

Percentage Logs can be created through ASCII file import where each column 

following the depth will be read as a component. You can also use the Insert New 

Log option from the Edit menu. In this case you will have to specify the number of 

components you would like to handle in the log. The Main Settings dialog will be 

displayed next.


Title: 

Percentage Log Settings dialog box 




Unit: 

Set the unit string that will appear in the log title zone. 

Scale: 

Set the scale low and high value. Usually you will use 0 to 100 but as you might get 

normalized values (0 to 1) or other values you can alter the scale accordingly. 

Grid: 

Set the details for the appearance of vertical grid lines. 

Style: 

The Percentage Log can present its data in three different styles – Dynamic Bar, 

Fixed Bar and Line. For all display styles you can choose whether you want to 

show lines separating the components from each other or not. Check the Display 

Border Lines option if you want to see them.


www.alt.lu 

Dynamic Bar: 

Dynamic Bar style 

The upper and lower limits of adjacent data points are linked together to form a 

continuous dynamic bar. Please have a look to the Advanced settings to know if the 

data points depth belongs to the top, middle or bottom of the bar. 

Fixed Bar: 

Fixed Bar style 

Each data point is displayed as a fixed discrete bar. The thickness of the bar can be 

defined and may be changed from 0.1 to 5.0 mm thickness by entering the 

corresponding value (measured in mm/10) into the edit box. Please have a look to 

the Advanced settings to know if the data points depth belongs to the top, middle 

or bottom of the bar.

Line Style: 

Line style 


In Line style the data points are linked together by a continuous line to form well log 

type curves. The thickness of the line is user defined and may be changed from 

0.1mm to 1.0mm thickness. As for the fixed bar style, the number in the text box is 

in tenths of a millimeter. 

Display Border Lines: 

Uncheck this option if you want to hide the black line separating the components. 

Position: 






depth of 1.


www.alt.lu 









Components: 

Load the pattern dictionary and assign a pattern to each component 

The Percentage Log displays its data by the means of lithology patterns similar to 

the Lithology Log (see 1.5.2 Lithology Columns). 

Select the library (*.LTH file) that contains your lithology patterns using the Change 

button. If you want to display a solid color fill using the color associated with a 

particular pattern, check the Use Associated Color option.


The Analysis Components list shows a field for each data channel in your log. 

Select the one for which you want to define the display pattern. Simply click into the 

corresponding cell in the list. Click on the Modify button next and select a pattern 

from the library. Continue until all components have a pattern assigned. 

If you want to add a component to your log, click the Add button and modify the 

new entry. Clicking the Remove button allows to delete a component. Note: 

Existing data will not change when adding or removing components. New 

components will be inserted with a default value of 0%. 


You can edit the data values of the Percentage Log in the Tabular Editor (see 

1.3.2.14 The Tabular Editor). If you prefer inserting data interactively using the 

mouse the Percentage Log offers different methods depending on the display style 

chosen. 

Inserting Data Points: 

� Select the log you want to edit. 

� Move your mouse pointer to the depth you want to insert a new data point. 

See the Status Bar displaying the mouse coordinates. 

� Press the Shift key and click to insert a new bar or data point. If you display 

the data in Line style you will need to insert two data points at the very 

beginning to see the data (line between two points). 

Data points can be inserted anywhere in the log column. 

Deleting Data Points: 

� Select the log and press the CTRL key. 

� Click on the data point you would like to remove. 

Editing Data In Dynamic Or Fixed Bar Style: 

To edit the percentage value of each component 

� Select the log. 

� Move your cursor to the border between two components. The mouse 

pointer is displayed as a double-sided horizontal arrow now.


www.alt.lu 

� Click and drag border and move it to its new position. The Status Bar 

displays the actual position within the log column. 

If you data is displayed in Fixed Bar style you can change the depth position of a 

bar. 


� Move your cursor to the top or bottom of the bar. The mouse pointer is 

displayed as double-sided vertical arrow. 

� Click and drag the bar to its new depth position. 

Editing Data In Line Style: 


� Move your cursor to the data point you would like to edit. Your mouse 

pointer will be displayed as a pen. 

� Click and drag the data point to its new position. 

Note: The Status Bar of the WellCAD Workspace will display the volume 

percentage of adjacent components while editing the data.

Flying Menu: 

Percentage Log Flying Menu 



Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 




Slice at: 


Shift by: 



www.alt.lu 


You can convert the Percentage Log into an Analysis Log or Lithology Log. 

Additionally you can create a Mud Log from each component. Select the desired 

conversion option from the Edit > Convert Log To menu. 

Conversion to Lithology Log: 

A single Lithology Log will be created. WellCAD extracts from each depth sample 

the dominant component (the one with the highest percentage) and creates the 

corresponding beds in the output log. You can select the components to be included 

in the new log from the option dialog. 

Select the components that will be taken into account during the conversion to a Lithology Log 


The Percentage Log uses the same default parameters set for the Analysis Log.


The default pattern library can be defined as well as the log position and preferred 

data display styles for data and grid lines. Set the defaults for the data point position 

in the Attach Depth To field. All parameters were discussed in the Main Settings 

paragraph.


Structure Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

The Structure log can be used to pick structure/fracture data interactively and 

record depth, dip angle, azimuth (dip direction), true aperture and structure classes. 

You can also import the data from ASCII files. Since WellCAD version 4.2 the user 

can define its own structure ranking scheme. To be compatible with older versions 

of the Structure Log the former Type and Description data columns will 

automatically be converted into Type and Description attribute classes. 

Note that most of the features offered by the Structure Log are part of the Image & 

Structure Processing add-on module for WellCAD. 

Data Format: 

E.g. 

Depth, Azimuth, Dip, Class, Description 

Note, that the data values for the Type, Condition, Form, Opening classes 

displayed in the example above are the codes referring to a particular structure class 

and symbol in the corresponding Category Dictionaries created in ToadCAD. These 

codes are strings and do not have to be numerical codes as in older version of 

WellCAD. 


The data stored in the Structure Log can be displayed in one of three different styles. 

Projection Style: The great circle produced by the intersection of dipping plane and 

borehole is “unrolled” and appears as sine curve. To represent the apparent aperture 

the curve is filled with hatching.

W 

S 

N 

E 


N E S W N 

Unrolled great circle appears as sine curve. 

Tadpole Style: Data is displayed as tadpole style arrow plot. The body of the 

tadpole with respect to the horizontal log scale shows the amount of dip, while the 

tadpole vector line indicates the azimuth (dip direction). Different tadpole colors 

and shapes are used to differentiate structure classes. 

Slab Core Projection Style: The intersection line between the dipping plane and a 

virtual vertical plane of distinct orientation (e.g. North to South) is displayed. 

Structure Log in Projection, Tadpole and Slab Core Projection style.


www.alt.lu 

Inserting a new Structure Log: 

You can import structure data from an ASCII file of the format that is shown in the 

Tabular Editor for this log type. If you want to pick structure interactively, you can 

insert a new Structure Log from the Edit > Insert New Log menu. 

You have also the option to create a new Structure Log from existing Well or Mud 

Logs containing Azimuth, Dip and Aperture (in [m]) data or to start with a blank 

data container. Make your selection from the following dialog box that opens before 

proceeding with the Main Settings. 

Note: To insert a new Structure Log and pick structural events interactively you 

need the Image & Structure add-on module activated on your WellCAD license. 


Structure Log Settings dialog box 

Title: 


the log handle.

Additional Attributes: 


To describe or rank the picked structure the user can define his own attribute classes 

(e.g. Type, Condition, Form, …). The attributes of each class can be read out of 

individual libraries (*.tad file) that can be designed in the ToadCAD application or 

being entered “on the fly”. You can also setup attribute classes without having a 

library attached. There is no restriction in the number of attribute classes that can be 

used. An individual data column is created for each attribute class. 

The check box in front of the class name of the Additional Attributes list is used 

to define the primary attribute class for the Structure Log. E.g. if tadpoles and 

sinusoids should display shape and color derived from the Type class, check the box 

of the corresponding class. The data display depends on the class that has been 

selected as the primary one. To alter or delete an attribute class select the attribute 

first and click the Delete or Settings button. Select an attribute class by clicking on 

the class name. To insert a new attribute class click the Add button at the bottom of 

the Additional Attributes list. 

List of current attributes. 

The one used for data display 

is checked. 

Click to add a new attribute 

class. 

The Attribute Settings dialog will open allowing you to set a name for the new 

class. To attach a library file (*.tad) click the Change button and browse for the *.tad 

file containing the attributes for this class.


www.alt.lu 

Aperture Units: 

Select the units in which the aperture will be measured and stored as data. Possible 

options are [mm] and [in/10]. Please note that the apparent aperture will be 

displayed on screen while the true aperture will be recorded as data. 

Pen Width: 

To enhance the visibility of the sinus curves on screen or print out, select an 

appropriate thickness for the lines drawn. This parameter has no influence on the 

structure ranking and is not recorded as such. 

Position: 



Style: 

Select whether you want to display your data in Projection, Tadpole and Slab Core 

style. For interactive picking of structural events the Projection style offering the 

ability to fit a sine curve interactively might be the best choice. For interpretation 

purposes the Tadpole or Slab Core styles offer a better overview.

Caliper button: 

Structure Log in Projection, Tadpole and Slab Core Projection style. 


Click the Caliper button to access a dialog box with detailed settings important for 

the correct acquisition of dip data. 

Structure projection style settings dialog box 

The accurate caliper settings are important if you want to derive the correct dip 

angle from your interactively fitted sine curve.


www.alt.lu 

The following sketch shows the relationship between caliper and dip angle: 

�z 

Sine curve fitted to unrolled borehole wall 

cal 

�� 

�z �z 

scan (left). A sketch of a borehole with intersecting structure and the relation between dip angle (�), caliper 

(cal) and from sine curve derived �z is shown on the right. 

�z 

The dip angle � is linked to the caliper through: tan � � . Therefore you can 

cal 

either enter an estimated constant caliper value into the Fixed To edit box or you 

use a caliper channel using the Using Log option. Whichever option you choose 

the values must be in inches or millimeter as indicated by the Caliper Unit field. 

When changing the caliper information you will be asked whether you want to 

recalculate all dip angle values. If you choose Yes all dip data values will be changed. 

If your selection is No, the data display changes according to the new caliper 

settings. This might result in a mismatch between observed and picked structure. 

To swap the references and count the azimuth angle from the right log column 

border instead from the left, check the Reverse option. 

If yo would like to enable the vertical grid display check the corresponding option.

Tadpole: 

Structure Tadpole style settings dialog box 


When displaying structural data in Tadpole style you can set a low and high scale 

value for the dip angle and whether the data is displayed on a linear or sinus scale. 

The latter one "stretches" the vertical grid line spacing closer to low dips and 

"squeezes" the grid line spacing towards high dip (equivalent to a logarithmic grid 

used with wireline curves). Usually the values are set from 0 to 90 degree. If the 

vertical gird lines are displayed, the Grid box shows the frequency with which the 

major and minor grid will be displayed. Click on Settings to change the grid style. 

Slab Core: 

Structure Slab Core style settings dialog box


Point of 

view 

www.alt.lu 

Borehole 

Plane along selected 

profile 

To display a structure log in Slab core projection mode the log must have a caliper 

value to work with. The effect of increasing the borehole diameter or caliper on a 

given intersection line is to decrease its slope. Unless corrected this will give an 

apparent decrease in the interpreted dip of the structure. 

You can use a constant caliper value to work with (Fixed To) or select a Well Log 

providing the necessary information from the Using Log drop down list. 

Select the units of your caliper (mm or inches) by choosing one of the Caliper Unit 

options. 

When changing the caliper information you will be asked whether you want to 

recalculate all dip angle values. If you choose Yes all dip data values will be changed. 

If your selection is No, the data display changes according to the new caliper 

settings. 

The following sketch illustrates what the Slab Core projection style displays. 

W 

S 

N 

Slab core projection 

E N 

S 

Intersection of dipping 

plane and borehole 

You can set a new profile orientation by changing the Azimuth value. See a preview 

of your profile in the Slab Core pane. 

You can change between a Full Size and a Fixed Size display of the Structure Log 

data in Slab Core style while clicking on the appropriate radio button. 

In Fixed Size style the length of the displayed intersection line is always set to 4/5 

of the Structure Log column width.



New data points and already existing values can be edited using the Tabular Editor 

(see 1.3.2.14 The Tabular Editor). If your data is displayed in Projection or Tadpole 

style you can use your mouse to insert and edit data points in the log column. 

Editing Data in Projection Style: 

Usually you superimpose the Structure Log to an Image or RGB Log to pick the 

events seen in the images. To insert a new structure and fitting a sine wave: 


� Move your mouse pointer onto the feature you would like to pick and 

press the Shift key. Your cursor is displayed as a cross. 

� Click to set a point of the sine wave. With your Shift key still pressed 

continue to click until the displayed sine wave fits the observed structure. 

(Try setting the first points to the min and max of the observed structure.) 

� Release the Shift key to lock the sine wave in and derive azimuth and dip 

angle. 

To delete a sine wave: 


� Press the CTRL key and click on the sine wave you wish to delete. 

To measure the aperture: 


� Hold down the CTRL and SHIFT keys. 

� Move your mouse pointer onto a sine wave. The cursor’s shape will 

change. 

� Click and drag the sinusoid apart and fit it to the opening seen on screen. 

The aperture value will automatically be saved along with depth, dip and 

azimuth angle.


www.alt.lu 

To rank your picked features, right click on a sine wave. A structure category list 

derived from the available attribute classes will be displayed. 

Assign a value per attribute class 

Select a value for each attribute class by clicking into the corresponding cell and 

navigating through the contents of the attribute libraries using the drop down 

controls. You can also add a value on the fly. To do so you have to open the tabular 

editor and enter a value there the first time. This value will become available in the 

drop down list of the attribute class the next time (but it will not be part of the 

library.) If you want to apply the changes to all picks of the same type as the one 

you right clicked on, check the Change All option. Click OK to apply the changes. 

(Remember that you can create your own attribute libraries using ToadCAD.) 

If you want to insert a copy of the sine wave you fitted before: 


� Hold down the Shift key and Right click to insert a copy of the last structure 

fitted. The position you point to with your mouse is the minimum of the


sine wave that will be entered if you Right Click. Always the last structure 

inserted will be remembered. 

You can edit an existing sine wave and alter depth and azimuth position as well as its 

amplitude. 


� Move your mouse pointer onto a sine wave. The cursor’s shape will change 

depending on its position. 

� Click and drag the curve to alter shape and position. 

Change depth and azimuth (left). Changing the amplitude effects the dip angle (right). 

Editing Data in Tadpole Style: 

Please note that the presentation style of the tadpoles (color, size, vector style) 

corresponds to the primary attribute selected in the Structure Log main settings. 

To insert or delete tadpoles: 


� Hold down the Shift key and click to insert a new data point. 

� Press the CTRL key and click on a tadpole to delete it. 

To change the category settings right click on a tadpole to display the structure 

category list as already explained for the data editing in Projection style. 

You can change depth, dip angle (horizontal position of the tadpole within the log 

column) and azimuth angle (position the vector points to). 


� Move your mouse pointer onto a tadpole.


www.alt.lu 

� Depending on the position the cursor shape changes. Click and drag to 

move the entire tadpole or rotate the tadpole’s vector. 

Click and drag the tadpole to a new position (left), rotate the vector and change the azimuth direction (right). 

Flying Menu: 

Structure Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 





Slice at: 


Shift by: 



You can convert Structure Log data into Mud Logs – one Mud log will be created 

for the dip, azimuth (or dip direction) and aperture data. 

It is also possible to create a new Structure Log containing a subset of selected 

structure categories from the original Structure Log. Go to the Edit > Convert Log 

To menu and select the desired conversion option. 

For both conversion options you can determine which dip, azimuth, aperture ranges 

and attributes are exported. The different options should been seen as optional 

filters. If not checked, no filter will be applied and all attributes or dip, azimuth or 

aperture ranges will be transferred. 

Select the structure classes to convert


www.alt.lu 


Default settings for Attribute Dictionary and Default Name of the attribute can 

be made. Additionally a default constant Caliper can be set as well as a data display 

Style, Aperture units, Pen width, vertical grid frequency and style, log Position, 

slab core profile azimuth (Azimuth), Projection Reference and Slab Core Style. 

All parameter were already explained in the log’s Main Settings.

Breakout Log 

Description: 


The Breakout log can be used to pick vertical features such as borehole wall 

breakouts and tensile fractures interactively from an image. The recorded data 

contains depth (determined from the center of the picked feature), azimuth (position 

on the borehole wall in deg), tilt (inclination of the breakout axis from the borehole 

axis), length, opening angle in degree and one or multiple attributes describing the 

picked feature. You can also import the data from ASCII files. 

Data Format: 

Depth, Azimuth, Tilt, Length, Opening, Class1, Class2, 

Class3… 

E.g. 

Note, that the data values for the Type class displayed in the example above are the 

codes referring to a particular breakout class and symbol in the corresponding 

Category Dictionaries (*.TAD file) created in ToadCAD. These codes are strings 

and do not have to be numerical codes as in older versions of WellCAD. Please 

refer to the ToadCAD manual in order to learn about how to create attribute classes 

(Tadpole Libraries). 


The data stored in the Breakout Log can be displayed in Projection and Symbol 

style. 

Projection Style: A line tracing or a polygon framing the breakout as shown in the 

oriented and unrolled image of the borehole wall. The horizontal scale is from 0 to 

360 deg. 

Symbol Style: The picked breakout is displayed as tadpole. The body of the tadpole 

with respect to the horizontal log scale shows the azimuth position. If the tadpole 

has been created with a vector line (in ToadCAD) it will indicate the tilt component.


www.alt.lu 

It is optional to display the opening angle as a horizontal bar. Different tadpole 

colors and shapes can be used to differentiate between breakout classes. 

Inserting a new Breakout Log: 

Breakout Log data displayed in Projection and Symbol style 

You can import breakout data from ASCII files of the format that is shown in the 

Tabular Editor (*.TXT or *.WAJ files). If you want to pick breakouts interactively, 

you can insert a new Breakout Log from the Edit > Insert New Log menu. The 

Main settings dialog box will open. 

Note: To insert a new Breakout Log and pick linear features interactively you need 

the Image & Structure add-on module activated on your WellCAD license. 


Breakout Log Settings dialog box

Title: 




Additional Attributes: 

To describe or rank the picked breakout you can define your own attribute classes 

(e.g. Type, Condition, Form, …). The attributes of each class can be read out of 

individual libraries (*.tad file) that can be designed in the ToadCAD application or 

being entered “on the fly”. You can also setup attribute classes without having a 

library attached. There is no restriction in the number of attribute classes that can be 

used. An individual data column is created for each attribute class. 

The check box in front of the class name of the Additional Attributes list is used 

to define the primary attribute class for the Breakout Log. E.g. if tadpoles and 

polygons should display shape and color derived from the Type class, check the box 

of the corresponding class. The data display depends on the class that has been 

selected as the primary one. To alter or delete an attribute class select the attribute 

first and click the Delete or Settings button. Select an attribute class by clicking on 

the class name. To insert a new attribute class click the Add button at the bottom of 

the Additional Attributes list. 

List of current attributes. 

The one used for data display 

is checked. 

Click to add a new attribute 

class. 

The Attribute Settings dialog will open allowing you to set a name for the new 

class. To attach a library file (*.tad) click the Change button and browse for the *.tad 

file containing the attributes for this class.


www.alt.lu 

Length Units: 

Select the units in which the length of a breakout will be measured and stored as 

data. Possible options are [mm], [cm], [m], [ft], [in] and [in/10]. Please note that the 

apparent aperture will be displayed on screen while the true aperture will be 

recorded as data. 

The length of a breakout is the length parallel to the borehole axis 

Pen Width: 

To enhance the visibility of the lines on screen or print out, select an appropriate 

thickness for the lines drawn. This parameter has no influence on the breakout 

ranking and is not recorded as such. 

Position: 



Style: 

Select whether you want to display your data in Projection or Symbol style. For 

interactive picking of breakouts the Projection style offering the ability to fit a line 

or box interactively might be the best choice. For interpretation purposes the 

Symbol style offers a better overview. 

Caliper button: 

Click the Caliper button to access a dialog box with detailed settings important for 

the correct acquisition of breakout data.

Breakout projection style settings dialog box 


The accurate caliper settings are important if you want to derive the correct tilt angle 

and length from your interactively fitted line or polygon. 

To swap the references and count the azimuth angle from the right log column 

border instead from the left, check the Reverse option. 

Enable the Grid option if you would like to display vertical grid lines. 

Symbol button: 

Structure Tadpole style settings dialog box 

When displaying breakout data in Symbol style you can set a low and high scale 

value for the azimuth range. Usually the values are set from 0 to 360 degree. If the 

vertical gird lines are displayed adjust the frequency of major and minor grid in the 

corresponding edit boxes and click on Settings to adjust the grid styles. 

Optionally the opening angle of the breakout can be displayed as well. It will be 

represented by a horizontal line drawn through the tadpole. The length of the line 

reflects the opening angle according to the horizontal scale.


www.alt.lu 

Tadpoles with or without vector can be created and combined to libraries in 

ToadCAD. If a symbol has been created with a vector line the position of the vector 

reflects the Tilt parameter recorded in the data. 


Usually you superimpose the Breakout Log to an Image or RGB Log to pick the 

events seen in the images. To insert a new breakout pick you will start fitting a line 

first: 

� Select the Breakout Log (click on the log title). 

� Move your mouse pointer onto the feature you would like to pick and 

press the Shift key. Your cursor is displayed as a cross. 

� Left click to set the starting point of a line. With your Shift key still pressed 

left click a second time at the end of the breakout. 

� Release the Shift key to lock the line and record azimuth, length and tilt 

angle. 

Please note: Depending on the Draw Mirror option set in the default settings of the 

Breakout Log (Tools →Options, Logs, Breakout Log) you will create a mirror of the 

line, which is shifted by 180° and recorded as well. If you want to avoid a mirror to 

be drawn disable the corresponding option in the logs default settings or use a right 

click to set the start and end points of the breakout line. 

Changing Length and Tilt: 

If the log is still selected and you move the cursor close to the start or end point of 

the breakout pick you can change length and tilt by dragging the points (press left 

mouse button and move the mouse). 

To measure the opening angle: 

� Select the Breakout Log. 

� Hold down the CTRL and SHIFT keys. 

� Move your mouse pointer onto a line. The cursor’s shape will change. 

� Click and drag the line apart and fit it to the opening seen on screen. The 

opening angle will automatically be determined and saved along with depth, 

tilt and azimuth angle.

To delete a breakout pick: 



� Press the CTRL key and click on the breakout pick you wish to delete. 

Flying Menu: 

Breakout Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 



Erases all data but does not remove the log from the document. 

Slice at: 

Splits the data set into upper and lower part.


www.alt.lu 

Shift by: 



You can convert Breakout Log data into Mud Logs – one log will be created for 

each of the recorded parameters (i.e. Azimuth, Tilt, Opening Angle and Tilt). 

It is also possible to create a new Breakout Log containing a subset of selected 

breakout categories from the original Log. Go to the Edit > Convert Log To menu 

and select the desired conversion option. 

For both conversion options you can determine which of the data parameters is 

exported. The different options should been seen as optional filters. If not checked, 

no filter will be applied and all attributes or tilt, azimuth, length or opening ranges 

will be transferred. 

Select the breakout classes and attributes to convert



Default settings for Attribute Dictionary and Default Name of the attribute can 

be made. Additionally a default constant Caliper can be set as well as a data display 

Style, Length units, Pen width, vertical grid frequency and styles, log Position and 

Projection Reference. All parameter were already explained in the log’s Main 

Settings. One useful option is the Breakout Mirror. With each inserted breakout a 

second breakout shifted by 180° and mirrored in tilt will be recorded.


Bio Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

Biostratigraphic Logs (short: Bio Logs) are used to display count rates of distinct 

features (e.g. fossils) per depth interval referred to as taxon in this manual. The log 

stores and displays the count rate (floating point number) of a user-defined number 

of different features for each depth interval. 

Data Format: 

TopDepth, BottomDepth, Nature, Val1, Val2, … ,ValN 

E.g. 


Bio Log: Count rates presented in vertical and horizontal bar style (left and mid). To show only the occurrence 

of a certain feature a (user defined) symbol can be drawn (right).

Inserting a new Bio Log: 


Bio Logs can only be created through ASCII file import. The format must be the 

same as displayed in the Tabular Editor view of a Bio Log’s data. 


Bio Log Settings dialog box 

Title: 



Frequency Scale: 

Using the Frequency Scale settings you can change the minimum and maximum 

count rate scale values of the log as well as the scale mode from linear to 

logarithmic. 

Use min max values: 

Enter new low and high count rate values in the corresponding fields. The total 

minimum and maximum count rates of the entire data set are displayed next to the 

edit boxes.


www.alt.lu 

Auto set per taxon: 

By choosing this option the count rate scale is set for each column automatically 

according to minimum and maximum found in the column. 

Auto set per sample: 

By choosing this option the count rate scale is set for each row in the Tabular editor 

(depth sample). The scale high corresponds to the maximum value of the data row 

the low value is set to zero. 

Auto set global: 

The maximum count rate of all data values is determined and set as scale high value 

while the low value is set to zero. 

Using the Mode drop down list you can toggle between logarithmic and linear 

display style of your data. 

If you check the Reverse option you will reverse the scale. Low values will be on 

the left, right value on the right side of each taxon column. The normal orientation 

is with the low attached to the left hand side of the column and the high attached to 

the right hand side. 

Grid: 

You can group taxons using a vertical grid line as separator between groups. Enter a 

number into the Grid edit box and check the Display Grids option. The number 

you have entered corresponds to the amount of taxon names per group. 

Example of grid application in Bio Log


Position: 



Style: 

The Bio Log supports four different display styles. Each display style has its own set 

of settings. You can access them by clicking on the appropriate button on the right 

side of the dialog box. 

Vertical: 

The Vertical display style is similar to the Mud Log display styles. A count rate is 

represented by the horizontal extension of a bar, through the amplitude of a curve 

or the horizontal position of a symbol. The scale is oriented horizontally. 

Count rates represented by length of the bar 

Count rates represented by amplitude of the curve


www.alt.lu 

When opening the Vertical settings the following dialog box appears. 

Bio Log Vertical display style settings dialog box 

Style: 

Check the option according to the desired data display style. 

Pen: 

Set the color and line style that will be used. 

Shading: 

Apply shading to the left or right side of the curve when data is displayed in Line 

style. 

Horizontal: 

In Horizontal mode the count rate value is represented by the height of a box. In 

other words, the scale is oriented vertically. 

Count rates represented by height of the bar


When opening the Horizontal settings the following dialog box appears. 

Bio Log Horizontal display style settings dialog box 

Pen: 

You can set the color, style and thickness of the line representing the top of the bar. 

It is recommended to apply a shading in order to see the full bar. 

Shading: 

Check the Bottom option to fill the bar with the pen color. 

Box Height: 

When checking the Fixed option the data maximum value corresponds to a box 

height that is specified in mm/10. The box will always appear with this height even 

if you change the documents depth scale. 

If the Dynamic option has been chosen the data maximum corresponds to a box 

height that is measured in Borehole Document depth units. The height of the box 

will change with the depth scale of the Borehole Document. This will avoid having 

bars overlapping each other. 

Palette: 

The amplitude of count rates is displayed using a false color palette. The palette can 

be chosen or customized in the Palette Editor (see 1.5.4 Color Palette Design). In 

order to see a bar that is high enough to display the color ensure that the Min. 

Sample Thickness parameter in the Bio Log default settings is large enough. If you 

want to apply the changes you made in the default settings simply create a copy of 

your Bio Log (e.g. CTRL + C followed by CTRL + V).


www.alt.lu 

Symbolic: 

Data displayed in symbolic style appears in bars centered in the middle of the taxon 

column. The horizontal extension of the bar reflects the actual count rate. Each bar 

can be filled with a lithology pattern or symbol corresponding to a litho pattern 

code. The pattern code can be set in the second line of the taxon’s count rate cell in 

the Tabular Editor. A comment set in the third line of the count rate cell will be 

displayed on top of the bars. 

Symbolic style data display(left) and corresponding Tabular Editor format (right) 

When opening the Symbolic settings the following dialog box appears. 

Bio Log display style settings dialog box 

Symbol Dictionary: 

Select a pattern library (*.LTH file created with LithCAD) containing the symbols 

corresponding to your codes set in the count rate cells. 

Bar Width: 

Set the height of the bars in mm/10.


Style: 

If the Display Samples Only option is checked the data will be displayed as a left 

aligned bar similar to the vertical style but with the depth interval displayed beside. 

The symbol displayed left of the depth interval string can be controlled through the 

code set in the Nature column. Use one of the four following codes: DE, CO, CL 

or CA. 

Taxons Sort Order: 

You can sort the data within the Bio Log by choosing one of nine options from the 

Taxons Sort Order drop down list. 

Not Sorted: 

This is the default setting. The data appears as it is imported from the source file. 

Ascending / Descending first occurrence: 

The process sorts the columns in ascending or descending order using the first 

(topmost) count rate value found in each taxon column. 

Ascending / Descending last occurrence 

The process sorts the columns in ascending or descending order using the last 

(bottommost) count rate value found in each taxon column. 

Ascending / Descending name 

The columns are sorted in ascending or descending alphabetical order using the 

taxon names. 

Ascending / Descending frequency 

The columns are sorted in ascending or descending order using the total count rate 

of each taxon column. 

Advanced:


www.alt.lu 



depth of 1. 










Except changing the data values in the Tabular Editor the Bio Log supports no 

other interactive editing tools. Please note that each count rate cell can contain up to 

three line: 

1st line: Count Rate 

2nd line: Pattern Code 

3rd line: Comment 

The values hosted in line three and three will be used in Symbolic display style only.

Flying Menu: 

Bio Log Flying Menu 



Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 




Slice at: 


Shift by: 



www.alt.lu 


You can convert the count rates for each Bio Log taxon into a Mud Log. 

Additionally you can select a subset of taxons and create a new Bio Log for them. 


Select a sub set of taxons for the new Bio Log 

Some general parameters, which were already explained in the Main Settings can be 

set: Log position, default display style and color palette for the False Color style. 

Font and symbol dictionary can be set for the symbolic style as well as bar width and 

a minimum thickness for the bars in false color style.

Engineering Log 

Description: 


The Engineering Log can be used to show construction and completion details of a 

well. Logs can be presented side by side to depict a diary of construction or drilling 

events. Objects such as different casing, cementation, gravel pack, water and more 

can be combined and displayed. 

Four different kinds of symbol classes are supported: 

- Drill Items, they are characterized by a top depth, bottom depth and an external 

diameter. They present the drill hole itself. 

- Solid Items, these are cylindrical items which occupy a volume in the borehole 

(such as a packer). A top depth, bottom depth, an external diameter and a radial 

position within the hole describe them. 

- Hollow Items are cylindrical and occupy a volume in the borehole with an 

internal space that can be filled with any other liquid or solid item. A typical 

example is a casing. A top and bottom depth, an external diameter, an internal 

diameter and a radial position in the hole characterize hollow items. 

Liquid Items fill all accessible borehole volume within a given depth range from a 

given injection point (e.g. cement or water). A top depth, bottom depth, injection 

point and radial position describe liquid items. 

Data Format: 

E.g. 

Item, TopDepth, BottomDepth, Position, External 

Diameter, Internal Diameter, Injection Depth 

Please note that for the ASCII export/import the data format differs from the 

Tabular Editor display.


www.alt.lu 

The following sample shows the structure of a *.WAE file: 

GroundLevel,0.00 

Drill,15.00,300 

Drill,50.00,150 

Drill,90.00,150 

Centralizer,11.50,12.50,0,300,225 

PlainCasing,0.00,15.00,0,225,205 

Cement,1.00,15.00,13.26,130 

PlainCasing,0.00,35.00,0,100,70 

Gravel,30.00,52.00,16.88,58.5366 

PerforatedCasing,35.00,50.00,0,100,70 

Centralizer,2.50,3.50,0,300,225 

Shoe,14.00,15.00,0,260,225 

Cement,15.00,30.00,17.16,-58.5366 

Cement,2.00,15.00,13.04,-74.216 

PlainCasing,50.00,60.00,0,100,90 

Cement,52.00,59.60,56.16,65.5052 

Shoe,58.00,60.00,0,150,100 

PlainCasing,0.00,72.00,0,20,10 

Packer,68.00,70.00,0,150 

Packer,82.00,84.00,0,150 

Water,23.32,60.00,23.32,18 

Water,60.00,90.00,0.00,0 

Gauge,64.10,67.10,30.9789,17.8439 

Tranducer,73.25,76.15,28.5006,19.8265 

Gauge,77.20,80.25,27.5093,14.8699



Engineering Log with drill item (borehole), hollow item (casing) and liquid items (cement, water). 

Inserting a new Engineering Log: 

You can create an Engineering Log when importing an ASCII file and using the 

Text File Import Wizard. Most of the time the Engineering Log is created 

interactively using the Insert New Log option from the Edit menu. The Main 

Settings dialog box will open next. 


Core Description Log Settings dialog box


www.alt.lu 

Title: 



Diameter Scaling: 

The Diameter Scaling gives you the option to select a scaled width for the log 

column. The scaled width should be set to be greater than the widest borehole item 

that you intend to place in the Engineering Log. The scale values that appear on the 

log handle are one half (i.e. the radius) of the set diameter scaling value. 

Example of 100 mm diameter scaling and 80 mm 

For example, if the widest item is a drill hole of diameter 80 (mm) then the Diameter 

Scaling needs to be set at, say 100 (using the same scale units as the drill item). This 

will give a scale gap of 10 (mm) between the drill item and each edge of the 

Engineering log column. 

Position: 



Display Style: 

You can choose whether to display the entire well or just the left or right half of the 

well.

Full, Left and Right display styles 


Pattern: 

Choose the color and style of the background fill. You have the choice from plain 

color to various forms of cross-hatching. The fill is the area between the largest drill 

item and the log column margins, and is used to represent the ground surrounding 

the drill and borehole items. If you have an empty log i.e. you have not yet created 

the borehole itself, then the whole log column area will be filled with the style 

selected. 


You can insert new items and edit existing ones using the Tabular Editor. It is also 

possible to interactively edit items within the log column using the mouse. 

Inserting And Deleting Items: 

When using the Tabular Editor you simply add a new row (see “1.3.2.14 The 

Tabular Editor”). The Select An Equipment Item dialog box opens. 

To insert an item interactively: 


� Move you mouse into the log column and point to the position you want 

to insert the new item. 

� Press the Shift key and click. The Select An Equipment Item dialog box 

opens.


www.alt.lu 

Select an item from the 

list to insert it 

Select the item you want to add to the Engineering Log 

If you want to delete an item simply delete the corresponding row in the Tabular 

Editor or select the log, hold down the CTRL key and click on the item you want to 

remove. 

Four different categories of items exist – drill, solid, hollow and fluid items. Each of 

them requires different fields to be filled in the data format. 

Drill Item: 

Drill items are the items, which make up the borehole itself. A bottom depth and a 

diameter characterize them. The drill item top depth is automatically set to the 

bottom depth of the drill item above it (on top of it) or, if there is none, it will be set 

to the surface depth. This ensures that at any given depth, only one drill item exists, 

and that the borehole is continuous (no non-drilled depth zones between two drilled 

zones). At least one drill item must exist in any engineering log. 

Select the Borehole Drill item from the items list and set the depth as well as the 

external diameter data using the Tabular Editor.

Drill Item 

Example of a log with three drill items 


Solid Items: 

Solid items are cylindrical items, which occupy a volume in the borehole that cannot 

be filled with any other items, liquid or solid. A typical example is a packer. A top 

depth, a bottom depth, an external diameter and a radial position in the borehole 

describe solid items. The item is centered in the hole if the radial position is set to 

zero. 

Solid Item: 

Packer 

Example of a well with a packer 

Hollow Items: 

Hollow items are cylindrical solid items, which occupy a volume in the borehole 

with an internal space that can be filled with any other items, liquid or solid. A 

typical example is a casing. A top depth, a bottom depth, an external diameter, an 

internal diameter and a radial position in the borehole describe hollow items.


www.alt.lu 

Hollow Item: Plain 

Casing 

Hollow Item: Perforated 

Casing 

Example of a well with two kinds of casing 

Fluid Items: 

Liquid items are items that "flow" and, within a given depth range, fill all the 

accessible borehole volume from an injection point onwards. A typical liquid item is 

water or cement. A top and bottom depth, the injection point depth and radial 

position describe liquid items. 

Liquid Item: Cement 

Liquid Item: Water 

Liquid Item: Gravel 

Example of a well gravel, cement and water fill 

Editing Items: 

You can edit items interactively using the mouse: 


� Click on the object you would like to edit. 

� Click and drag the little handles that will appear to change the position of an 

item. 

Nevertheless it might be more accurate to change the item parameters using the 

Tabular Editor.

Flying Menu: 

Engineering Log Flying Menu 



Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 


Shift by: 



www.alt.lu 


You can set defaults for the background fill Pattern, log Position and Display 

Style as already explained in the Main Settings. The feature to change the Item 

Dictionary is not available yet.

Shading Log 

Description: 


The Shading Log is no real log type, as it contains no own data. Shading logs use 

one or two Well Logs to fill the area between curves, curve and log border or curve 

and user defined limit with a solid color. 

Display Examples: 

Shading Log used to fill the area between two curves (left), between track border and curve (mid) and between 

fixed limit and curve (right). 

Inserting a new Shading Log: 

The Shading Log can only be created using the Insert New Log from the Edit 

menu. The main settings dialog box will pop up next. 

It is good practice to select the log(s) you want to use as boundary for the shading 

first before inserting a new Shading Log. This way the left and right position of the 

selected log is copied and applied to the new Shading Log. 




www.alt.lu 

Title: 



Position: 



Borders: 

You have to define the left and right border of the shaded region. As the left or right 

limit the log column border, the values of a log listed in the drop down control or a 

constant value typed into the control can be used. At least one of the borders must 

be a log. It is recommended that the Shading Log and the log defining the shading 

border be of the same width. 

Shading Color: 

Select the color that will be used as solid shading color. 

Flying Menu: 

Shading Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. The log(s) used as shading border are copied as well.


Copy: 

Copies the data set to the clipboard so that it can be pasted into a Borehole 

Document. The log(s) used as shading border are copied as well. 

Delete: 



3D Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

The 3D Log displays a three dimensional image of the borehole cylinder using 

caliper information to model the shape of the cylinder and amplitude information to 

map colors to the cylinder surface. The log must be linked to Image or Well Logs in 

order to retrieve the caliper and amplitude data. The 3D Log itself does not store 

any data. 

The Image & Structure Processing add-on module must be activated on your 

WellCAD license in order to create a 3D Log. 


3D Log display as fully rendered cylinder (left) or as wire frame (right)

Inserting A New 3D Log: 


A 3D log can only be created using the Insert New Log option from the Edit 

menu. The 3D Log Components dialog box will be displayed. 

The appearance of the 3D borehole cylinder is a combination of geometric and 

color information. The shape of the cylinder is derived from the data provided as 

the Caliper component. The cylinder surface color is defined through the 

Amplitude component. 

Select the log to be used as the Caliper component of the 3D log from the Caliper 

drop down list. The combo box is pre-filled with possible choices. These are None, 

which means that the cylinder radius will be constant, and all Well Logs, Formula 

Logs and Image Logs present in the borehole document. 

Select the log that will be used as the Amplitude component of the 3D log from the 


which means that the cylinder surface color will be constant, or Well Logs, Formula 

Logs and Image Logs present in the borehole document.


www.alt.lu 

3D Log with caliper and amplitude set (left), only caliper set (middle) and only amplitude set (right) 



Title: 




Projection: 

The 3D image of the borehole can be shown in one of three different projection 

styles – Perspective, 3 rd Angle and None. 

Perspective: 

The Perspective mode provides the best illusion of the third dimension. In this 

mode objects, which are more distant from the observer, look smaller than they 

actually are. The observer’s point of view is placed at the middle of the current 

window of the 3D log and the perspective view is converging to a distant point, 

which is aligned on an axis normal to the computer screen. 

Note: printing a 3D log in Perspective mode with a continuous paper style may lead 

to strange results as the observer’s point of view varies from one section of the log 

to another. 

3D Log in Perspective Projection


www.alt.lu 

3 rd Angle: 

The 3rd Angle mode provides a certain illusion of the third dimension while 

preserving the apparent size of objects, regardless of their distance from the 

observer. Using the 3rd angle mode parallel lines remain parallel. 

Note: this is the preferred mode to print in continuous paper mode 

3D Log in 3 rd Angle Projection 

None: 

Using the None projection mode, no illusion of the third dimension is used. The 

3D look relies solely on the effects of lighting and shading. 

3D Log without Projection applied

Frame: 


If no Frame option has been selected, only the surface of the cylinder is rendered. 

When Display Frame mode is checked, both the wire frame and the surface of the 

cylinder are rendered. If only the wire frame should be displayed check the Display 

Frame and Frame Only options. 

3D Log without frame (left), with frame displayed (middle) and frame only (right) displayed 

Cylinder Faces: 

The number of faces used to render the 3D log cylinder is controlled by the angular 

resolution of the component logs, whichever has the highest angular resolution. 

However, it is possible to control the minimum number of faces used for rendering. 

This can be helpful in the case when only low angular resolution data are available, 

for instance while rendering a 3D log based only on a 4 arm caliper together with no 

amplitude component. In that case, WellCAD uses an interpolation technique to 

increase the number of angular data points. 

Caliper: 

If the caliper component log exists the low and high scale of the caliper can be set. 

The minimum value corresponds to the geometrical center of the cylinder, while the 

maximum value corresponds to the diameter of the cylinder that would completely 

fill the available log column width. 

Amplitude: 

The behavior of the scaling and Palette button depends upon the type of 

component, which is used for the amplitude. 

The amplitude component is set to none: 

When the amplitude component is set to none, the color used to render the surface 

of the cylinder is constant. Therefore, the minimum and maximum values are 

meaningless. The Palette button is used to set the cylinder surface color.


www.alt.lu 

The amplitude component is a Well-Log: 

The color used to render the surface at a particular depth point, is the color 

extracted from a color palette corresponding to the Well-log data point at that 

particular depth. The color palette is a property of the 3D log itself. 

The minimum and maximum values are used to set the two extreme data values of 

the palette. The palette button starts a palette editor which can be use to edit the 

palette (see 1.5.4 Color Palette Design). 

The amplitude component is an Image Log: 

The colors used to render the surface of the cylinder are the same as the ones used 

to for the Image log data. The minimum, maximum and palette settings are shared 

between the amplitude log component and the 3D log. Changing any of these 

settings, regardless of whether this is done using the 3D log settings dialogue box or 

the component’s image log settings dialogue box, will affect the settings of both 

logs. 

Position: 



Components: 

The appearance of the 3D borehole cylinder is a combination of geometric and 

color information. The shape of the cylinder is derived from the data provided as 

the Caliper component. The cylinder surface color is defined through the 

Amplitude component. 

Select the log to be used as the Caliper component of the 3D log from the Caliper 


which means that the cylinder radius will be constant, and all Well Logs, Formula 

Logs and Image Logs present in the borehole document.


Select the log that will be used as the Amplitude component of the 3D log from the 


which means that the cylinder surface color will be constant, or Well Logs, Formula 

Logs and Image Logs present in the borehole document. 

Lightning: 

The illusion of the three dimensions is largely due to the effect of the lighting. The 

lighting effect is composed of two independent white lights. The first one is an 

Ambient light which illuminates the object in a non-directional manner, producing 

the same amount of light for all directions. The second light is a Spot light. It 

illuminates the object with a directional beam of light. The spot light is situated in 

the vertical plane containing the axis of the cylinder and the observer. 

The lighting settings can be changed using the 3D log lighting settings dialogue box. 

The amplitude of the Ambient light and of the Spot light can be controlled 

independently using the two intensity sliders. The maximum light intensity is 

produced when the slider is in the topmost position. The spot light angle is 

controlled with the V.pos slider. When the slider is in the middle position, the spot 

beam is horizontal. When the slider is in topmost position the spot beam is almost 

vertical, illuminating the object with a top to bottom light beam. 

Most often a light configuration as shown below is used. 

Commonly used lighting set up


www.alt.lu 

Flying Menu: 

3D Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 




The default ambient and spot light intensity are numerical value ranging from 0 to 1. 

A value of 1 sets the light intensity to its maximum value while a value of 0 sets it to 

its minimum intensity. Lighting settings are part of the log main settings. 

Changing the memory buffer size 

To render the 3D object, WellCAD uses a memory buffer to hold internally the 

bitmap representing the scene, regardless if it is on screen or on printer. The bigger 

the memory buffer, the more detail of the 3D log is rendered, but remember also 

that more memory processing time will be used. For an average configuration, a 

value of 2048 KB is a good choice. For higher resolution on a more powerful 

machine with more RAM, the value can be increase to 5192 or even more.

Polar & Rose Log 

Description: 


The Polar & Rose Log is dynamically linked to a Structure or Breakout Log. Its 

purpose is to display a summary of dip / breakout data from a distinct depth interval 

in various diagrams such as polar projection plots, histograms, vector plots or rose 

diagrams. The only data stored in the Polar & Rose Log is the top and bottom of the 

depth interval where the structure / breakout data has been taken from and a text 

comment. Multiple diagrams of different depth intervals can be displayed within the 

same log. 

Data Format: 

E.g. 


TopDepth, BottomDepth, Description 

The display style options of the Polar & Rose Log are different for Structure Log 

and Breakout Log data. A short overview is given below, a more detailed discussion 

will be provided in the Main Settings paragraph. 

Structure Log: 

Polar Projection plot (left), Rose Diagram (mid left), Dip Histogram (mid right), Mean Azimuth & Dip 

(right).


www.alt.lu 

Breakout Log: 

Vector plot (left), Woodcock Diagram (right) 

Examples of a Rose Diagram - Breakout (left), Opening Angle Distribution (middle), Distribution of 

breakout types (right)). 

Inserting a new Polar & Rose Log: 

Even if you can create a Polar & Rose log through the ASCII file import and Text 

File Import Wizard they are usually created using the Insert New Log command 

from the Edit menu. You have to link the new log to a Structure Log, which 

provides the data for the polar and rose diagrams using the Polar & Rose Log 

Component dialog box. Depending on the number of attribute classes present in 

the linked source you can define and apply constraints to the data. By selecting 

distinct attribute classes and attribute values only a subset of data can be handled in 

the Polar & Rose Log. If none of the attribute classes has been selected a filter is not 

applied and all data is taken into account.


Title: 

Specify the data source and select from the structure categories 

Polar & Rose Log Settings dialog box 




Position: 


default unit displayed is the one set for the Ruler Bar (see 1.3.2.4 Positioning Logs).


www.alt.lu 

Box: 

Polar & Rose diagrams are displayed in boxes similar to Comment log or Cross 

Section log data. So-called pinches are displayed to point to the depth interval if the 

vertical extension of the box is larger than the depth interval. Note that the 

minimum vertical extension of a box corresponds to the log column width. 

Pinches can be displayed on the left, right or on both sides of the box. Select None 

if you want to hide box border lines completely. 

Box Info Options: 

Within each box title, depth information and legends can be displayed along with the 

diagram. Enable or disable an item by clicking the corresponding check box. To set 

the font style for all objects click the Font button. 

Box Title 

Depth Info 

Legend 

Display Type: 

Different types of diagrams can be chosen, each with its own set of settings below 

the drop down list. A short description for each display type is given next to the 

drop down control. Depending on the type of data to be displayed – either Structure 

Log or Breakout Log data – different diagram options are provided. 

For Structure Logs the following diagram types exist: 

- Polar Projection Dip / Strike 

- Rose Diagram Azimuth / Dip 

- Histogram (distribution of) Azimuth, Dip, Aperture and Attribute type 

- Mean Azimuth & Dip 

- Vector Azimuth / Dip 

- Woodcock


Polar Projection Dip: 

The polar dip diagram displays the polar projection of a dipping plane and its 

normal vector into the horizontal plane of a reference sphere. Points reflecting the 

tadpole categories used in the linked Structure Log represent dip directions and dip 

angles. 

Polar Projection Diagram 

Rose Diagram Azimuth: 

The rose azimuth diagram is a circular histogram in which the length of rose sectors 

represents the orientation and frequency of azimuth angles (dip direction angles). 

Azimuth Rose Diagram


www.alt.lu 

Rose Diagram Dip: 

The rose dip diagram is a circular histogram in which the length of rose sectors 

represents the orientation and frequency of dip angles. 

Dip Rose Diagram 

Histogram Azimuth: 

The azimuth histogram displays the count rates of azimuth angles falling into user 

defined azimuth angle interval classes. Each count rate is displayed on the ordinate 

using a color filled bar. The scale of the abscissa ranges from 0 to 360 degree. The 

width of each bar reflects the width of each azimuth angle interval class. 

Azimuth Histogram


Histogram Dip and Aperture: 

The dip histogram displays the count rates of dip angles falling into user defined dip 

angle interval classes. Each count rate is displayed on the ordinate using a color filled 

bar. The scale of the abscissa ranges from 0 to 90 degree. The width of each bar 

reflects the width of each dip angle interval class. A similar diagram is available for 

aperture. 

Dip Histogram 

Histogram Attribute: 

This type of histogram displays the distribution of the structure types selected in the 

component settings. 

Attribute Histogram


www.alt.lu 

Mean Dip & Azimuth: 

Average azimuth and average dip angle are calculated from all selected structure 

picks found in each depth interval covered by the Polar & Rose diagram box. The 

values are displayed inside a circular symbol (average azimuth on the top, average 

dip angle below). Additionally a vector pointing to the average azimuth is shown. 

Mean Azimuth & Dip display 

Vector Dip & Azimuth: 

This type of diagram provides a graphical presentation of cumulatively added unit 

vectors of azimuth or dip data. Adding the vectors from top to bottom (or vice 

versa) even small changes of structural dip or azimuth over the investigated depth 

interval can be visualized and detected. 

Vector Azimuth Plot


Woodcock Diagram: 

The Woodcock diagram can be used to characterize the overall shape of a 

distribution of dips. 

Expressing each dip direction and angle as a vector, a matrix containing the sums of 

squares and cross products of the direction cosines can be created. From this matrix 

the Eigenvectors and Eigenvalues (E1, E2, E3) are determined. The meaning of the 

Eigenvectors can be best understood when comparing with the concept of moments 

of inertia in physics. Imaging that each pole to a dip placed on the surface of a 

sphere would represent an equal weight. The moment of inertia of the sphere will be 

low about the axis that goes through a cluster of poles but high about an axis that is 

far away from the cluster. In general the minimum moment of inertia can be 

obtained for an axis passing through the average orientation, the maximum obtained 

90° away from the minimum along an axis corresponding to the best fit girdle. 

Eigenvector 1 determined from our matrix corresponds to the largest moment of 

inertia and estimates the pole to the best fit girdle. Eigenvector 3 corresponds to the 

smallest moment and estimates the centre of the densest cluster, similar to a mean 

direction. Eigenvector 2 corresponds to the emptiest part of the best fit girdle. 

The Eigenvalues E1, E2 and E3 (where E1 > E2 > E3) can be used to describe the 

overall shape of a distribution of poles. The K parameter - a ratio of ln(E1/E2) / 

ln(E2/E3) - describes the scattering of the distribution. The figure below shows a 

sample of a Woodcock diagram derived from the poles shown in the polar 

projection plot.


www.alt.lu 

For pure girdles K approaches infinity, while K approaches zero for scattered poles. 

If E1 >> E2 = E3 then the distribution is a pure cluster. 

If E3

Reference Sphere 

Zenith 

Lower Hemisphere 


Great Circle of 

dipping plane 

Angle-Equal 

Polar Projection 

Normal Vector on 

dipping plane 

Pole on lower 

hemisphere 


Attribute: Select the attribute class from which you would like to determine the 

color and shape of symbols to be displayed. 

Check the Use average value per attribute option if you want to display a single 

symbol for each class reflecting the average values of dip and azimuth. A single 

point is drawn rather then a cloud of points. 

Poles: As the user can display the data as density plot (contour plot) or great circles, 

poles are displayed only if the corresponding Poles option has been checked. 

Great circles: If the great circle for each pole should be displayed the user has to 

check this option. 

D 

D’ 

Area-Equal Polar 

Projection 

(D = D’)


www.alt.lu 

Grid: 

You can edit the maximum (dip angle) scale for the diagram in order to spread out 

points accumulating around the center of the diagram; the minimum scale is always 

set to zero. In order to display radial and circular grid lines and grid labels check the 

corresponding option and adjust the frequencies (step). The font style for the grid 

labels can be changed by clicking on the Font button. 

Contours: Allows the display of the data as density plot using contour lines or color 

palettes to indicate local maxima and minima. To select contouring algorithm and 

counting options click the Settings button to open the Contouring dialog box. 

Method: 

If the Schmidt option has been selected a counting circle comprising one percent of 

the total area is used to make density estimates at the nodes of a regular grid. The 

grid is contoured in in units of percent per one percent area. 

Using the Kamb algorithm (default) the contours represent standard deviations away 

from the expected density of a random sample drawn from a standard distribution. 

While contours derived from the Schmidt algorithm depend strongly on the sample 

size, Kamb’s algorithm reduces the effect of sample size on contours allowing 

comparison of data sets with different sample sizes. 

Display: 

For contour line display check the Contours options and choose the preferred line 

thickness. 

For a color fill derived from a selected color palette (click on Palette to design a 

new color scheme) check this option. 

Options: 

Smoothing: Different weighting functions can be applied when counting the data.

A - standard step function (None) 

B - inverse area smoothing (Area) 

C - inverse area squared (Inverse Area) 

D – exponential smoothing (Exponential) 

The degree of smoothing increases from A to D. 


Signif. Sigma: Number of standard deviations defining the expected count for a 

uniform distribution. Selecting a lower value (default and max is 3) gives a smaller 

counting element, more localized density estimates and less smoothing. E.g. for large 

scattering of data a value of 3 might be appropriate while the value can be reduced if 

the data tends to build a point maximum. 

Min. Contour: The initial contouring interval. 

Contour Interval: Step of the contour line intervals.


www.alt.lu 

Rose Azimuth and Rose Dip: 

The options for the Azimuth and Dip Rose diagrams are similar. 

Azimuth Rose and Dip Rose options dialog

Scale Mode: 


The scale settings control the units used for the radial axis of the rose diagram and is 

proportional to the number of structures having an azimuth/dip value within the 

same azimuth/dip window. 

Absolute Count: The scale unit is the absolute number of counts for all structures. 

Percent Of Log Total: The scale unit is a value in percent of the total number of 

counts in the source log. 

Percent Of Depth Interval: The scale unit is a value in percent of the total number 

of counts in the current depth interval. 

Enter your scale value according to the selected scale option. 

Counting Sector Parameter: 

The counting window settings control the criteria on which the histogram classes are 

built. The Step value is the increment in degrees between two counting sectors. The 

Width value defines the width of the sector around the central value (if the option 

Wedge Diagram has been chosen) or from one value to the next. 

Sectors start at 0 (left), Wedge Diagram (right) 

Choosing a Width larger than the Step results in overlapping sectors (double counts 

possible), while selecting a Width smaller than the Step causes some events not to be 

taken into account. 

Diagram Color: 

Select the color that will be used for the rose display. 

Grid Options: 

You can display concentric grids for the count rate or a grid showing the count 

sectors. In addition a vector pointing to the mean azimuth/dip direction can be 

displayed.


www.alt.lu 

Concentric grid (left), Sector line grid (middle), Mean vector (right) 

To show grid labels check the corresponding option and set up the Font style. 

Azimuth, Dip, Aperture and Attribute Histogram: 

The options for these histograms are similar (except for an additional option to 

select the attribute class to be taken into account for the Attribute Histogram). 

Histogram options dialog 

Search Window: 

Setting the count window width defines the interval in which azimuth/dip values are 

counted and therefore defines the width of the bars displayed in the histogram a 

well.

Diagram Color: 


Select a color for the histogram bars. 

Grid Options: 

You can enable vertical and horizontal grid lines and specify grid frequencies and 

lower and upper boundaries for the scale. If you want to show labels on both axes, 

check the corresponding Grid Labels option and set up a Font. Please note that 

some options are not applicable for the Attribute Distribution Histogram. 

Background Color: 

Select a color for the background fill of the histogram. 

Mean Azimuth & Dip: 

Mean Azimuth & Dip options 

Symbol: 

Select the Font for the mean azimuth and dip labels displayed inside the symbol.


www.alt.lu 

Vector Azimuth & Dip: 


Select the attribute class from which you would like to determine the color of the 

arrows to be displayed. Data can be shown from Base to Top (origin of the arrow is 

the base) or Top to Base. 

Legend: 

Depth markers can be displayed along the vector path. Check the corresponding 

box and select a font if you want to use this feature. If you are dealing with a large 

number of data you may want to display depth markers at a specified frequency 

only. Switch from for all components to the every x [units]option in this case. 


In order to fill the background of the diagram with a solid color select the desired 

color from the color picker.

Woodcock Diagram: 


Attribute: 

Select the attribute class from which you would like to determine the color of the 

points to be displayed. 

Options: 

Depth markers can be displayed along the vector path. Check the corresponding 

box and select a font if you want to use this feature. If you are dealing with a large 

number of data you may want to display depth markers at a specified frequency 

only. Switch from for all components to the every x [units]option in this case. 


In order to fill the background of the diagram with a solid color select the desired 

color from the color picker. 

For Breakout Logs the following diagram types exist: 

- Rose Diagram Azimuth / Tilt 

- Histogram (distribution of) Azimuth, Tilt, Opening and Attribute type 

- Mean Tilt & SHmax (direction of max. horizontal stress component)


www.alt.lu 

Rose Diagram Azimuth for Breakout Logs: 

The diagram displays the distribution of breakouts, tensile fractures or other events. 

Important: Make your selection of how the components will be counted in the 

Azimuth Rose Properties dialog box (click the Options button in the Main 

Settings dialog box). Under Grid Options expand the Components are drop down 

list. Three different options – Breakouts, Tensile Fracture and Others – are 

provided. Depending on the selection made the picked events are interpreted 

differently; counting of events and display of the stress vector is applied in a 

different manner. 

Expand the drop down list and choose an option to get interpret the picks in the Breakout Log differently 

Breakouts: Even though the breakouts might have been picked individually from 

the image picks overlapping each other in depth will be counted as one breakout. 

The following two samples will be counted as one breakout. Average values of 

opening angle and tilt and the maximum length will be computed accordingly.


If the Breakouts option has been selected the above event will be counted as one breakout. 

If the vector of maximum horizontal stress is displayed we assume that the axis of 

the breakout is oriented perpendicular to the maximum stress direction. 

Tensile Fractures: Features are counted in the same manner as for the Breakouts 

option. When it comes to the display of the maximum horizontal stress vector it will 

be displayed parallel to the breakout axis 

Others: All events picked will be counted separately and handled accordingly when 

deriving the statistics. The stress vector will be display perpendicular to the derived 

mean direction of the breakout axis. 

Scale Mode: You can scale the radial axis of the diagram either to frequency or 

cumulative length. The direction of the stress vector might change slightly as the 

recordings of direction cosine and sine are averaged either by the number of 

measurement or by the total breakout length. 

The remaining display options are similar to those of the Rose Diagram for 

Structure Log data and have already been explained above. 

Rose Diagram Tilt for Breakout Logs:


www.alt.lu 

As the Tilt, the angle between the vertical breakout axis and trajectory of the 

borehole, is recorded with each pick the display of a Rose Diagram Tilt can be 

displayed. The diagram shows the distribution of title angles between -90° and 90°. 

As for the Azimuth angle distribution you can count the picks as Breakouts, Tensile 

Fractures or Other events. All other settings for the diagram are similar to the Rose 

Diagram Dip for Structure Logs. 

Histogram Azimuth / Tilt / Opening and Attribute: 

Four different types of bar histograms can be created showing the distribution for 

each of the recorded parameters in the Breakout Log. The presentation settings are 

similar to the bar histograms for Structure Logs, except for the way of counting the 

picks and the scale mode. As explained for Rose Diagram for Breakout Log the way of 

counting picks is different for Breakouts, Tensile Fractures and Other events. 

For Opening, Tilt and Azimuth angle histograms two different scale modes are 

available. The vertical axis shows the frequency of occurrence if the Scale Mode is


set to Counts. If the scale mode is set to Cumulative Length the vertical axis of 

the histograms is the length in meter. 

When displaying the distribution of attributes you can select the attribute class (i.e. 

the tadpole library) for which the distribution will be displayed from the Attribute 

drop down list. 

Mean Tilt & SHmax: 

Maximum horizontal stress direction and average tilt angle are calculated from all 

selected breakout picks found in each depth interval covered by the Polar & Rose 

diagram box. Tow different scaling methods are provided. Direction cosine and sine 

are averaged either by the number of measurement (Counts) or by the total 

breakout length (Cumulative Length). The values and vectors displayed depend 

on the way of counting the recorded components (count as Breakouts, Tensile 

Fracture or Other events) and the Scale Mode. 

Vector Azimuth and Tilt: 

Similar to the vector diagrams available for structural picks this type of diagram 

provides a graphical presentation of cumulatively added unit vectors of azimuth or 

tilt data. Adding the vectors from top to bottom (or vice versa) even small changes 

of breakout orientation over the investigated depth interval can be visualized and 

detected.


www.alt.lu 


The Polar & Rose box interval can be set and a description can be added using the 

Tabular Editor. You can also use your mouse to insert a new box or change the 

position of existing ones directly in the log column. 

Inserting a New Box: 


� Move your mouse into the log column and hold down the Shift key. 

� Single click if you want a cross section at a particular point or drag to create a 

box covering a depth interval. 

To delete a box simply press the CTRL key and click into the box that you want to 

remove. 

Editing Polar & Rose Boxes: 

You can either enlarge or shrink the covered depth interval. To do so: 


� Move your mouse pointer into the vicinity of an interval border. If pinches 

are displayed point to the depth the pinches point to, not the box border. 

Your cursor will be displayed as double-sided vertical arrow. 

� Click and drag the interval limit to its new position. 

Changing Attribute Values (only in Polar Projection mode): 


� Move your mouse into a Polar & Rose box. Your cursor is displayed as 

pen. 

� Click and drag the mouse to encircle the poles for which you would like to 

change the attribute values. Once the left mouse button is released the 

polygon closes automatically and a dialog box to select a new attribute 

value will be displayed. The values displayed depend on which attribute

Flying Menu: 


class has been chosen in the Display Options. The new values will be 

applied to the data of the linked Structure Log. 

Polar & Rose Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 


Editor: 


Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 



www.alt.lu 

Fill: 

Allows automatic population of the data column with boxes. A dialogue box will be 

displayed allowing the specification of the frequency at which a box will be displayed 

(e.g. every 10 m) and the length of the depth interval each box covers. 



Slice at: 


Shift by: 




Defaults can be set for most of the parameters already discussed in the Main 

Settings (Display Type Options). When accessing the default settings from the 

Tools > Options menu some general settings are available from Logs > Polar & 

Rose Log. More detailed settings are available for Polar , Rose, Histogram and 

Vector diagrams under the corresponding knots. 

Besides the preferred diagram type the Box Thickness parameter defines the 

minimum extension a Polar & Rose box must have. 

All detailed settings have been explained in the main settings section of the 

corresponding diagram type.


Cross Section Log 

www.alt.lu 

Description: 

The Cross Section Log can be used to display cross sections of the borehole cylinder 

using caliper (or travel time) information at a certain depth or from a depth interval. 

The Log must be linked to an Image Log providing the caliper information. Only 

top and bottom depth of the cross section intervals are recorded. 

Data Format: 

E.g. 


TopDepth, BottomDepth 

Cross Section Log data: Superimposed measurements (left), average of measurement (right)

Inserting a new Cross Section Log: 


Even if you can create a Cross Section log using the ASCII file import and Text File 

Import Wizard they are usually created using the Insert New Log command from 

the Edit menu. You have to link the new log to an Image Log, which provides the 

cross section data – radius or travel time. 


Core Description Log Settings dialog box 

Title: 



Caliper Scale: 

The low scale value represents the center of the cross section while the high value 

corresponds to the maximum circle that can be drawn in the cross section box. The 

variations in the cross section can easily be over-scaled if the low scale value is set 

close to the high value. 

Please note that the min and max values displayed for your orientation correspond 

to the min and max values of the linked Image log.


www.alt.lu 

Data drawing mode: 

Cross sections can be displayed in two different modes. All cross sections within the 

depth interval can be displayed superimposed or a single average cross section circle 

can be calculated and shown. 

Cross sections with all slices within the depth interval superimposed (left) and displayed as average slice (right) 

When looking for the symmetry and the trend of breakouts over a certain depth 

interval you should display all cross section slices superimposed. 

Grid options: 

You can set an azimuth grid which displays little tick marks around the cross section 

circle at the user defined frequency. Cardinal points appear as a cross hair.

Cross Section with Azimuth grid enabled 


The caliper grid lines appear as concentric circles at user defined frequency. To 

display grid labels check the corresponding option and adjust the Font style to fit 

your data display. 

Cross Section with Caliper grid enabled 

Position: 



Pen: 

Define the line color and thickness in which the cross sections will be drawn. 

Box Style: 

Cross Sections are displayed in boxes similar to Comment log or Polar & Rose log 

data. So-called pinches are displayed to point to the depth interval if the vertical


www.alt.lu 

extension of the box is larger than the depth interval. Note that the min vertical 

extension of a box corresponds to the log column width. 

Pinches can be displayed on the left, right or on both sides of the cross section box. 

Select None if you want to hide box border lines completely. 

Circle: 

It is possible to display up to two reference circles within the cross section display. 

To highlight the occurrence of breakouts displaying a reference circle of the bit size 

could be useful. Additionally a shading color between reference circle and cross 

section could be applied. 

Cross section with reference circles displayed (left) and shading applied (right) 

Reference Circle options dialog


Display Internal/External: 

Check the appropriate option to enable the internal or external reference circle 

display. 

Radius: 

Set a value for the reference circle radius. 

Shading: 

Different shading modes are available. If the Inside option is checked the area 

between reference circle and cross-section will be shaded if the radius of the cross 

section is smaller than the reference radius. If you select the Outside option only 

areas outside of the reference circle would be shaded where the radius of the cross 

section is larger than the reference radius. 

Style: 

Select a shading color and style from color picker and Style control. 


The cross section box interval can be set in the Tabular Editor. You can also use 

your mouse to insert a new box or change the position of existing ones directly in 

the log column. 

Inserting A New Box: 


� Move your mouse into the log column and hold down the Shift key. 

� Single click if you want a cross section at a particular point or drag to create a 

box covering a depth interval. 

To delete a box simply press the CTRL key and click into the box that you want to 

remove. 

Editing Cross Section: 

You can either enlarge or shrink the covered depth interval. To do so: 


� Move your mouse pointer into the vicinity of an interval border. If pinches 

are displayed point to the depth the pinches point to, not the box border. 

Your cursor will be displayed as double-sided vertical arrow.


www.alt.lu 

� Click and drag the interval limit to its new position. 

To shift the entire box to a new position by keeping the depth interval: 


� Right Click into the cross section box (into the original depth interval). Two 

lines will appear representing the interval. Drag it to its new position. 

Flying Menu: 

Cross Section Log Flying Menu 


Settings: 


Editor: 



Cut: 


document. 

Copy: 



Delete: 


Fill: 

Opens the Fill dialog which allows to specify frequency (Create a section every) 

and interval extension (Section interval) for an automatic insertion of cross section 

boxes. 

The depth interval over which the cross section boxes will be inserted can be 

restricted using the user defined option. 

Clear contents: 


Slice at: 


Shift by: 



www.alt.lu 


Defaults can be set for Position, box display Style and drawing Pen Color. These 

parameters were already explained in the Main Settings paragraph.

Appendix B 

APPENDIX B - 485 

The following pages provide a summary of all tool bars available in WellCAD. A 

short description of each short cut icon is given. Most functionality listed here has 

been discussed in the various chapters of Book l.

486 - APPENDIX B 

Tool Bar 

www.alt.lu 

(CTRL + 1) 

New 

Opens a new empty borehole document. (CTRL + N) 

Open 

Opens a saved borehole document. WellCAD displays the Open (file) dialog box to 

enable you to select the file of your choice. (CTRL + O) 

Save 

Saves the active document. If you have not named the document, WellCAD displays 

the Save As dialogue box and obliges you to type in a name. (CTRL + S) 

Cut 

Removes selected logs from the borehole document and transfers them to the 

clipboard. (CTRL + X) 

Copy 

Copies selected logs to the clipboard. (CTRL + C) 

Paste 

Pastes or inserts the contents of the clipboard into the current active borehole 

document. (CTRL + V) 

Undo 

If enabled under Tools/Options last processing steps can be undone. (CTRL + Z) 

Redo 

If enabled under Tools/Options undone processing steps can be redone. (CTRL + 

Y) 

Delete 

Deletes the selected logs. (DELETE)

Borehole Bar 

LithCAD 


Starts LithCAD, the pattern editor application for WellCAD lithology files. 

ToadCAD 

Starts ToadCAD, the tadpole editor application for WellCAD structure files. 

HeadCAD 

Starts HeadCAD, the header form editor application for WellCAD. 

Print 

Prints the active borehole document according to the page setup. 

Print Preview 

Opens a print preview of the active borehole document. 

Zoom 

Select or enter a zoom factor for your borehole document. Zooming does not have 

any affect on printing. 

About 

Displays the About WellCAD box showing license and software details. 

(CTRL + 2) 

Select Tracks 

Displays the Tracks Selection dialogue box with options to select logs. 

Draft / Presentation Mode 

Toggles the page layout mode to change between presentation and draft mode. 

(CTRL + D)


www.alt.lu 

Toggle cursor mode 

Toggles the cursor from “cross hair” to pointer. (CTRL + L) 

Depth Settings 

Displays the Depth Settings dialogue box. (CTRL + A) 

Log Base Settings 

Opens the Log Base Settings dialogue box to change log presentation features 

independent from log type. (CTRL + B) 

Log Settings 

Displays the log main settings dialogue box for the currently selected log(s) and log 

type. (CTRL + M) 

Log Title Settings 

Opens the Title Settings dialogue box which enables the user to alter the 

appearance of log titles. (CTRL + T) 

Formula 

Displays the Formula dialogue box. A formula editor is provided that stores and 

manages your own collection of formulae. 

Palette Settings 

Changes the color palette setting of an image log. 

Header Editor 

Starts the header editor for the active document. (CTRL + H) 

Tabular Editor 

Starts the Tabular editor, which allows you to view or interactively edit existing log 

data in a spreadsheet. (CTRL + E)

Litho Bar 

Depth Matcher 


Starts the Depth matcher tool for the active document to allow you to compress, 

stretch or depth shift your log data against a reference log. 

Crossplot 

Starts the cross plot tool of WellCAD. 

Dynamic 3D Borehole View 

Opens a new dynamic 3D view window. 

Deviation View 

Starts the Deviation Module to display well paths details. 

CoreCAD 

Starts the CoreCAD workspace for interactive core description. 

(CTRL + 3) 

The Litho Bar provides an overview of all patterns 

and symbols contained in a Litho Dictionary (*.LTH 

file). A Lithology or CoreDesc log must be selected 

to fill the Litho Bar with the corresponding pattern 

information. 

To speed up interactive data insertion you can select 

a pattern from the list and drag the data box in the 

log column to fill it immediately. For symbols, select 

on from the Litho Bar and click in the log column to 

insert it. 

Right click on the Litho Bar and you can choose 

from the following option: 

Sort By Name: Sorts all litho patterns alphabetically 

using the names (not codes) of the patterns. 

Sort By Most Used: Sorts the litho patterns and 

puts the ones most used in the selected log at the top of the list.


Pen Bar 

www.alt.lu 

Restore Original Sorting: Sorts the litho patterns using the sort code set when 

designing the patterns in HeadCAD. 

Symbols and Names: Check this option to show the symbol and names in the 

Litho Bar. 

Symbols Only: Check this option if you want to display only the patterns and skip 

the name display. 

You can define the dimension of the cell showing the patterns and symbols under 

Tools > Options > Litho Bar. 

(CTRL + 4) 

SHIFT key 

When pressed the button simulates a hold down Shift key. This is useful when 

inserting data interactively where it is most of the time required pressing the Shift 

key for data insertion. 

CTRL key 

When pressed the button simulates a hold down Control key that is usually required 

to delete data points. 

Annotation Bar and Annotation Mini Bar 

(CTRL + 5) or (CTRL + 6) 

Annotation Mode 

When pressed the user can add and edit annotations. The interactive editing of logs 

is disabled. 

Annotation Layer Selection 

Shows the status of the currently active Annotation Layer. To select a new 

Annotation Layer select one from the drop down list. (See 1.6 Annotations)

Engineering Symbols Settings 


Displays the editor for Engineering Symbols. Only available if the CoreCAD & 

Wellsite Geology add-on module is activated. 

Annotation Select 

When pressed you can select one of the annotations for copy and paste, deleting or 

editing. 

Arrow Annotation 

Allows inserting a new arrow annotation (see 1.6 Annotations). 

Text Box Annotation 

Allows inserting a new text box (see 1.6 Annotations). 

Bitmap Annotation 

Allows inserting a new box showing an image (see 1.6 Annotations). 

Text Callout Annotation 

Inserts a new callout with a text message attached (see 1.6 Annotations). 

Bitmap Callout Annotation 

Inserts a new callout with a text message attached (see 1.6 Annotations). 

Manage Custom Annotation 

As part of the Engineering Symbols it is possible to create custom annotation 

consisting of labels and text. See 1.6 Annotations for further details. 

Engineering Symbol Annotation 

Press the button and select the engineering symbol you would like to insert from 

the drop down list. This feature is part of the CoreCAD & Wellsite Geology module 

and will not be available unless activated for your license.


Document Layout Bar 

www.alt.lu 

(CTRL + 7) 

Log Grouping 

Multiple logs can be grouped to form logical units within a Borehole Document. 

This control provides access to various group functions. (See 1.3.2.5 Layout 

Toolbar) 

Make Same Width 

Adjusts the width of the selected log columns to be the same as the one of the 

master log (see 1.3.2.5 Layout Toolbar). 

Make Same Height 

Adjusts the height of the selected log columns title zone to be the same as the one 

of the master log (see 1.3.2.5 Layout Toolbar). 

Align Left 

Aligns all selected log columns with the left border of the master log (see 1.3.2.5 

Layout Toolbar). 

Align Right 

Aligns all selected log columns with the right border of the master log (see 1.3.2.5 

Layout Toolbar). 

Align Left and Right 

Superimposes the selected log(s) to the master log (see 1.3.2.5 Layout Toolbar). 

Align Side By Side 

Aligns all selected logs side by side to the right of the master log (see 1.3.2.5 Layout 

Toolbar). 

Insert Before 

Inserts the selected log columns before the master log (see 1.3.2.5 Layout Toolbar).

Insert After 


Inserts the selected log columns behind the master log (see 1.3.2.5 Layout Toolbar). 

Auto Fit 

Removes all gaps between log columns by arranging the logs side by side. The 

document width will be adjusted if necessary (see 1.3.2.5 Layout Toolbar). 

Move Up 

Moves the selected log one level up in the stack of logs shown in the document’s 

title zone (see 1.3.2.5 Layout Toolbar). 

Move Down 

Moves the selected log one level down in the stack of logs shown in the document’s 

title zone.

Appendix C 

Listed are all functions that can be used in the Formula Parser of WellCAD. 

APPENDIX C - 495

496 - APPENDIX C 

www.alt.lu 

Abbreviation Description Example 

Abs Absolute value Abs (-3.1415) = 3.1415 

Acos Arc Cosine (in RAD) ACos (0.5) = 1.0472 

Asin Arc Sine (in RAD) ASin (0.5) = 0.5236 

Atan Arc Tangent (in RAD) ATan (0.5) = 0.4636 

Atan2( , ) Arc Tangent of y/x ATan(3/2)=0.98 

AveInt( , , ) Arithm. Mean of depth interval AveInt({GR}, 10, 20) 

Ceil Round to highest integer Ceil (3.1415) = 4 

Clip Clips the current value to min or 

max of interval limits 

Clip({Grindex},0,1) 

Cos Cosine (in RAD) Cos (0) = 1 

Cosh Hyperbolic Cosine () Cosh(0.5) = 1.1276 

Deg Convert Rad to Deg Deg (3.1415) = 180 

Diff(A ,N ) Calculates the difference 

between values n/2 samples 

above and below the current 

sample of log A 

Diff({Temp},2) 

Exp e ^ x Exp (10) = 22026.4658 

Floor Round to lowest integer Floor (3.1415) = 3 

Grad(A, N) Calculates the gradient between 

values found n/2 sample above 

and below the current data point 

of log A. 

Grad({Temp},4) 

J0 Bessel function J0 J0(1) = 0.76520 

J1 Bessel function J1 J1(1) = 0.44005 

Ln Neperean logarithm Ln (10) = 2.3026 

Log Decimal logarithm Log (10) = 1 

LogBase(A,B) Logarithm of argument and 

custom base 

LogBase(10,2)=3.3219 

NEXT(A , N) Returns the value found N 

samples below the current depth 

position 

NEXT({Temp}, 1) 

PREV(A, N) Returns the value found N 

samples above the current depth 

position 

PREV({Temp}, 2)

Power( A, P ) Returns argument (A) raised to 

power (P) 

Power({GR},2) 

Round( A, P) Returns argument (A) rounded 

to specified precision (P) 

Round({CAL}, 2) 

Rad Convert Deg to Rad Rad (90) = 1.5708 

Sin Sine (in RAD) Sin (1) = 0.8415 

Sinh Hyperbolic Sine () Sinh(1) = 1.17520 

Sqrt Square root Sqrt (2) = 1.4142 

Tan Tangent (in RAD) Tan (0.7854) = 1 

Y0 Bessel function Y0 Y0(1) = 0.08826 

Y1 Bessel function Y1 Y1(1) = -0.78121 

Borehole deviation functions: 

NORTH(A , T, unit ) Computes the north coordinate 

of a well path referred to by 

azimuth and tilt. 

EAST(A ,T ,unit) Computes the east coordinate of 

a well path referred to by 

azimuth and tilt. 

AZI2( , , , , , ) Computes Azimuth (in deg) 

from calibrated accelerometer 

and magnetometer readings. 

AZI3( , , , , , , ) Computes Azimuth (in deg) 

from calibrated accelerometer 

and magnetometer readings. 

RBR( , ) Returns the clockwise measured 

angle (deg) from Highside to 

tool reference. 

TILT2( , ) Computes borehole tilt (deg) 

measured from the vertical. 

TILT3( , , ) Computes borehole tilt (deg) 

measured from the vertical. 

PROJ(N , E , N) Calculates the projection of the 

well path’s Northing and 

Easting onto a given profile of 

azimuth N. 

NORTH({AZI}, {TILT}, 

0.3048) 

EAST({AZI}, {TILT}, 1) 

APPENDIX C - 497 

AZI2({AccX}, {AccY}, 

{MagX}, {MagY}, {MagZ}, 

-10) 

AZI3({AccX}, {AccY}, 

{AccZ}, {MagX}, {MagY}, 

{MagZ}, -10) 

RBR({AccX}, {AccY}) 

TILT2({AccX}, {AccY}) 

TILT3({AccX},{AccY}, 

{AccZ}) 

PROJ({Northing}, 

{Easting}, 45)

498 - APPENDIX C 

www.alt.lu 

TVD(T, unit) Returns True Vertical Depth 

derived from tilt (T) in units (1 

= metre, 0.3048 = feet) 

Logical functions: 

If(A,B,C) If A is true then take B else take 

C. 

TVD({Tilt}, 0.3048) 

If({DEPTH}>=100,{GR}, 

NULL) 

AND(A,B) Returns true if A and B are true. AND({C1}>5, {P1AZ}> 90 

) 

OR(A,B) Returns true if A or B is true. OR({C1}>5, {C2}>5) 

NOT(A) Returns true if A is false and 

vice versa. 

NOT({C1}5,FALSE) 

TRUE Returns the logical value True. AND({C1}>5,TRUE) 

Statistical functions, which apply to the entire log: 

Ave Average value of log Ave ({GR}) 

StdDev Standard deviation of log StdDev ({GR}) 

Min Minimum value of log Min ({GR}) 

Min2( , ) Returns the minimum of both 

arguments 

Min (75, {GR}) 

Max Maximum value of log Max ({GR}) 

Max2( , ) Returns the maximum of both 

arguments 

Max (75, {GR}) 

All the above items can be combined in a complex multi-level formula.

Index 

3 

3D Log · 37, 438 

3D Log Main Settings · 440 

A 

About WellCAD dialog box · II 

Accelerometer · 148 

Adding a new Alias · 80 

Adding and formatting legends and titles · 224 

Add-on modules · II 

Advanced Depth Settings · 75 

Alias Table · 79 

Alias Table Options · 81 

Align left · 46 

Align right · 46 

Align side-by-side · 46 

ALT Logger Default Settings · 91 

Analysis Components Settings · 373 

Analysis Log · 27, 368 

Analysis Log Creation · 369 

Analysis Log Data Format · 368 

Analysis Log Editing · 374 

Analysis Log Main Settings · 370 

Anchor Points · 187 

Annotate · 179 

Annotation Bar · 490 

Annotation Layer Settings · 184 

Annotation Layers · 184 

Annotation Mini Bar · 490 

Annotations · 178 

Annular volume · 172 

appearance tabular editor · 58 

AppleCore file import · 96 

Apply Template · 111 

Arrow Annotation · 180 

as litho dictionaries · 129 

ASCII Import · 84 

Associated Colour · 305 

Auto Adjust Splitter · 8 

Auto Fit · 47 

Automation · 5 

Axis Settings · 211 

Azimuth · 147 

Azimuth Histogram · 464 

B 

Background · 65 

Base Settings · 61 

Basic Document Editing · 71 

Basic Log Editing · 38 

Basics · 1 

Bio Log · 32, 414 

Bio Log Creation · 415 

Bio Log Data Format · 414 

Bio Log Editing · 422 

Bio Log Main Settings · 415 

Bitmap · 116 

Blank borehole document · 6 

Block Process · 141 

Blocked Curves · 140 

Blocking Mode · 142 

Book 1 · 1 

Border · 64 

Borehole Bar · 487 

Borehole Condition Correction · 145 

Borehole Condition Corrections · 154 

Borehole Document · 109 

Borehole Documents · 3 

Box Frame · 68 

Box Height · 67 

Breakout Log · 31, 405 

INDEX - 499

500 - INDEX 

Breakout Log Creation · 406 

Breakout Log Data Format · 405 

Breakout Log Editing · 410 

Breakout Log Main Settings · 406 

Breakout Log Statistics · 467 

Build number · II 

Building Data Clusters · 215 

C 

Callout Annotation · 183 

Cascade · 8 

CGM · 116 

Chart Settings · 207 

Chart Title · 225 

Charts · 204 

Classification · 135, 239, 249, 272 

Classification Settings · 207 

Clear Contents · 56 

Clipboard · 55 

Close · 4 

Closure Angle · 152 

Closure Distance · 152 

Cluster · 217 

Cluster Bar · 215 

Cluster Settings · 215 

Cluster Statistics · 215 

Cluster To Borehole · 213 

Clusters Legend · 227 

Colour Palette Design · 133 

Comment · 67 

Comment Log · 16, 277 

Comment Log Creation · 278 

Comment Log Data Format · 277 

Comment Log Editing Methods · 281 

Comment Log Main Settings · 278 

Comparing Log Data · 57 

Components Settings · 444 

Contact Dictionary · 131 

Contact Styles · 130, 307 

Contours · 460 

www.alt.lu 

Conventions · I 

Convert Logs To · 60 

Converting Logs · 60 

Copy · 53, 84, 110 

Copy Settings · 69 

Copy Title Settings · 50, 69 

Core Description Log · 293 

CoreDesc Log · 17, 293 

CoreDesc Log Creation · 294 

CoreDesc Log Data Format · 293 

CoreDesc Log Editing · 289, 297 

CoreDesc Log Main Settings · 287, 295 

Creating a new Borehole Document · 6 

Creating a new Formula Log from a regression 

equation · 223 

Creating a Percentage Log from data clusters · 218 

Creating a template · 108 

Creating Logs · 39 

cross hair cursor · 309 

Cross Section Log · 36, 476 

Cross Section Log Creation · 477 

Cross Section Log Data Format · 476 

Cross Section Log Editing · 481 

Cross Section Log Main Settings · 477 

Cross-Plot Chart · 210 

Crossplot Chart Cluster (*.CCC) file · 216 

Cross-Plot Workspace · 210 

CSV Import · 54, 56, 84, 194 

Cut · 53, 84, 110 

D 

data container · 11 

Data Export · 115 

Data Import · 77 

Data Source · 221 

Date / Time · 74 

Date / Time Settings · 200 

Default Borehole Document Header · 102 

Delete · 39 

delete all data · 56

Deleting Logs · 39 

Depth Axis · 71 

Depth Background · 76 

Depth Column Log · 13, 256 

Depth Column Ticks · 76 

Depth Font · 76 

Depth Grid · 75 

Depth Log · 13 

Depth Log Creation · 256 

Depth Log Data Format · 256 

Depth Log from Depth Matching · 189 

Depth Log Main Settings · 257 

Depth Matching · 185 

Depth range · 110 

Depth Range Selection · 209 

Depth Sample · 139 

Depth Scale · 73 

Depth Settings · 71 

Depth Shifting · 51 

Depth Systems · 191 

deselect a log · 38 

Deviation Data · 146 

Dip Histogram · 464 

Display Hidden Log Titles · 39 

Display Scale · 7 

DLIS import · 96 

DLS · 152 

Document Layout Bar · 44, 492 

Document Template · 108 

Document templates · 6 

Document Width · 121 

Documents · 3 

Draft Mode · 7 

Drag’n Drop · 54 

Drift Correction · 155 

E 

Easting · 149, 191 

Editing Annotations · 178 

Elevation axis · 72 

INDEX - 501 

Embedding Borehole Documents · 203 

EMF · 116 

Engineering Log · 33, 425 

Engineering Log Creation · 427 

Engineering Log Data Form · 425 

Engineering Log Editing · 429 

Engineering Log Main Settings · 427 

Enhanced Meta File · 116 

Entering information into header and trailer · 105 

Equal Items · 52 

Exponential fit · 220 

Export · 115 

Export ASCII File · 118 

Export LAS File · 117 

Exporting A Picture · 116 

Extend Logs · 53 

F 

Fill · 474, 483 

Filter Type · 137 

Filter Width · 137 

Filtering Logs · 136, 138 

Find · 59 

Format of the Alias Table · 81 

Formula Log · 11, 232 

Formula Parser · 124 

Formula Settings · 124, 146, 157, 233, 234 

Frame Width · 121 

Full Wave Sonic Log · 23, 344 

Functions · 125 

FWS Log · 344 

FWS Log Creation · 345 

FWS Log Data Format · 344 

FWS Log Editing · 347 

FWS Log Main Settings · 345 

G 

General settings · 63 

Geometric Mean · 215 

GIF · 116

502 - INDEX 

Go To · 76 

Go to depth · 10 

Grouping Logs · 49 

H 

Harmonic Mean · 215 

HeadCAD · 102 

Header · 7, 82, 102 

Header and Trailer · 102 

Header Editor · 103 

Hide data display · 64 

Hide title display · 63, 64 

Hiding the header/trailer display · 107 

Highlight Tool · 212 

Hole Volume · 171 

Horizontal Grid · 73 

Horizontal Grid Spacing · 75 

I 

Image Log · 25 

Image Log · 355 

Image Log Creation · 356 

Image Log Data Format · 355 

Image Log Float 2 · 25 




Image Log Main Settings · 357 

Import · 77 

Import of a WCL file · 78 

Import Unit · 87 

Importing Time Based Data · 196 

Inclinometer · 148 

Insert after · 47 

Insert before · 47 

Insert New Annotation Layer · 178 

Insert New Logs · 39 

Inserting Annotations · 178, 229 

Interactively Inserting Data · 56 

Interval Log · 14, 265 

www.alt.lu 

Interval Log Creation · 266 

Interval Log Data Format · 265 

Interval Log Editing · 272 

Interval Log Main Settings · 266 

Items Count · 75 

J 

JPEG · 22, 116 

L 

LAS File · 117 

LAS Import · 82 

Layout And Formatting · 223 

Layout Toolbar · 44 

License Information · I 

License number · I 

Linear fit · 219 

LIS import · 98 

LithCAD · 129 

Litho Bar · 311, 489 

Litho Log Creation · 304 

Litho Log Data Format · 303 

Litho Log Editing · 308 

Litho Log Main Settings · 304 

Lithology Columns · 128 

Lithology Log · 18, 303 

Loading Borehole Documents · 4 

Lock log data · 64 

Log Overview · 211 

Log Settings · 61 

Log Types · 11, 128 

Logarithmic fit · 220 

Logs · 10 

Logs Bar · 211 

M 

magnetic declination · 151 

Magnetometer · 148 

Main Settings · 65 

Marker Log · 15, 286

Marker position · 148 

Mask horizontal grid · 63 

Mean Azimuth & Dip · 465 

Median · 137 

merge data during import · 78 

Merge Log Items · 52 

Merge Logs · 50 

Merge options · 111 

Merging Equal Items · 52 

Model based on calibration spectra · 163 

Model based on count rates · 169 

Model to output window count rates · 160 

Modules · II 

Move down · 48 

Move up · 48 

Moving Average · 137 

Moving logs · 44 

Mud Log · 12, 243 

Mud Log Creation · 244 

Mud Log Data Format · 243 

Mud Log Editing Methods · 251 

Mud Log Main Settings · 244 

Multiple Log Import · 88 

N 

Naming Logs · 41 

Nature · 421 

New · 6 

new cross-plot · 206 

New document · 6 

New Window · 8 

non-repeated symbols · 130 

Northing · 149, 191 

O 

OLE Log · 22, 337 

OLE Log Creation · 338 

OLE Log Data Format · 337 

OLE Log Editing · 341 

OLE Log Main Settings · 341 

Open · 4 

opening angle · 409 

P 

Page Setup · 121, 229 

Palette Settings · 133 

Paste · 53, 84, 110 

Paste Special · 84 

Pasting data from the Clipboard · 84 

Pattern Dictionary · 304 

pattern libraries · 129 

Pen Bar · 490 

Percentage Log · 28, 380 

Percentage Log Creation · 380 

Percentage Log Data Format · 380 

Percentage Log Editing · 385 

Percentage Log Main Settings · 381 

Picture Annotation · 181 

Picture import · 94 

Pinches · 278 

Plot Legend · 227 

Plots · 204 

PNG · 116 

point data · 11, 12, 13 

Polar & Rose Log · 35, 449 

Polar & Rose Log Creation · 450 

Polar & Rose Log Data Format · 449 

Polar & Rose Log Editing · 472 

Polar & Rose Log Main Settings · 451 

Polar Projection · 458 

Polynomial fit · 219 

Position · 62, 74 

Positioning Logs · 42 

Power fit · 220 

Presentation Mode · 7 

Previous File Format · 4 

Print Layout · 224 

Print Preview · 123 

Print Preview Mode · 8 

Print Setup · 120 

INDEX - 503

504 - INDEX 

Printing · 120 

Printing and graphic file export · 229 

Process Spectral Gamma Data · 157 

Process Total Gamma · 156 

Properties · 67 

R 

Radial Sample · 139 

RD file import · 90 

Reader Module · 5 

reference log · 140 

Reference Selection · 88 

Regression · 219 

Regression Data Source · 221 

Regression Display Options · 221 

Regression Legend · 228 

Regression Types · 219 

Removing an Alias · 80, 81 

Rename Logs · 42 

repeated patterns · 130 

Replace · 59 

Resample Logs · 138 

Resizing cross-plot objects · 229 

Reverse · 72 

Reversed Axis · 211 

RGB Log · 26, 363 

RGB Log Creation · 364 

RGB Log Data Format · 363 

RGB Log Editing · 364 

RGB Log Main Settings · 364 

RMA · 220 

Rose Azimuth · 462 

Rose Dip · 462 

Ruler Bar · 42 

Ruler Bar Settings · 42 

S 

Same Width · 45 

Save · 4 

Save As · 4 

www.alt.lu 

Save Template · 108 

Saving Borehole Documents · 4 

Scale · 73 

Scale Mode · 469 

Select Tracks · 38 

Selecting Logs · 38 

Sensitivity Coefficients · 168 

Serial number · I 

Settings · 61 

Shading Log · 34, 435 

Shading Log Creation · 435 

Shading Log Main Settings · 435 

Shift Logs By · 51 

Show all titles · 64 

Single Log Import · 86 

Sizing Logs · 43 

Slice Logs At · 50 

Slicing · 50 

Snap · 42 

Spectral Gamma · 153 

Splitting a document · 9 

Stack Spectra · 153 

Stacking Pattern Log · 20, 329 

Stacking Pattern Log Creation · 330 

Stacking Pattern Log Data Format · 329 

Stacking Pattern Log Editing · 331 

Stacking Pattern Log Main Settings · 330 

Static Table Objects · 105 

Statistics Bar · 175 

Status bar · 2 

Strata Log · 19, 316 

Strata Log Creation · 317 

Strata Log Data Format · 316 

Strata Log Editing · 324 

Strata Log Main Settings · 318 

Stratigraphy · 19 

Stretch · 47 

Structure Log · 29, 390 

Structure Log Creation · 392 

Structure Log Data Format · 390

Structure Log Editing · 399 

Structure Log Main Settings · 392 

Switching between documents · 9 

Symbol Style · 405 

T 

Tabular Editor · 57, 58 

Template Editing · 114 

Templates · 108 

Text Annotation · 181 

Text boxes · 16 

Text File Import Wizard · 84, 196 

TIF · 116 

Tile Horizontally · 8 

Tile Vertically · 8 

Tilt · 147 

Time Based Data · 195 

Title · 62, 67 

Title bar · 2 

Title Bar · 2 

Title Defaults · 69 

Title height · 45 

Title Settings · 66 

Title width · 45 

Titles · 7 

Tool Bar · 2, 486 

Total Counts & Statistic · 156 

Tracking Bar · 57 

Tracks Selection · 39 

Trailer · 102 

TVD · 149 

TXT Import · 54, 56, 84, 194 

U 

Undo · 60 

Unit · 72 

update · III 

upgrade · III 

V 

Vector Plot · 456, 466 

Version number · II 

Volume · 171 

VSP Log · 24, 350 

VSP Log Creation · 351 

VSP Log Data Format · 350 

VSP Log Editing · 353 

VSP Log Main Settings · 351 

W 

WCL · 3 

Weighted Average · 137 

Well Log · 11, 232 

Well Log Creation · 233 

Well Log Data Format · 232 

Well Log Editing Methods · 239 

Well Log Main Settings · 234 

WellCAD Basics · 1 

Window · 3 

Window Based Model · 159 

WITSML import · 100 

Woodcock Diagram · 457, 467 

Working with Logs · 124 

Workspace · 2 

X 

X on Y · 220 

Y 

Y on X · 220 

Z 

Zonation · 144 

Zoom Options · 214 

INDEX - 505

WellCAD Basics - Advanced Logic Technology

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?